V
<■
•s.
- .v
'
THE
PRAKRI TA-PEAK ASA:
OR,
THE PRAKRIT GRAMMAR
OF
VARARUCHI,
WITH THE COMMENTARY (MANORAMA) OF BHAMAHA.
THE FIRST COMPLETE EDITION .
OF THE ORIGINAL TEXT, WITH VARIOUS READINGS FROM A COLLATION OF SIX MSS. IN THE
BODLEIAN LIBRARY AT OXFORD, AND THE LIBRARIES OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC
SOCIETY AND THE EAST INDIA HOUSE.
WITH COPIOUS NOTES, AN ENGLISH TRANSLATION,
AND INDEX OF PRAKRIT WORDS ; TO WHICH IS PREFIXED AN EASY INTRODUCTION
TO PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
BY
EDWARD BYLES COWELL,
OF MAGDALEN HALL, OXFORD.
HERTFORD:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY STEPHEN AUSTIN,
BOOKSELLER TO THE EAST-INDIA COLLEGE.
M.UCCC.LIV.
P, fc, I 3~(e
X
l
TO
HORACE HAYMAN WILSON, Esq., M.A., F.R.S.,
BODEN PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD,
ETC., ETC., ETC.,
IN GRATEFUL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ALL THAT IIE OWES TO HIM,
AN OXFORD PUPIL
INSCRIBES
THIS
VOLUME
Digitized by the Internet Archive
s.
in 2018 with funding from
Wellcome Library
https://archive.org/details/b30093016
PREFACE.
Prakrit is the general terra, under which are comprised the various dialects
which appear to have arisen in India out of the corruption of the Sanskrit,
during the centuries immediately preceding our era. Their investigation
offers much to interest both the philological and the historical student; for
not only is a knowledge of Prakrit (and especially of the principal dialect
usually understood by that name,) essential to the explanation of many forms
in the modern languages of India'* 5 —supplying, as it does, the connecting
link between these and the ancient Sanskrit—but, while thus throwing light
on the history of one branch of the Indo-Germanic family of languages, it
affords many valuable illustrations of those laws of euphony, with whose
effects we are ourselves familiar, in comparing the modern Italian and Spanish
with the Latin out of which they sprang. At the same time Prakrit is
closely connected with several deeply interesting historical questions. * The
sacred dialects of the Bauddhas and the Jainas are nothing else than
Prakrit, and the period and circumstances of its transfer to Ceylon and
Nepal are connected with the rise and progress of that religion which is
professed by the principal nations to the north and east of Hindustan.’ f
When the Greeks, under Alexander, came in contact with India, Prakrit
seems to have been the spoken dialect of the mass of the people. The
language of the rock-inscriptions of King Asoka, which record the name
of Antiochus and other Greek princes about 200 B.C., is also a form of
* For instance, cf. the Hindustani with the Prakrit forms
• 7 7 J •;
in Yararuchi, ii. 44. i. 9.
t Professor Wilson’s “ Hindu Drama,” Introduction, p. Ixvi.
VI
PREFACE.
Prakrit; and similarly we find it on the bi-lingual coins of the Greek Kings
of Bactria. It also plays an important part in all the ancient Hindu
dramas; for while the heroes speak Sanskrit, the women and attendants
use various forms of Prakrit, the dialectical variations being more or less
regular and euphonious according to the rank of the speaker.
Yararuchi appears to have been the first Grammarian who reduced these
popular dialects to a system; and, if we may receive the Hindu tradition,
he was one of the ‘ nine gems ’ who flourished at the court of Yikramaditya,
King of Oujein, whose great victory over the Sakse, as they pressed onward
towards India after overrunning Bactria, B.C. 56, is the traditional epoch
from which the Hindus still date their Samvat era. The chronology of
Sanskrit literature is extremely uncertain; but there are several circum¬
stances which, in this instance, tend to confirm the popular account, if we
may assume, as settled, the identity of Yararuchi and Katyayana. Kor this
identification, our chief authorities are the universal popular belief in India,
and the direct testimony of Somadeva, a native of Cashmere in the twelfth
century. This author, in his encyclopaedia of legends, called the Katha-
sarit-sagara, collected from various sources, and comprising a large portion
of the mythological lore of the Hindus, expressly mentions them as the
same person, and uses either name indiscriminately.* Kor the age of
Katyayana, we have some independent testimony, which, though not
precise, yet certainly throws his date far back into the past, and fixes it,
at the latest, as anterior to our era. Katyayana has always been the
reputed author of the Yartikas, or supplemental remarks on the ancient
Grammar of Panini; and both names are found in the accounts of the
Chinese Buddhist Hiuan-thsang, who travelled in India in the first half
of the seventh century of our era. Panini is called Pho-ni-ni, and described
as the founder of music, which appears to be the nearest Chinese expression
* See this point fully discussed in Professor Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, Introd.
(first ed.) pp. vi.—xi.
PREFACE.
Vll
i/i i
for a grammarian; the passage relating to Katyayana is as follows: *
‘ Tchi na pou ti (erige par les Chinois), limite de l’lnde du Kord. Au
sud-est de la grande ville, a 500 li, monastere de Tha mo sou fa na (foret
obscure); la a vecu le docteur Kia to yan na, 300 ans apres le Kirvana .]
Monastere fonde par Asoka.’ The Buddhist traditions in Ceylon all agree
in calling the author of the earliest Pali grammar Kachchayano; \ and,
7
if
although this is said to have perished, yet when we remember how very
closely allied Pali is to Prakrit, and that Kachchayano is simply the Prakrit
t Kt I
form of Katyayana, there can be little doubt that the Prakrit grammar of
the one and the Pali grammar of the other, are only the Brahmanical and
Buddhist versions of the same tradition.
The following work of Yararuchi or Katyayana is certainly our oldest
authority for Prakrit grammar; and its rules are generally quoted by
m
m
If
If!
later grammarians and scholiasts as par excellence the Prakrita Sastra.’
Other grammarians have generally followed its system, and contented
themselves with adding single rules, or altering the arrangement of
its details. Much discrepancy exists between the Prakrit of the
grammarians, and that which we find in the plays ; and it is of
great importance to have a complete edition of the oldest grammarian,
that we may ascertain, if possible, how far this discrepancy may
he ascribed to the multiplied errors of ignorant, and the unauthorised
corrections of learned, transcribers; and how far it may have arisen from
a difference of time between the age of the poets and that of the
grammarians, the dates of Sanskrit literary history being so uncertain.
The works of the two great grammarians Panini and Yararuchi have
/
* Quoted in the Appendix (p. 382) to Itemusat’s translation of the “ Foe Jcoue Jci , ou
Relation des royaumes bouddhiques.” See also M. Julien’s “Hist, de la vie de Hiouen
Thsang,” pp. 102, 165.
f The common date of the Nirvana of Buddha is B.C. 543; but Hiuan Thsang fas
quoted in a note to p. 237) gives several different dates as current in India in his time,
the latest of which is about B.C. 360.
X See Tumour’s “ Mahavvanso,” Iutrocl. pp. 25, 27.
Ylll
PREFACE.
been singularly different in their fate; for while the former has been
ever guarded with the most scrupulous care, and its Sutras (or 1 concise
aphorisms,’) revered with almost Masorethic attention to minutiae, the
latter has been apparently left to all the vagaries of successive copyists
and editors. The MSS. often vary considerably, as indeed might be
expected in an ancient work, which has passed through so many gene¬
rations of copyists, all of whom knew Sanskrit better than the dialect
whose peculiarities the work explained; but the most important variation
is in the number of the Sutras, some MSS. containing many which are
not found in the others; and as no record appears to have been pre¬
served of the original number, it is a question of some difficulty to decide
in particular instances.
The MSS. which I have used in preparing this edition, are as
follows:—
(A.) Ho. 1120 in the East-India House Library. A valuable MS.,
but frequently difficult to read. *
(B.) Ho. 211 in Professor Wilson’s collection in the Bodleian Library
at Oxford.
(C.) Ho. 210 in the same. Clearly written, but very inaccurate.
(D.) Ho. 158 in the same.
* It is this which Professor Lassen used for the portions of Vararuchi published in
his “ Institutiones Linguse Pracriticse ” (where he gave Sections i.—iv., x.—xii., to which
we may add Sect, viii., as given from the same source in Dr. Delius’ “ Radices Pracriticse ”).
Having thus only one MS., and that not unfrequently very obscure in its writing, it
was impossible for him to avoid many errors of transcription,. These have been
carefully pointed out in an article in the second volume of Dr. Hofer’s “ Zeitschrift
fiir die Wissenschaft d. Spracke.” I have noticed the more important of them in the
notes to the text, but I have not been sorry to escape the unpleasing task of exposing
the unavoidable inaccuracies of one whom all Oriental scholars must ever regard with
affectionate reverence; Professor Lassen’s “ Institutiones ” have been of such continual
service to me in the present work, that I feel bound to add my little tribute of
admiration at the skill with which, in spite of such inadequate materials, he has
accomplished his difficult task.
PREFACE.
IX
(E.) No. 151 in the same. A clearly written MS. in the Bengali
character.
(W.) A beautifully written MS. in the lloyal Asiatic Society’s
Library, formerly belonging to Mr. "Watlien of Bombay, for whom it was
t
s
prepared [pra/cdsi-Icritam ] by the Pandit Vishnu-Sarman, and transcribed
*
by Bapu-Sarman. Of this I have used an accurate transcript on thin
paper, belonging to Dr. Max Muller.
Of these MSS., we must at once separate W from the rest, as being
evidently a modern recension. It abounds with new rules [see App. A.,
p. 97] which are found in no other MS., and which in some cases spring
from evident errors on the part of the editor [as in those numbered 12
and 23 in App. A]; in others he seems to have met with two readings
in the MSS. and inserted both as separate rules [as e.g. v. 16 (cf. note);
vii. 23] ; in others he has interpolated Sutras from other grammarians.
W is therefore of very little value in a critical point of view, and though
I have consulted it throughout, and given its variations where they seemed
of importance, the whole has evidently been subjected to such an entire
recasting \^pralzaVikaranam\ that we can place little reliance on its
various readings, unless supported by other authority.
A and C are (as I am persuaded), copies from the same original MS.;
this was probably written in the Bengali character, which would explain
many of the extraordinary mistakes which the copyist of C has made from
ignorance of the character. After collating part of C, and finding it
useless from the absurd blunders of the copyist, and its evident identity with
A, where the genuine reading was preserved, I contented myself with
simply referring to it in passages where A was doubtful. B is a MS.
which seems to be composed of two parts bound together, though both
are in the same writing; the paging of the latter from the middle of
Section vii. has been altered to suit the former. In the earlier part it
generally agrees with A, but in the latter, especially in Section viii. it
l
X
PREFACE.
agrees rather with D, and even seems to borrow a few Sutras from W.
D and E generally agree, * the chief difference being that in the last five
Sections (and sometimes in the earlier ones) E continually gives only the
bare Sutra and its examples, omitting the explanation of the Commentary;
and frequently omits even the examples too. I did not discover E until
I had nearly finished my collation, hut I have collated it for most of the
second half, and referred to it in all cases of difficulty in the earlier parts.
The text of the following edition has been made from a thorough
collation of the MSS. ABE (A being taken as the basis), with the collateral
help of C and E, which may he considered as respectively co-ordinate with A
and D; W has been throughout consulted, and its Yarise Lectiones noted,
where of any value, but always as of inferior authority. "Where BDEW
agree in giving Sutras not found in AC, I have inserted them in brackets ;
and in one instance, at the end of Section v., I have similarly inserted
some from DEW, but their authenticity must be left for future decision.
The Sutras found in only one MS. beside W I have given in the notes;
the various spurious Sutras found only in W (nearly fifty in number)
are given in Appendix A.
Beside the above MSS. of Vararuchi, I have also derived considerable
assistance from the works of other native grammarians, as the Prakrita-
Sanjfvam, and the grammars of Kramadfswara, Hemachandra, etc.
1. The only MS. of the Prakrita-Sanjfvanf, which I have met with
(Ho. 1503 in the East India House Library) is imperfect at the commence¬
ment, and is, unfortunately, very carelessly transcribed, and full of errors.
Had it been accurate, it would have been of great service, as it seems to
be a commentary on Vararuchi’s Sutras, which it generally gives in their
* Thus DE alone quote the line from the Setubandha in the Comm, to iii. 52.—Por
our knowledge of this rare and ancient Prakrit poem we are indebted to Dr. Hofer’s
interesting article in his ‘ Zeitschriffc,’ and we trust that, in spite of the corrupt state of
the MS. which he mentions, he will yet give us an edition of the text. Such a work
would be indeed a boon to all Sanskrit scholars.
PREFACE.
XI
proper order, but in some places with additions and alterations. The
difficulty of deciphering the MS. has precluded my making that use of
it which I otherwise should have done. The work consists of nine*
Sections, corresponding to the first nine of Vararuchi. The general in¬
scription at the close of each section is Iti vasantardja-virachitdydm prdhrita-
sanj'ivanydm, or, as it is written at the close of the book, Prakrita-sanjivam-
vrittcm ; the only notice which I have found of Yasantaraja himself, is in
a passage from the Prakrita-Sarvaswa, which states that Markandeya, the
author of the latter work, commenced it after a previous study of the systems
of former grammarians, among whom he specifies Sakalya, Bharata, Kohala,
Vararuchi, Bhamaha, and Yasantaraja. f
2. Ileniacliandra was a grammarian of the Jaina sect, who flourished
in the thirteenth century, and wrote a Prakrit Grammar as an eighth
1 Adhyaya ’ after the seven * Adhyayas ’ of his Sanskrit Grammar. The
final inscription is Ity-dclidrya-hd-IIemachandra-virachitdijdm siddha-IIema-
chandrdbhiddna-swopajna-sabddn'mdsanavrittazi, etc.
This eighth Adhyaya consists of four Padas, with 271, 217, 180, and 445
Sutras respectively. Y r e have first the Prakrita-bhasha (or * principal
Prakrit’), in the first three padas and half of the fourth; the remainder
is occupied with the Saurasent, Magadhi, Paisachf, Chulika-Paisachi, and
Apabhransa-bhasha. Hemachandra’s opening Sutra is ‘ JBahulam,’ and the
bahulddhilidra is supposed to continue to the end of the work, j and to
explain any irregularities which may apparently contradict his rules,
* The MS. numbers only eight, but the final inscription of the fifth is by mistake
repeated for that of the sixth, which has occasioned the error, cf. ff. 43, 53.
7 An instance of this occurs in a S&tra quoted in Appendix E, p. 187.
Xll
PREFACE.
especially in the Jaina writings, Arsham ’ being his next Sutra. His
arrangement is frequently very different to that of Yararuchi, and in
many cases his rules are quite independent. I have found two MSS.
containing the eighth Adhyaya by itself in the Walker collection in the
Bodleian, both in the Devanagarf character.
[«. ] (Ho. 200.) A very correctly written MS., but some of the
characters are very peculiar, and in many parts the writing of the last
lines of the page is blurred and illegible.
[#.] (Ho. 171.) A less legible MS., but more easy of reference from
its having the Sutras of each pada numbered.
Hemachandra’s grammar is too independent of Yararuchi’s to afford
much aid in illustrating the latter’s Sutras; but many of his rules are
very interesting, especially those on the Magadhf, an abstract of which
I have added at the end of the translation of Section xi. [cf. p. 181] ; his
rules for the Saurasenf are given in Appendix C [cf. pp. 104—106] ;
some important rules on the Sandhi of vowels, and the doubling of con¬
sonants, are inserted in Appendix D and Appendix E [cf. pp. 185—187] ;
and I have frequently quoted his other rules in the notes to the
translation.
3. Of the Prakrit grammar in the Sankshipta-sara of Kramadfswara,
which, as in Hemachandra, is added at the end of the Sanskrit portion,
I have not succeeded in finding a copy (all the MSS. which I have con¬
sulted ending with the Sanskrit part); and I have therefore only used
the abridgement given by Professor Lassen from the Paris MS. in the
Appendix to his * Institutiones.’ As this work is of great value in
correcting Yararuchi’s text, it is w T ith no small pleasure that I have seen
among the publications of the Bengal Asiatic Society, which are announced
as in progress, an edition of the Prakrit portion, by Babu Rajendralal
Mittra. Probably no other grammar could be of the use, which this
promises to be, in correcting and elucidating Yararuchi; as Kramadfswara
f
»
PREFACE.
Xlll
has followed his method so much more closely than any other grammarian,
whose works have come under my knowledge.
4. To the above I might add the Prakrita-Sarvaswa, by Markandeya-
kavindra, of which there is a copy, bound up with Yararuchi, in the MS.
which I have marked D in my collation; but unhappily it is so carelessly
transcribed that I have found it quite useless to consult it. I may also
mention here that the commentary on the 13th canto of the Bhatti-Kavya,
which is so written as to be either Sanskrit or Prakrit, has not unfre-
quently proved of some service [e.g. p. 136, note),
Such are the resources which I have had at my command in preparing
the present edition of the Prakrita-Prakasa, and so far as a careful collation
of the MSS. may help, I trust that something may really have been effected
towards a critical recension of the text. Several passages still remain
doubtful, and for these Yararuchi must wait for better MSS. or a more
competent editor. The various readings, which are added at the foot
of each page, will furnish the reader with the different corruptions or
alterations of the MSS.; and it is these which we must chiefly consult
before we attempt to interfere with the Sutras themselves, or to correct
them by the rules of later grammarians, or the language of the poets in
the plays.
In the present edition, as the Sanskrit type required the use of an
inconveniently large size of English type to fit with it in printing, I have
been obliged to make my notes to the text as brief as possible, and have
generally reserved any explanatory details or proposed emendations for
the notes to the translation.
In printing the Sanskrit text, and especially the commentary, I have
ventured to relax the rules of Sandhi, wherever their strict observance
would have obscured the perspicuity of the rule, or would have mixed
Prakrit words with Sanskrit; as, whatever opinion may be held of the
propriety of printing purely Sanskrit works with such a relaxation of
XIV
PREFACE.
grammatical niceties, the objections can hardly apply to a Sanskrit-Prakrit
work like the present, where two languages are continually intermingled,
one of which by its very nature repudiates Sandhi altogether. I have
also throughout followed the MSS. in writing cf as the Prakrit equivalent
for the Sanskrit ; in the continental editions of the plays it has been
usual to write hut for this there is no authority,* 4 as the MSS. make
no difference between the ^ = the Sanskrit H, and that = the Sanskrit
• •
cf. The rules of Yararuchi evidently show that there was no distinction
whatever between b and v ; thus in ii. 2, and iii. 1, we have only one of
them introduced, and yet it manifestly is intended to include both; and
again in iv. 21, the prepositions apa and ava both become o, which would
imply that their Prakrit forms previous to contraction were identical. It
is not so easy to determine which of the two sounds thus absorbed the
other, and whether in translation we should represent it by b or v
universally; the analogy of the modern languages would incline us to
the former, but a Sutra in Hemachandra given below, f which is the only
passage in which I have seen the subject alluded to, seems to favour the
latter, which I have therefore adopted throughout.
Where I have occasionally quoted from the Prakrit of the plays to
illustrate peculiar rules, my references have been made to the usual
( *
editions, except in Sakuntala,’ where I have generally quoted from the
excellent edition lately published by Professor Williams, though I have
added references to that of Dr. Boehtlingk.
In the English translation, I have endeavoured to follow the plan
which Dr. Eallantyne has adopted in his edition of the Laghu Kaumudi.
All the peculiar features of the Hindu system are retained, while at the
* Cf. Dr. Trithen’s remarks in the preface to his edition of the Mahaviracharita.
t ii vr ii vf II
’srarvi ii ^rrw: ii
same time those explanations are added, which the sententious brevity of
the Hindu grammarians so frequently requires. The culminating point
of Hindu grammar is of course the great work of Panini; and it is not
impossible that some of my readers, who may be unacquainted with this
part of Sanskrit literature, may find in Yararuchi an introduction to his
master’s more elaborate work. At the same time, the whole system of
Sutras is so peculiarly Hindu, that a short translation like the present
may not be without its interest even as a literary curiosity.
I have to tender my sincere acknowledgments to Dr. Max Muller for
the kind assistance which he has so frequently given me during the course
of this work; nor would I conclude without expressing my thanks to
Mr. Stephen Austin, of Hertford, for the spirited manner in which
he has undertaken the printing of this book, and has spared neither
pains nor expense in carrying it through the press. We are indebted
to him for a series of the most elegant and accurately-printed editions
of Oriental books, which have ever been published in this country.
E. B. C.
Oxfoed, Decembek, 1853.
CONTENTS.
PAGK.
Introduction to Prakrit Grammar.xvii
The Prakrita-Prakasa (Sanskrit text) . 1
Appendix A (spurious Sutras).97
Appendix P (on Yar. iv. 25). 101
A
Appendix C (Hemachandra’s Sutras on the Sauraseni dialect) . . 104
The English Translation. 107
Appendix D (on Yar. iii. 58).185
Appendix E (Hemachandra’s Sutras on vowels in Sandhi) . . 187
Index of Prakrit words.188
A SHORT
INTRODUCTION
TO
PRAKRIT GRAMMA
* Prakrit’ (as has been already observed) * is the common name given to the
various dialects which sprang up in early times in India, from the cor¬
ruption of the Sanskrit; ’ and, as the word is used by the grammarians, it
signifies ‘ derived,’ thereby to denote its connection with the original Sans¬
krit. Thus, Hemachandra defines it—* Prakritih sanskritam, tatra-bhavam
tata agatarn va “ prakritamP ’ The later grammarians include many
varieties under the name, but most of these are probably the subtil refine¬
ments of a later age; as, the older the grammarian is, the fewer we find
the dialects to be; and the oldest, Vararuchi, has only treated of four—the
Maharashtrf, the Paisachi, the Magadhf, and the Saurasem. Of these the
first is considered by him as the most important, and it is this which Pro¬
fessor Lassen has treated as his ‘dialectus preecipua.’ Its grammar is given
in the first nine sections of the ‘ Prakrita-Prakasa,’ the remaining three
sections being severally devoted to the peculiarities of the other three
dialects.
As the method of Hindu grammarians 1 is very different from that with
which we are familiar in Europe, it has been thought that the following
1 All the rules of Hindu grammarians are given in the form of concise
aphorisms ( sutras ), which hang together as on a thread (whence the name),
so that frequently a rule contains one or more words which have to be
supplied in those which follow it, to complete their sense. The aphorisms
themselves are expressed as briefly as possible, and to facilitate this the
following abbreviations are resorted to:—A word in the genitive case is
c
XY111
INTRODUCTION TO
short abstract of Prakrit Grammar in a more modern form might not be
without its use to the student as an introduction to the original; while, at
the same time, it is hoped that it will give a sufficient view of the language
and its peculiarities to enable any reader of Sanskrit readily to understand
the Prakrit passages, which form so large a portion of all Hindu plays.
Prakrit almost always uses the Sanskrit roots; its influence being
chiefly restricted to alterations and elisions of certain letters in the original
word. It everywhere substitutes a slurred and indistinct pronunciation for
the clear and definite utterance of the older tongue; and continually affects
a concurrence of vowels, such as is utterly repugnant to the genius of
the Sanskrit. In the following abstract we shall first treat of the changes
which it effects in the letters of the words; and then those which it
effects in their declension or conjugation.
SECTION I.
1. Vowels. (Yar. i.)
Prakrit retains all the Sanskrit vowels except ri (ri, In, In) ai and me.
Ri initial, and with no consonant preceding it, becomes ri, and some¬
times even when a consonant does precede, this consonant being then
elided [Yar. i. 30, 31]. Ri also frequently becomes a, i, or u (especially
when preceded by a consonant). Eor examples, cf. Yar. i. 27—29. [Eor
Irif cf. i. 33].
Ai becomes e or ai, rarely i or i (i. 35—39).
Au becomes o or au, and sometimes u (i. 41—44).
Of the remaining vowels, e and o are no longer diphthongs, and may
*
bo long or short as to their quantity {cf. Williams’ Sakuntala, p. 228, note).
generally governed by sthdne understood (i.e., instead o/such a word or letter
another is to be used); a word in the ablative by param (i.e., after such a
word or letter, etc.); a word in the instrumental by saha (i.e., together with
such, etc.); a word in the locative is sometimes used in its proper sense (as
in Yar., i. 23), but more commonly it is used as a locative absolute, with
pare understood (i.e., when such a ivord or letter follows, the rule refers to that
which immediately precedes it, cf. Panini, i. 1, 66.) Va signifies ‘option.’
Panini adopts many more, but these will suffice for Yararuchi.
PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
XIX
Yararuchi in Section i. gives various directions for the changes of the
other vowels, but these are rather confined to certain words, than expressive
of general rules. Professor Lassen (Inst. pp. 139—144) has laid down
as a general principle that before two consonants a long vowel is shortened ; 1
that is, d, i, and u become severally a , i, and u (e and o, being common,
may remain) : as, magga for mdrga ; diggha for dirgha ; puvva for purva.
Subsidiary to this, are the two following rules: [ a. ] If the long vowel is
retained, one of the consonants is elided, as isara or issara for iswara :
[3.] A short vowel before two consonants is occasionally lengthened, and
one of the consonants omitted, as jiha for jihwd. F and o being favourite
vowels in Prakrit, i and u before a conjunct are very frequently changed
to these (cf'. Yar. i. 12, 20); in some words an initial u becomes a (of i.
22); for purusha, ‘ a man,’ we have the anomalous purisa (i. 23). We
may here mention the anomalous metta = mdtra, which, though not in
a
Yararuchi, frequently occurs in the plays [ e.g . Sak., Williams’, p. 183, 6].
2. Single Consonants. (Yar. ii.)
[<$.] Prakrit has no palatal or cerebral sibilant (ii. 43); n is everywhere
changed to n, unless it be followed by a dental consonant; and an initial
y becomes j ; with these exceptions, initial single consonants generally
remain unchanged. [ISLE. When a preposition or other particle is prefixed
the letter ceases to be ‘initial’; cf. Comm., ii. 2, on suurisof We find
a few exceptions, as una for punah, etc. in the plays, but these are not
recognised in Yararuchi; cf. also Yar. ii. 32—41.
[5.] Final single consonants are dropped, except m, and sometimes
n, which become anuswara [iv. 6, 12]. The finals of nouns often assume
a or a, and so cease to be final (iv. 7—11).
[Y. ] Medial single consonants.
K, g, ehfjt t, d, p, b, v, y (by ii. 2), may be optionally elided or retained;
but t and p, when not elided, generally pass into d and v 2 (ii. 7, 15); and
the elision of y (though not so given by Yararuchi) is probably absolute;
see Lassen, Sect. 45. The preposition prati is always written padi ; see
note, p. 116.
N becomes n ; t becomes d ; d often becomes l (ii. 20, 23).
1 This principle does not seem to be given in Yararuchi, but cf.
Appendix D, p. 185.
2 Or b, as it is often printed; on this, sec Preface, supra , p. xiv.
XX
INTRODUCTION TO
Kh, gh , th, dh, bh (ii. 27) may remain unchanged, but generally become
h (when th is not so changed, it becomes dh, especially in the prose, 1 or
*
Saurasenf dialect, cf. xii. 3); chh, jli, dh remain unchanged; th always
becomes dh; ph usually remains unchanged, but may become bh (ii. 26 ;
cf. Lassen, p. 208).
R often becomes l (ii. 30); this is universal in the Magadhf and the
inferior dialects. N, m, l, s, h remain unchanged. S and sh become s (in
some words s becomes h, cf. ii. 44). For examples, see Yar. ii.
3. Conjunct Consonants (Yar. iii.)
It is in these that the Prakrit changes are most manifest; and, as several
distinct Sanskrit combinations are often merged into one Prakrit form, it is
sometimes not easy to recognise the original word in its disguise. Prakrit
avoids a union of two consonants of different classes, and everywhere endea¬
vours to reduce them to the same; this it generally effects by eliding one or
the other (iii. 1—3), and then doubling the remaining one (iii. 50, 51); but
there are several exceptions in the various individual combinations. One
rule may be observed, viz., wherever a conjunct involves a sibilant, the s is
represented by the aspirate of the accompanying letter; as in hhh for sh, shh,
or hsh (iii. 29); or by li, if the other letter has no aspirate, as nh for shn (iii.
33). When r is involved in a conjunct, it sometimes passes into anuswara,
as ansu for asm; and the same also applies, but rarely, to v and s; cf. Yar.
iv. 15. In some cases a new vowel is inserted between the letters of the
conjunct, as harisa for harsha; for this, see Yar. iii. 59—66.
t
TABLE OF PRAKRIT CONJITKCTS.
•
The following table will show at a glance the various Sanskrit combina¬
tions which each Prakrit one represents. As given there they properly refer
to those in the middle of a word; but, by dropping the first letter, they will
equally apply to those at the beginning ; thus, hhh = hsh when medial, as
1 The Maharashtrf dialect is more peculiarly used in poetry, as we infer,
not merely from the usage of the plays, but also from such expressions of
Bhamaha’s, as 1 vritta-bhanga-bhayaf in iv. 16, and his reference to the
gdthdh in ix. 4. Cf. Lassen, pp. 370—378, who also quotes from the
Sahitya-darpana, ‘ noble women should properly speak the Sauraseni, but
in their songs ( gdthdh ) they must use the Maharashtrf.’
XXI
PRAKRIT G RAMMAK.
jakkka for yakska, but kh = Jcsh when initial, as khada for kskata; similarly,
pp — pr, medial, but p = pr, initial.
, % (?) iii- 1.
iii. 3.
, iii. 2. = ; Ifi,
cjg = iii. 1. = iii. 2. = ^ (7%, Sift, iii.
( :m ). iii-1-
73T = f iii- 1-
~ iii- i ■
If, rej, iii. 2. = jj, :jf. iii. 3.
U, -g, iii. 2, 3.
w = w (c f - iil 56 >
iii. 2. = (JJ-, iii. 27. = "g, ^ iii. 3.
= -S5J, iii- 27. = -gr, iii. 3. = ^ ( TSf ), iii- 30. =
( <^J), iii- 40.
~=[ = «*[, iii. 3. — ff ( sometimes ), iii. 5. = 'q-r, iii. 3.
— iii. 27. — iii. 17. = (e.g. se/Jd for sayyd, iii. 17).
*g[ = -SI, iii. 28.
= "ff, ^f, (sometimes), xii. 7 ( Saur .) = x. 9 ( Pais .)
Y = rf > iii- 22 = xf ( on ce), iii. 23.
j = iii. 10. = g-, iii. 1. = ^ (rare), iii. 11. y. 23.
viii. 25, 26.
1 Ii 7c = kt is sometimes found in the plays; as, mukka — mukta. See
Stenzler’s note on Mrich., p. 29, 1. 20.
2 Kk = shk, sk, only in a compound word; as, tirakkara — tiraskara
{cf. Lassen, p. 264); in all other cases it should be kkk . The same holds of
click = sell.
3 Chckk = skill, very rarely; e.g., padickclikida = pratishtkita, Sakun-
tala (Williams’ edition), p. 153, 1 ; cf. Lassen, p. 266.
4 Jk seems to stand for ksk in such words as jkina = kskina (Lassen, p.
263), but cf. viii. 37.
XXII
INTRODUCTION TO
^ ( rare ), iii. 25, 26.
^ = ^J, iii. 2. — (rare), viii. 44.
TTZ, = *ff, (once), iii. 45, 46.
^ == iii. 1. = iii. 44. = ii. 42.
T|T, Tjcf, iii. 3. — iii. 3, with ii. 42.
iii. 2.
TTS = ^ (1“ )* i 11 * 33 > c f- ii[ - 8 -
tT = Tfc iii- !• = W>W> i 11 -^ ^ hi. 3 - = c?> hi. s > 24 -
Tgj, iii. 1. — vi. 2. = ^j, iii. 3. = iii. 12. =
iii. 1.
^ iii. 1, 3. = ^j, iii. 2. = jr-, iii. 3 ( jr- may
remain unchanged, iii. 4).
”gr = ref, ^T, iii. 1, 3. = ■*!, iii. 3.
^ = iff ( Saur.j cf Hema-ch. 261, App. C. )
^ = ^ ( once ), iii. 34.
xrr = 3T1J, rq-, iii. 1. = TEf, iii. = TT, tf, ^Cf, ?4, hi. 3. =
iii. 49. = ( once ), iii. 48.
^ 7q5, xq? ( :ifj), hi. 1. = Tq*, ^T, hi. 35, 36.
^ ^ hi. 1. = if, sf, iii. 3.
“*• 1# = ^ iiL ^ hi. 3 * = W
(once), iii. 47.
■jq — ^ (on this rare change, cf note transl. iii. 53).
w = (^ w)> ^hi. 43 - = iiL 1 2 - = *?> iiL 3 - [^r
becomes fijtjf-; cf. iii. 62.]
1 As in the adverbial terminations; i.e., ettha — atra.
2 Pp — sp , slip, only in a compound word (cf. note supra, on kk), sec
Lassen, p. 264.
PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
XX11I
^ iii. 32. = ^|f, (sometimes), iii. 32 ; cf. vi. 49. vii. 7.
= iii. 8.
■ST = ^ xi. 7. ( Mag. )
^ (sometimes), iii. 18.
(sometimes), iii. 20. [ cf. x. 8, Pais. ] = (sometimes),
i. 31.
fr^T, fv? = -55, 4; iii. 62.
iii. 2. = ^^ (?), iii. 3. _ ^ (rarely), iii. 21.
= W’ iiL 8 ‘
m. 1. == ill. 2. = m. 6.
= if, 3 f, -sg, iv. 15.
^ = -331, -sg ; 1 JT, ^51; iii. 2, with ii. 43. = if, ^; if, 7^,
^1, iii- 3.
N.B.—Where three consonants come together in the Sanskrit word, the
semi-vowel, if there is one, is always elided, and then the remaining letters
are treated according to rule, as in machchha = matsya; unless a nasal pre¬
cede, in which case the two other letters follow the usual rules, except that
they are not doubled after the nasal (iii. 56), as vinjha = vindhya , dhy be¬
coming jh by iii. 28 (the nasal prohibiting the doubling, which would other¬
wise have been required by iii. 50, 51).
SECTION II.
We may divide Prakrit nouns into five declensions : 1. Those ending in
a and d ; 2. Those in i and i ; 3. Those in u and u; 4. Those ending
originally in ri ; 5. Those ending originally in any consonant.
The two latter classes have only a few cases which entitle them to form
separate declensions. Nouns in ri either change it to u or assume a new
1 Vv = dv (by iii. 1) only in such cases as uvvella for udveshta (viii. 41)
where a radical v follows the preposition ud; cf. Lassen, p. 258. We once
find v — an initial dv, in varciha = dwddasa, ii. 14.
XXIV
INTRODUCTION TO
termination in ara or dr a {of. Vararuchi, v. 31—35); nouns of relationship
admit also a nominative singular in a; and mdtri, thus becoming mda, is
declined like a feminine noun of the first declension (Vararuchi, v. 32, 35).
Nouns ending in a consonant (cf. Vararuchi, iv. 6—11, 18) either drop their
final letter, and so fall under one of the first three declensions (when, if
neuter, they generally become masculine), as 8ara for saras ; or add an a (or
a if feminine) to the base, as dsisd = d'sis. This, however, chiefly applies
to those cases whose terminations begin with consonants, these expedients
being adopted to avoid the necessity of changing the conjunct, which the
meeting consonants would produce; in those cases whose terminations begin
with vowels, the Sanskrit form is generally retained, modified by the usual
Prakrit laws; as, bhavadd (instr. of lhavat ), ausd for dyushd (instr. of ay us ).
See Lassen, p. 298.
Prakrit has no dual number nor dative case (substituting the genitive for
the latter); but it has two terminations of the ablative plural— hinto, which
signifies ‘from’ in a causal , and sunto, which signifies ‘from’ in a local,
sense. The following scheme will give the various forms of the first three
declensions, which are by far the most important. As nouns in u are declined,
mutatis mutandis, like those in i, no example of these is needed.
DECLENSION OE NOUNS.
1r^ masc.
(neut. = cR).
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. (neut. ^i|f)
cJ-^T (neut. gijTT? ; gmfa,
xii. 11.)
Acc. cj -
g^fT (V. 11; cf. note,
trans.) (neut. — nom.)
Instr. ^
g-^f% -ff
Abl.
( g^TRrrr g^HsTT
‘ g^lft g-^T
' g-^r^dt g^^m
Gen.
q^fTW -W
Loc.
Voc. (neut.
g^'T (neut. gxjrr^ -^)
pkakk.it grammar.
XXV
masc.
(neut. 7*-ft =
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. (neut.
Acc. ^frsi -
Instr. -^fraTTriy
Abl. -ft
Gen. ^frwT
Loc.
Voc. ^sfrrr (neut. ^f%)
o ^ttf -t)
^fYwG ^7*Tt (?)-
W?tft 'ft
<TT -#
^prVftw -xjr
^7ttHY ^hwf ( n - -t)
JTT^TT =
Jn«TT fem.
SINGULAR.
Nom. 'JTT^TT
PLURAL.
; TU^TT ( of .: note, tr.
p. 145.)
Acc. TfT^T
Abl. 7TmT?fY ‘ft
Instr. \
Trr^Tftfh -‘ifh
TTTWft -f%
Gen. 7?T^TTV ‘V
*TT*TTW -W
Loc. 1
Voc.
TnvrrsiY
We may observe here that feminine nouns in i and i are not distinguished
in Prakrit inflexion ; and the same holds of those in u and
d
XXY1
INTRODUCTION TO
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Acc.
Abl.
wfYt
Instr. ^
Gen. j
-W
Loc.
1 wtr ■
Yoc.
WT
wt = fem.
PLURAL.
I ; TS?§^ (? Lass. p.
) 307, note 2.)
-f%
wtw -w
SECTION III.—PRONOUNS (Vae. vi.)
The Prakrit pronouns follow the inflexions of nouns, hut also add some
peculiar forms of their own. The accompanying scheme of declension, as
applied to ja = ya, contains, it is hoped, all the forms which are really
useful to the student.
As a final consonant is always rejected in Prakrit, some of the pronominal
bases are changed from their Sanskrit forms before the case-affixes are sub¬
joined ; thus, him , yacl, tad , become severally ha, ja, and ta ; etad becomes
eda, and sometimes e (Yar. vi. 21); idam becomes ima ; adas becomes amu
(and sometimes aha, vi. 24). Kim, yad, tad, have also a second form in i, as
hi, ji, ti ; which, though generally restricted to the feminine, still furnishes
some forms to the instrumental and genitive singular of the masculine and
neuter. Prakrit, in fact, appears to have used the pronominal forms with
great laxity; thus we find the proper masculine form of the locative (as
imassim) frequently used for the feminine, as in Sakuntala (Williams’
edition), pp. 36, 2; 115, 3.
We may here add a few peculiar forms which Yararuchi notices; such as
to and etto for tasmdt and etasmdt (vi. 10, 20); se for tasya or tasyah (vi. 11);
sim for tesham or tasam; aha for the nominative singular of adas, being
apparently used for the three genders. Nam, though not given in Yararuchi,
is frequently found in the plays for enam and enam. Por hiyat, tdvat, etc.,
we have (by iv. 25) the forms heddalta, hetlia, teddaha, tettia, etc.
PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
XXV11
of = ^ (Masc.) f Who. 5
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. ('oineut.)
Acc. ^ -
Instr. ^i|T f^fTITT
Abi. -<5
Gen. 1 2
Loc. 3ff%T -f% -fa? ^fa
m (-5IT t -T neut 0
*\
*r —
wrf??h ^TTwr
■511^ ^
^g -g
Feminine.
SINGULAR.
Nom.
Acc.
Abi. wt^r (?)
Instr. f^TWT \
Gen.T sT^JT(?)
fai^T
Loc.
#q -t
w}^ -m
PLURAL.
j wr’sh
wfw? -^ffr M^wr -^fat
^ufa
ajT’qf ^fa; wrf%‘ wr^’ -w
^5 -W
The personal pronouns are given in Yararuchi, vi. 25—53. I have
enclosed in brackets those forms which probably never occur in the plays.
The plurals are regularly formed from new bases; as tujjha, tumha, tumma,
? ?
amha , and, in some cases, majjlia {cf. Hindustani and ..ysT 1 *).
1 We find also a neuter genitive kisa, used in the sense of Avhyr’ in
the plays.
2 Hemachandra gives these first two forms. For jasim, cf. vi. 4, var. loot.
XXV111
INTRODUCTION TO
tf Thou.’
SINGULAR.
Nom. <5?j ' ( H )
Acc. (rffj) 7$*T
Instr. ( rfT) rfV 7J*
C ) tf t
Abl. ( TTV^T
-f? )•
Gen. ( 7JTJT ) <y? Tfs^ W* ^
*\ *\
rf ^
Loc. rTT Vrni ?5*ni 75^)
PLURAL.
Tpil <5^
75^ 7^1 TT
7J%ft 75^N
^Tf^Tfr -wr
TT »T 75^TW TJ^TW
75^1
SINGULAR.
Nom. ^ ^ ^f%|)
Acc. Tj*j (^r?f%)
Instr. $ TNT TWTT)
Abi. ■flTft (TPTfrr thrift
-5 -ft)
Gen. ^
Loc. ^ (*ni)
a.’
PLURAL.
in prose, xii. 25)
xrr($?)
^Tf^Tfr -wr
( ? ) *rr ^tw ^
For the numerals, see Yararuchi, vi. 54—59.
1 In Sak. Williams’, p. 230, 1. 1, we find a nom. turn; cf. Yar. vi. 26, v.l.
2 In the plays more generally tue.
3 In the plays more generally tui.
PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
XXIX
SECTION IV.—VERBS.
Prakrit "has properly only one conjugation ( = the first in Sanskrit),
though fragments of forms belonging to other conjugations frequently occur
in the plays. The middle voice is very seldom used, and most middle verbs
are conjugated actively. There is no dual number, as has been already
noticed in nouns.
The only tenses of the active voice which remain seem to be the present,
the second future, and the imperative. Below we have given the verb
Tiasa, adding in brackets those forms which, though not in Vararuchi, occur
in Hemachandra, the Sanksh. Sara, and the plays {cf. Lassen).
Present.
SINGULAR.
2.
PLURAL.
i. -'j? -*47
^ Wf -TJ -3T ( -’f )
(in prose
3.
The middle voice has a second and third person singular, as sahase, sahade
or sahae.
Imperative.
SINGULAR,
1. (Var. vii. 18)
3. W?
PLURAL.
L VWT?fT-?? fj (1^)
2 - VWV (’fW -V)
3.
It should be added that, instead of a , e may be optionally used before any
1 On the absence of this form in Vararuchi, Lassen has a remark (p. 202)
which it is important for the student of Vararuchi to bear in mind, viz.,
Consulto poni a grammaticis formas maxime vulgares • a poetis contra pro
vario dicendi genere diversis locis alterutras pneoptari.’
XXX
INTRODUCTION TO
personal affix (vii. 34), as hasemi, etc., hasedu, etc., or, in other words, as e
is only ay contracted, Prakrit allows the verbs to imitate partially the tenth
conjugation in Sanskrit.
The future has several forms in Prakrit.
[ 0 ] That most in use has the following terminations :—
Singular 1. 2. ^gf% S. ^gfsg
Plural 1. 2 - 3. ^gfa.
These are added to the root with the augment i, as hastssam, etc,. The ss is,
of course, only the Prakrit form of the Sanskrit sy.
[6] A second form gives the anomalous chchh for the characteristic ss of
the future, as sochchham or sochchhissam, from sru ; vochchham or vochchhissam,
from vach (cf '. Yar., vii. 16, 17).
[ r] A third form changes the ssa to hi, as in hasihimi, etc. We have
also such forms of the first person singular and plural as hasihami and
hasiharno. (Note also such forms as hdham, daham , from hri and da ; Yar.,
vii. 16).
[For the very rare forms with the inserted jja and jja, in Yar., vii. 20—
22; as also for the rare preterite in w and hia, in Yar., vii. 23—24; See
Lassen’s Inst., pp. 353—358.]
The Prakrit passive (vii. 8, 9) uses the active terminations; but, for the
characteristic y, it prefixes m or ijja ; as padliia'i or padhijjai for pathyate.
Occasionally the y of the Sanskrit form is retained, in which case it is of
course assimilated to the preceding consonant, as gammai for gamy ate ; dissa'i,
or more commonly disai, for drisyate ( cf\ also viii. 57, 58.)
There are two forms of the causal; one in which ay, the Sanskrit addition
to the root, becomes e, as haredi from Jcara = hri (an a in the first syllable
of the root becoming d by Yar. vii. 26); the other in which are (a^?)
is added; as haravedi or haravedi (the a of the first syllable being only
optionally lengthened, vii. 27; cf. note, transl.).
The infinitive ends in turn, if a consonant precedes (which is of course
assimilated); and dum, if a vowel precedes; as vattum, from vach ; nedurn ,
from ni ; the latter being the favourite form, an i or e is often inserted
after a final consonant to produce it; the d is also often elided, as haseum or
hasiura, from has.
The indeclinable participle in tied becomes tuna or una, as hdu n a, from
hd = hri ; that in ya becomes ia, and is usually the only form found in
PRAKRIT GRAMMAR.
XXXI
prose, even in the simple verb; as gerihia, from genh = grah. In prose we
find a few instances of twa relaxed into dm, as gadua for gatwa, etc. (xii. 10).
The present participle active ends in anta (or enta by vii. 34); as,
padhanta , ‘ reciting.’ Vararuchi (vii. 11) allows a fem. form padhai, as
well as pcidhanti. The present participle middle ends in mana (with fem.
in mam or mana, v. 24).
The passive allows the termination nta as well as mana , and usually
prefixes ijja . The passive past participle generally adopts the Sanskrit
form, and modifies this by the usual laws, as suda or sua — sruta; laddha
— labdha ; the augment i is frequently inserted (vii. 32).
The future passive participle in ya, generally assimilates the y to the
preceding consonant; that in aniya becomes either ania or anijja.
On the particles, etc. (Var. ix.) we have little to note, except that iti
becomes tti, in which case a preceding a, i, or u is shortened; Main becomes
kkhu after a short or common 1 vowel, and Mu after a long vowel; and
similarly eva becomes jjevva or jevva. Iva usually becomes via or vva; for
api we have vi or hi.
The above little sketch of Prakrit grammar will, it is hoped, contain all
that the Sanskrit student will require to enable him to understand the
Prakrit of Kalidasa or Phavabhuti; of course that of the Mrichchhakatika
• • •
is much harder. I cannot conclude better than with Professor Lassen’s
words, “ Legitima veteris linguce cognitio non multa dubia relinquet;
csetera turn tenor locorum, turn tradita a grammaticis doctrina, illustrabit;
qurn deinde incerta remaneant, accurata grammatica investigatio plerumque
enodabit.”
1 It is important to bear in mind that e, o, and a short vowel followed by
anuswara are considered common in Prakrit prosody.
The compiler would add that he originally made a similar one for his own
use, and found it sufficient for his purpose in reading Dr. Trithen’s edition
of the Mahavfracharita, although there the Prakrit passages have no Sanskrit
explanations subjoined.
CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.
P. 14, 1. 7, on somalo add as a note, ‘ So read ABODE, Hemach., and
the Prak. Sanj. W has suumalo ; cf. note transl. p. 119.’
P. 19, add to note 3, ‘ the Prak. Sanj. reads Sut. 17, as in text.’
P. 24, note 5, read * B nah; DE nthah .’
P. 30, last line, add, ‘for this Sut. and its corrupt Comm., cf. note transl.
pp. 135, 136.’
P. 39,1. 11, read Sut. 3, ''HffT
P. 49, note 1, add to W’s var. lect. (after ssd so ), ityadesau vd bhavcitah ;
id-ed-ad-dta'seha bhavanti ; hissd, Jcise, Jcii (Cod. Mi), Me , Ma, kid ’; and
similarly jissa, etc., tissa , etc. Then follows nasgrahaneiia, etc. as in note.
P. 61, 1. 2, W’s var. lect. accidentally omitted; W for ‘ nitydrtham —
viseslianam ,’ has * niyamartham vachanamd
P. 111. Add as a note to i. 24, ‘The Prak. Sanj. reads this Sutra
JJd uto madhulcddishu, and employs it to explain the shortening of u before
a conjunct, as dhutta = dhurta. Similarly it uses i. 18 to explain the
shortening of %; cf. also note, p. 109, and Appendix D.’
P. 128, 1. 12, for ‘end’ read ‘middle,’ and add as a note to the Sut.
(iii. 36), ‘ though all the MSS. (except W) read sarvatra sthitasya, it is not
clear why the words are needed in this Sutra.’
P. 129, 1. 5 from bottom, for ‘see v. 45,’ read ‘as attd, by iii. 2; cf.
var. lect. v. 46.’
The has occasionally dropped in in part of the impression; I have
/
noticed p. 17, 1. 5, mug go ; p. 25, 1. 16, nittlidro ; p. 69, 1. 16 (Sut. 7)
nollah ; p. 72, 1. 10 (Sut. 23), jno ; similarly the e in sthane, p. 70, 1. 11;
and lesena, p. 83, 1. 12.
II sm: li
qrTf^fPn^n^faiY^fwt ’TWTfanfa: li i li
^T^faTfawiirJ^W^fTfw wT^JJTT^TW I
^tt if^r wf%m wto: wt li ^ li
-
II : II X 11
^f^njnrt s^i i ^?r ^^•pfa'siTT? ^T^Trj: ^rrn
7T13l(f1($W gf^rpR I ^TTfTWTf^ ^T I ^tcr
Tfn^ ^T ^^TT^T5irrf x l ^Jrf Tfa rpfTTT*JW I
II ^T ^^IJTfTI WT II » II
wzii-g T<iN*Tfci ^T^rfr mfa ^t i
RTftqft I trsre I ^jfwt 'SITfwt I W
f%^t *TTWf%Wt I Rf%^T RTf%*m I WTft^ I Rf?-
fa^t RTf%f%^t I Rlxf RT^xi I qf%^t RTf%^t I ^WT ^TRT II
i -j?^? i ^fvr^TfTi i Tisffe^t i ■JffH^i *f ^ i *fW-
f^*rj i T?f%% i ^ li ^T*f7r»nrr s^j ii
II II 3 II
t^Tfri 7^1 ^T^Trf: T^TTT^^T VT^ffT I 3fa
—ijj deest in A; Of. Panini, i., 1, 70. So C; ABDEW
l*^p|r. 3 MSS. Tjf?f^ffgr; Of. Lass. Inst, p. 265.
II UTUrTHSirJr: II
ii Tf% i fqgj i fqfwr i qfwr i fqqjqft i i
si
t^irm ii
ii sm sti nan
qiWST*? mirqqt «frqT Hqfw II T*5 II
II U TTTZfTfT^ II H It
arm TwqwfTl ^#3 m^-qq wiTT^irr »rqfq n imT 1
qjqr i "j%tt i qqrt i m#T i qqqi i sit n qpzrr 14t^q»
mq>q I WT^ar i | qq^q i qfqr ||
Ii %T qq~q f-q || i ||
q^qq^ ^qfTqqr qm^Tq ms qqfq i! qTT II
ii qfqwqqqfaqr^q 11 * n
qrewqqqfwqVqq^qqt qqrirw mqqq: ^Tq_ii sto »
whrf^qiT u
H qqqqreqrqfaqT qT II ^ II
©V ©\
qqq Tl^q TqrqqTqqrsqq qmfrq ms qT qqfq H qTTT
qr^ft I qTTT fl^fTT II
II ’qq^’NtSTII £- I*
qqqrrqjqT qqi^qqi ms qqfq qT u qTTsft q^3 ?qt t
’q^'ft ii
'i ^TTqT qmfT3 qT II To it
qiq q-fq Ptctt qjT^qqfqirqTTq, i sm q^qmf^iq:
•RfTS qtqnqj^^Y qqfq qT II W? *T?T I q^ ??T I qrTJTT
W (and Hema-ch.) 2 AB fqfwT Of. ii., 8. 3 B fqqjirl'.
•v 5 ’ >
MSS. 1 QJ- deest in A.
H qqq: qfT^(< q - : n
*
qcqTTT I qqqj qTq’q I qT~iqq?^ I qq^qj I
qq^ ^ttjt t q^TT qqrfr i qrf i ^qi q-Tqqft i qrq;q
^TTT^ I q^fH «3Tfq^ I qfqqT II I qqT 1
qqnr i qraq i qrqr?^rqr 1 qqqTq i qrav i qqrv i qrc i
s 9
qqqTfq i qqfrq i qqfTfaq i qifqrqr u
it C II \\ ||
qqq TqjqqTf^q qrrq t^ttV qqfq qT u qq q^T i tit
qqn i «it qqr ii qqq i qqr i qqr u
II ?q qfqf^qqq II V? II
sir ; I /'
fw Twqqqq nqfiqr^rr wfq wt i W fqq? I
wt fqi^T i qf t fqfv i w% vfqri i qv fqv i qq^- fqq^ I
qj fqi it fw i fq^T i fq^T i qfqjq i fq*? i fq^ i fq-g 11 qq-
qqw wqTqqT^Tqqr^TjTTq II
II ^TqfqqfTyrqfqqlq II 1.3 II
qwtfcq qp%fsqq?TVqj 'qqfTTT qqfq II qTT I qqr^T I qqft II
II q-qqir: qTT^: II \8 II
q^T^fqfqqsqqr q^qn^qiqnrq^qi q-qrTqq? qqrrfr
qqfq II q’q qqq qraqqqw I fqqqqfq f%t II ?fq q^
qTqjqiqqq u q;fq fqqre'qifgt u qqqqlvfq qqqtf^q q
' So ACDW; B, nj. ’B qfwr- ; W om.; Cf. iii.
34. 4 A (not C) adds m. ° A ^5J<5ra^5IW B -^5f^n|-
qq^iTqi D -qreqqqqi w qq qqq =q^Tqqw; A has no Sans,
explanation. A fqqfq^ C fq'qqfqtj; W has fqqjqqfqT = fq-
qrq?q: AC have no Sans, explanation. *
8
ii nTSrnr^nr: 11
II fq^rf^T II Tf<r II
ii ^fT^rsf^rat: ii i.y 11
s
^ nqfw II "3^ 1 fq=l^T II
!l ^rs fryra >?: ii ri ii
**p*ts^ f^T7.^t4m Wfa I WTT^I ^ II
feWT3i<T I ^T'fTT^ I II fs^IT faq?T t TV'fTT^TT I
^TTWT II
II Sfo'sfW’srn? II v° II
^WTTTTft^TT^ t^TTT ^frf || qtfr I ^T II ^TTT
$qq<q*TWqrq: I W*T ftqqj TW^^TfTW t<4 II
\5 \J
II TTtn: qTqtaTf^q II V= II
qT^ftq TW^Tf^tT^ftoTT^t T^DCT »iqfa II qifqns I
6 7 8
qn%^ i qfqpsi i ri^Tfw i ^fT«T i i riT^ i qftr ii qrqfa i
qi^tq? i qjqrfa i ti^t^T i qrffa i i ^<fta i q*fK ll
II q^Ttft^tY’far^ ll \c I'
t^TT^I qqTTTT VRfa II iff I ^TWT I I
qfrqT ii
ii ^?r ’qiiTw^q^ ii *® ii
?jq? ?wq*fq^ ^rcffqrrna wqf?i ii rfrq# (
1 2
A fq^rffr- a ftcrsrr w ; D n.l .: Cf. Lass. Inst., p.
110. 3 DW add^Tj: before 4 A ^ (?) CW f;; BD
AW #f^ T ; Cf. Lass. Inst., p., 270. 6 BDW add fqf%qj = sftferi
' A (not C) rp5ff*?T. 8 A Cf Lass. Inst., p. 257. All but BE
$■?• bd ^rqi^rr; Cf. n., 16, and Lass. Inst., App., pp. 49, 70,
II il
8
WtTT I qT^fTT | qTc^T I "TT^T I II 75^ I 5RWiT I
tfE^C i Tj^gr i wraps i ®ff*i ii ^tra^Tir wrwrrw^wra 11
ii <3^$ ^t gr ii *\ ii
C\
^Hf^nrsir vjgrrT^i 'sfmfT Mgfrf gT I
®\ ©V.
I II
©\
il ii ^ ii
*T^<T TWWTf^nT^TT^t *31% WTTT 3fgf% II 1
Tregi i i *r^t i srf%*rr i *rrw«i i ^rcfr n *rg}<r i
*J^T I ^ I *jff I I I II
|| THT*rt? TT: II =3 II
V?T 7W1 ^TPC^I T^fTTr *Hf?T II qfw II
ii ^<rr ii *<8 ii
*TV3>7n% -^fcfrT^^f WTTT HgfTT II ii jHJ II
ii m *t*s f%^ ii 5 8 ii
^|r«nT^ ^fcfiTT^i ^rfr wf?r 3T i TraNnm
fg<4 ii ii
11 TTg^T II ^ II
< 3*9
^JiTR^I TT^TTTT II WT II
II SW II = 3 II
’SlT^e^TW ^^TTf Vgfa II TUB I WT I I I I
'4«^T II (fH I WT I ^?TI Tg I ■gw II
C D ^g^sT'? ^T an( l similarly in Comm. A \=nyncf ?5f; DC
8 W adds gf^fij^ I ' A .
ii TrT^ri^grrsf: 11
'jni'Tj 3fT^3fTT3t T^TTf 33f3 II T3t I f33t I
fift i f%ft i f%ft i fwTirfT i fiwt i firm i f33Tit i
fr?N I f%T^T l f3fT3 l f^rwfr I ftr^T 1 ftf^iY I fa^T^TT I
f%t i fa^t i f%3T ii >ef3 i -^ift i vjv. i ffif i i 333 tt i
?€3T3f i *J3 i ?j3TT i tf3"3 I f^?3ir i ^f%3 I H'JfT i iraqr i
^f%3f I 3?3T"T 1 Ufa I 3if3 I 3m II
ii ii *?*- ii
^(=5 T3T33TfV3 31TTT 33f3 II l^r I 33T3T I
313t I 3^T33T I 3T13T I 313ft I fll^ I 33^ I I 3 tT3T I
3^^ I 3T13T I 3T3T13T II I I I ^T"
33 I 3T13J 3^f=3 I f333 I 33:3 I f%^3 I %3Tt3 I 3133 I
3T33T I 3T3rS"3r I 13T33T^3: II
II 333131 fr: II \o II
>41
3lt3^3T33i3fT3‘3l3fTT3l fr^TTI 33f3 II I ft^t I
fr^ft II
ii mfiirniiiTfa it si. ii
vj x ^
3Wt313 3333Tf3 giflf^TW 33fa II 3fl3T I
3fT3t I 3lfT3T II
|| 33 33 33T II 9 ? II
31^3 33 ^33131 3^TTT 33f3 3T II WT I
3^t II 3J3f%3f33T3TST33T3 > ^33 3 33f3 3T<333 <5
_ * **.*••• • -•<" J- ■ Jtr Jtf i '■' V'
133133 33T3 II
' A (not C)
Cf. i., 15. J BW faig^;
3 ADW ; C fcr^T; B fgwr 5
Cf. ii., 7. 4 A gives the Sutra
ii trrt ii
H jtti rfa. It 3 3 Ii
JfTT^ iOTTl T^tW^^TT^rr II firf%'rr II rf^-
\J2
^TT^tfTTf%VT5fTfT^TliH ^irTT^^TTT ^ WrC II
II ¥ff T^SfT^StT'gi: || 3 8 II
%^TTV3V*fr^TW T^iTTT H^frf II fg'sm | fc^ITT II
gnremT5If^; Wifg^ I ir^TT I T<gfa II
II T|fT Tf?T || 3>j ||
T^ITT *Rff?T II Wf I ijW I TTTT^WT I i^TT^V I
?r#rg? ii IN' i ffm i tTT^rf i l^rre i 11
ii twrfT^T ii 3#. it
t<gifvi ii jxwr i
^T^Tt I *TTT*rr I ^TT I ^TT I I I I
IT^TTf I WTfwT I ^T^rsro II ^g-1 %"3| l I I %T I
l^xr i i ^?nt i tvusr i i i ii
II T*g 3T II 3 0 II
t^fTW T^*TT^gV WT II ^?3T I ^ II
f%*<4 II
II T<ls**r II 3c |j
ifcsTW T^ttt *ref?r ii fa*re ii
ii tiN ii b <^ ii
t^TTT^I f ^TTT II vft II
1 2
C -^BR-. AC w- A (not C) very corrupt in the Comm, and
examples. D ; AB ^npr ; Cf. Lass. App., p. 66. W has i|^|
= ?Nj. 4 Cf iii., 52.
ii "RTSi rnmin 11
■c
II '9t<fr m twb sna a : ii Ho ii
^T^TT^I =?mTT »Dlfa 3T I rns*ftSr*R =ff^TT-
T^l ^ II q^Yft II
II ^TfT ^T<?JI 8\ II
^TtTl’^Tft *RfH II ^TT?t I sftsnsj I ^Tr^Tf I
s» s»
^Twft ii i i ^frspr: i 11
II TJTTTfr^ II 8^ II
^TT T^^TfT'S ^FJ TW^TOT^TTr HWfo II
WTT I 3T3T^it I WfT^T II qTT I 3TTT3 I I ^Tfifa^WT
& II fga^r: || ftwi I *>rewr II ^tsrw II
II ^T^r II 8 3 II
^tT3TJr^ ^NiTW ^T^TTT *Dffa I -^nTT^rH II
3TTT^ I II
II II 88 II
TW^Tf^W ^^rfr V?frf || | 3pT-
^<rr i i i ^4tfwr li i i -sfhs i
i II
II Tf^ 'RTlifrir^T^ ^f^fv^T3T II
ii *rem: ii
‘ BD gr^^T- 8 AW T^Wt 5 B Wsf^BT ; CD Tq-3T^T- * Only
W has ^T as a new Sutra. 4 ACW CW ^cflf^^ftr.
ii fppfa: pff#r ii
t
ii fppfa: pfT^p: 11
|| ^PiPlTPTpY ii ^ ii ■
PlfVPiTTl' SP I TP ^3rJT PTPpTTTSPT^PPP PjPlPPITPTTt
Pffarw pttp ppfft^p pf^PPi i p^jfp ptipYpt ptYp: 11
it 'PPwfp fp? i i ^igst ii ^PTprfpfp f~Pf I PiPPS II
^pp^fW i 'qffr^^WH: a 'PPrp'Tfpfp’p i pit
sf
■ptptpji
ii pr^ppsirrTPPPt to pttp: n =. 11
PTTflftPT PPTPT P^TPT'»pEr?riTPT*TPT'TY PPWPTPi PTPt PT-
>3
JJP 3 P PtHtT *Tpfp II PPR? rTTPrTJ *TWT I WpT II W I PTPJVf I
W^T H ^ I PPTO I II PTPI I PPTT I T^T II PPJ I Pi^ I
fppnpj ii i ppjt i *rprr it w i pit i fp^pr i ^ftpr 11
^ptp tIp PPifa ^ti^p^i p^p-jr^^nf^-^imfp ptYpY
VPpIPfPP TtTPPfp -pffrPfTT: ^PTTPTTfTTPTfTTpfp II
w i ptcwt i w^pj ii p^i i ptK i ii *?^jpr i p^pt i
PTPT I 3 PTT I PPP I ^pt I PP| I TPP I «P I f%rTT*r I P^T I
PT i p>fp i fpppr i ^ptp i ptppt i ppp i pfa i frpp ii
sj \$ x
PTPTP^WTPJP PT P PPrijp II I fpT-
7 8
PPPJ I PPTP I ’PPPPT I 'Pfjpf I ^Tpre I TPTTT I 'PPPT I
1 2
A (altered from its old reading ); W AC
VTPT7J; D^TPf-; Of- S.31. ‘w prj^Y. ‘ AC pf^P- ’BDW prHft =
PTTP- “ For 4)^ see iv. 5 5 ; DW ^HY- 7 B ppf; D 8 BW
N •RT3vrnm?r: n
qq^qnsi it i fqqqqq i qqm i qqqq i qjqqr i i
qroTT i qraiiqj qqi?qTq 11
tow ii q^fr i ^Wft it iiqi i qrf it
v#
vnrrfqwq 11 qiqrt i qvt 11 qrra i qv 11
II qqqTqf qqi II ^ II
sf N
qqqni^ qqfTTqf qtqT qqfq II q^T II
II qsfeqrfqqrqfq^T'g qqi q: II B II
'w^rfqfq qrm i q?qi wvr qqfw i TrrqTqqiqr: n
qrfwrr i fawr i fqirrT 11
II qtq>T q: II B II
xffajqTIsq q>q«TTq? qqrTTT qqfrT II qtqTT ||
II qf^-qrTqf q: II <t II
qf^nr^ qrqfTqqi qqnrt qqfa ll qf^qT II
ii m t: H ^ ii
^75 T(§qqTfTl qq>TTqj qqnrr qqfq 11 t *
q-PB^t I I 'qraft I qqft I qT«ft 1 qiTflft I T^T I
qq^ft»1 qqrfr i qqfc 1 qf%q^t H ^751 qqq 1 qnqq 1
(and A originally) D ^5pj-. * Altered to i* 1 A, D
has DW add several more examples not in ABC, e.g.,
8
^TWT, etc. A -fq<ra[-; DW give the Sutra qsfeqjfqqrqfqqfqr-
fqqr^fq^Tq qrqt q: and add in the Comm, the Prakrit forms
fqqqft 1 frw 1 (D fq^fr> 4 b omits 1 ^x^<ft 1
qqT^Y I 5 B fqq^. ° A 7 AC qfqq Tit ; D¥ qf?q^t 5
E qf%q^t B omits it; this ex. cannot properly belong to this Sutra,
ii H
U
I ^T^f?T I I ^fifa I I ^rf I | f%^»T I
W?I | TJTTfrT | 5?f7Prf% II
II ■Hf^^T^rfWqrTT^T^ II ^ II
fT^TT^l ^ITT Wift | ^TTjTtRT^: II qf%*nir I
%{%1?T I II
ii < mfrWTnvP $: 11 <l ii
qqfWTrrxr^-gTWTT^ II I UT?t #
ii qfire w: ii \° ii
*ifwnr^ ri^TT^t w^tt'CT 11 11
|| tTTW?f^ II U II
tTT^fT^ TJ^fTW ^TTT *Rf?f II TT^TWT II
it nft^^TWcfT^Tl tt «r: ii 15 11
"WITT II I qf^TT I ftwt II
II ^TIT?’ t: II 13 II
’IsT^'S!^ T^Tt^fr ^frf II qJ^TT II
|| II 1,8 II
qW^Tfafa ^ ^T ^3HTW ^f?T II TT^TT^ I
yet it seems to be confirmed by the Sanksh. Sara, rule 71. W reads
nfn^T'JrfTI^T^W^rr^fTT^T^^:- 2 BE 3 A omits
‘A E ^t^«TT; W -qb BD tiJT^WT; B then adds
«f ^^TT: f^rj ^^JJTWSI
W 3 TTT: I WTW fqr Tf^T^TW ( ? ) I; Of- s - 40 > and
S. 38 , note ; the Sanksh. Sara has a rule (92) tjtY ^TfTT^fTTt f
g
WTisr 1 wbf qj; see Lass. Inst,, p. 197. A '’^‘1?; W
ii nTfmwnn 11
V?
I II I ^TT’ST I WT^ST II II
ii ft q: 11 nil
tmT^^WSTTf^ff?Wr WTTTTTT »Rfa II wnfr I qq-
Tt I ^Rt I II -STR I I I ^RTf II TTT^r-
^nrwT^ ^fV’fr ^ *Rfri rf^re f%f^j: 11
11 ’^Tifii r tt: 11 \$ 11
^rrStTSR^ q^fTT^i *ranrt *Rfa 1111
11 ^ftar^teratwf WT II 1 . 0 ||
^rrftersr^ ^sft*nraprr7hr w wt *Rf?r m ii i
^rift W I TfPJTt^S I T?lfw~55r | VfTW}^ I 11
11 wrmqf f: 11 n 11
SFT*rrJ[# TOTl 'fq»TTT »Rfa II Wr?T II
|| qrq$ <*T W. II XL II
qqfTTR *R 1 TT *Rfa II <swr II
II fr ■?: 11 = o 11
H’W^Tf^rf^qY ^rfr *RfW 11 1 fq^fr 11
II « 7 T 7 T 3 T 7 !r;j-in| 7: II =??. ||
7 qfTTR 7 q\T 7 T *Rfa II W 7 T I W"* 17 T I II
• 11 Rif 7 % *r: ii ?? 11
RifeqrT!^ 7 q>TRq ^rqrrrr *Rf% II ^f%Tt II
Added from BDW. A om. W ^JTiftqTY. A gpf; BC
DE W gpf. °ACW gpf; BD -^pf. °A reads iyarn
7
in all the examples; W expressly adds pakshe yalopah. BD n 3 "t[-
A BEW (and probably AD, but these are not so
ti ii
|| W t| || 5B ||
^T?;^T^iisw*rrfipi:<TO *rarcft »refcr 11 ^rfw*? i Tmrs i
II •are ii ^rf^R i i ftrfsrrr ii
ii 7t i: ii ^a ii
^TTf wfa II I 5|^t i
^f^tT II
ii Wtif w. ii =?y 11
WtelP^ ■S^fTT^I WTTT *Rfa II II
ii vr *?: ii ^ ii
WTWT^tSWTRTf^rra R 5 lft wfa II f%W I iwif%-
^5T I R*?ft I II
II T> II ^ Ii -
^TTr 3f3fw II
v$
rfTWfTJI I II W II flrr I II W II *TTTT I
wg'ff II W II TTf T I gf?TT II II R'fT I ^TRTf II RT*I T<§^ II
7 8
w*rr i wgtsfr i i i 'gw^wfr n
w=r i i ^ i si'sr i ^tt^t i ?nra i tt^t i ^far i
v#
w i thht i w*r i tp?N*j i i i ii
clear) <j; and similarly in the ex.: E has in Sut. ; the Sanksh.
Sara has see Lass. Inst., p. 209. BDW and probably A ritfTPR*
2 3
A om. WDE have the ^ throughout; the other MSS. vary
4 •v
between ^ and ^ ; Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 209. BW ; BDW add
OTT = 5 W 6 ACDE ; BW -tit. 7 Obscure in
g
AB, but plain in DE. Plain in CDE ;* DE add the Sans, interpr.;
W has several different examples.
N tl
Vi
II n*rofafa*rfatrwT| II li
^^^T^rTTT 3fwfa II I fafe^t | ||
li %arif w: 11 rl ii
tawor®^ 3ref?r II ^TT li
li tt *r: II \c II
wrft *ndw II I I
jtwt i sifsfj^fr i i i ^?nft i t^T^fr i fa-
sf vj sj
i *dwr i ’sfa^ ii ^fr^T i ^tw i i ^rfafaT i
^ptTT I 1 I ^ITT I fa^TfT 1 qfaWT I Tlfa^r |
TW^nr^: ii
ii ^T^trr 'si: ii s? n
^TTfafa faw ii ^tt*' wfa it
wft i ^reV ! ii *rfs i *rarej ii
ll ?w «r: it ^ li
*rfinp^ *renx^ wTft ii wft ii
11 faTTH II 35 11
faTTfTIf^ ^T^Nfal ^>Tfr 3^ffr II fa^T^t II
WE have <£ plainly throughout, and so mostly A ; but the other
MSS. confuse it with 'g, D has ^ twice • Cf Lass. Inst., p. 209, and
2 3
Sanksh. Sara, S. 60. W ^3Tf- A $TL but the i is a later
insertion, and contradicts i., 13, and the other MSS. A fwT^T; w
g
f%-. D an( ^ a dds ^e Sans. ^Lbl^ffT; Cf Lass., Inst., p.
100; W om. BC if; W m ; D ; A not plain. The t| is plain
in BCD ; W has
ii qfr#;r: 11
II f;w W: II ^8 II
^T^TTT wfa II W'sft II
ii •?: it b \ H
Tfg TITT^l TT^fiT II ^Wt I I ^T9> II
II ^i?qft^RfT^TTl qi: II 9S I!
ti^t^ 4^ T^rff »mf?r ii trwt i xfif%fr i 11
ii trw sf^ ii ii
TRT?U^ sfrj TjgnT^I TRUITT ^f<T II II
II f%f%*jf «: ii ^ ii
H^nrl' ll ii ^tf¥»r-
fn^TXTfinr *1 *Rf?r ii ii
ll ?: ll ^f_ ll
'SIT^Nl g^TTT II gW'tf II
ll 8 t: ii 8o it
*nW3p*I HT^W WTTf H^frJ II WTWT II
II w: II 81 II
Tj$*rr*n^Nr^j w^TTf *Rfri h wft i wgptY i ^iwr i
SHTWl' II Wft I I I II
1 2 3 4
A W i}^ra-. DE om. Sutra 37 and Comm. After
Sutra 38, W gives a Sutra, found also in Hema-cli., (cf. Sutra 40)
WT w: with ex. TJITWI I ^TTWr I tjtf-
C\
WlT I WRWT I W I ~r*T"T I " ABC } DE ; W
J vj
(in Comm. t5TTt£T*T)- abc tsrrwT; de fawt; w wrf-
ttt ; Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 197, and notes to S. 12 and S. 38, supra.
ii TfTiuTwnr: 11
II 5ft W: III II 8?> II
UT^fTfl fl^rT I Wf IITTW WIHTT 5flfl II I
ITWI? I IKW I ?fTWt ||
si
II wit: i: II 8? II
I[IiTTII>R r it: HiTTC *Tlfl II W II ^Y I f%WT I
^iwr II W II ifY I I ITITIf II
II 'f: II 88 II
wrw srefYr ii i ttutts i
ITT? I IT? II
II iwif IT II 88 II
fJWTlt HHTTITlt IT W ^5i Mlfl II t?itt
thHY i t^wt t^wT i t?t?t t?ttt ii
\$
II flfll W II 8$ II
7 8
ww ^inrY Hifi ii frsrfY ii
II ^sjTit I?: II 8 a ll
v#
wt® itsttY *rifi ii iYi?t ii
II Tfl IT^fl^I ITSilwriY ’I^lil'CTflfwiT
feita: ifr^: ii
1 2
W only ?n ^:. Altered in A to TfTWflWt; BD W add
f¥ I li^TT | ^UtR:- 3 A ^r- 4 A WT- " W ; the other
MSS. are indistinct between -<jY and -'jY ; Of. ii., 24. W etc.
7 DW add 3T. S DW add f^wl; Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 219. W
BD add a reference to i20.
II n
II H
II mfTSnij; HWrlTTmtll it 1 ||
gn-ftoritiTiiT ^wr^frfir7n^rt gftfr argff 11 ^ riT3* 11
MtI I f%7?Nrt II W I W^T I II w I W73TT I fssft II
2
ff^t I I ^WT^T II I ^T I iTUlft II ^ I IttY I
WtTT II W I iftft I fa? ft II W I wftp9 I ^TT II MW I
■s*
facjr’qST | MiRJ | f%3TJ I I 5F?5f I -Hrtrsr I ^rqTrf | |
S VJ ’ \ J '
TTSiT I ^TT I qf TK I ft ft I f%KT I ^rf%n I iN II
VJ J
ft wft fjijsjt if << I
MWMHWifMmTWT ftft II MW I
i Tfjft i wif 1gift ll «rer ll grift ll mw II ftfrt i ftift II
ll ufw sr*rt II 5 II
wgMiwgnrfwTgrt MwfrtgfMifwgTMt ftft Mgff ll
ww ll i gfif i ffwft ii gw ii fT^fr i ii g^r n
Wf i wfit ii i gwrgt i fgnsg i watgr i gw i wf i aps it
\9
H f- ft WT II H II
^arsf fw ^t frfr Mgfg ii frfr i ^tfr ii fft i fft ii
^ 1 ^ 11
1 Added from BDW. Altered in A to -^f. Added from BDW.
4 So in all the MSS. 5 W ft# (wanting in BD) which it explains
6 7
by ft's- A gT7ft (wanting in BDW). A originally #|rfY>
like B; W wf^’sgf; Of. i., 20. 8 BD add ^]rt - = ajW'
ii TfTHrrtm-Jr: 11
ii si: it * it
stcirn^f wVqY *raf?r 11 wssfr i tf^r^sfr it stt-
sjT^jrer^HTfw rnr whi: 11
ii ^wr^^rnt: H i H
wt«fr II *T^| I TWTW II
ii *rsn3 w u u
*rs?T 3 srjn^ wHV *rwfi=r 11 *n^rr 11
ii ill? is * ii
$11 Tsr^w:f%rrr*rr f%fa-
II W*3 I I ^RTWT II I 3njfTT I
^RfTfr ii ^psi i 11
it ^ ii i. ii
"sfv^TTT S*j I m
tj
*r*r’i?ip$ n i ^ifi 11 toiw wr
W *g7TJ
II b: ii \° H
Z^TTT vrafrl II wft 1 f^ft II
s»
II II \ X II
^^nrf wfa ii ii
This Sutra corrupt in AB (and in A the Comm, as well); CW S{1;
DE Sf5£(; BDEW agree in the Comm, and ex. W adds Tnrr^fr-
3 4 5
W BDW i^j; A ’JHIJ. E has ^ and so originally
A; this is required by S. 50; Cf. Boehtl. Sakunt., note p. 175 ; BW
qr; D. n.l . Sutras 9, 10 and 11 are confused by Lassen. A
it w#5t: qfr 5 ^ H
V-
II w 5 © II ^ H
^janrr *rqf?r i ^rfwrqmi^: 11 i i
^ i ^re^rr i ariwst ii w i i i ^iqqr i ^rt^r ii
J \i
ii 4 ^ ii ^ n
•^re-ar^ ^i^tt^i ^jairr^r q ii rprr ii
ii w w: ii 18 it
^ware? ^sreift »rqf% ii ^»fr ii
fl ^JTWTq'^T I! 1M, II
•^fTW^si? *rere? ^^rpfr **qfa I I *T »Tqf?l II
\S \J)
^Tqi II "*}^T Tf?T II Wf I II
C\ C\
ii qjrrsi ii i$ it
wT^qrai^ *i*rei wift mfq it ii
II ^arwfw^p 5?: II i^> ll
^ tare T5rTfwrenre^fl"g ^^ttt «ref?r ii arar i
s# ^9
*P55TT I ^f%iTW II
C\
$^£[. So BDW ; A’s is corrupt; see Lass. Inst., p. 103.
2
This Sutra with its Comm, is variously written : AC (and probably
B originally) as above; DE (and B now) with a correspond¬
ing Comm, but the same ex.; W confuses Sutras 13, 14.; the text of
AC is the simplest, the ^ being elided by iii., 1. So DE, and B
has been altered to this; ACW read the Sut., ^5f;,
and the Comm. pr^Tj etc. The Sanksh. Sara follows
DE in its two rules 115, 134, the latter being '—py | A
5
So MSS. ; Cf. Lass. Inst., App., p. 53; D adds a reference
ii TjTUfTiwrsn it
o
U t: I! X K II
TT7T3 ^*T *rcf?r II gf I ^tt I i ^h: I
*t?r H
n gr n \l ii
t^rttT Vffa fT II ^ff 1 ^-ssfr II
ti ft* it \e u
ft'* TWTttr Mffa II '^Tfrt I bt-
ft* I ftfc* II I Ttt I II iJW^T^TlifrRtrr S* II
II W: I! ii
^f ww w *rantr vffw ii * leer i w i vhwrt ii
a ito a: n ^ o
<T a^TTT Mfft II ifT*V I WftrT I tft II
a yxR o ^ o
HTf»nx^ a^ritc *r*fa II a
ii * wfrlt* a ^ H
V<! <T T<*rRt a^ritT *T Mffrf II VtTT I farfit I
fxi^TW | fTfT I ^TfTrr I W^tT^T I fwfrT'sfr I ffrT^T I
’*rfr I ^Tltt I JTrft II M?T I sftffT I f (TW«T I fT^T I ^Tf(T I
^3 ©V
i f%f i ffrm i ^Tn i graft i nftr ii
®\
il »raV: ii s h ii
1 2
to iii., 50. So MSS.; Cf. i., 5. " D adds giTj’^iiTXrf^'O^t'JI'^Tf^-
^l¥T*rRI»I ^TT: W<T s (added in B in margin). BD f% .
4
A ) f° r the doubling in the ex., cf iii., 50, as in. all
5 6
such cases. BW om.; D cf^T = AW ^rrft*
II II
TO T=JfRT VRfa II ^TfT II
II ^Ml ^ II
TT?TO ^ -f r rnf?f II 5 I 1 TT I W*TfT I flwt I fwjt II
n sparsit ^wwr: ii ii
<to^t twto *rgfa 11 <ro 11 1
II II T"^T I fTOFT I II to II f%^fT | TOT II
fro i Trar^ i ^wr i froT i to i i 11
n w#^: ii ii
■«i m TWTORNrcft *Rf?T 11 tro 11 toj i 11
"TO II g^SI^T I TOT’gT II TO 1 TOR I qTW I '’JUR ||
H *RW* 5 t II <R y
tzk^t wrt *ref?r 11 tzto ii i qmfT 11 w*?i ii
t?rt i ii to ii ^r?fr i ^wr h
n 'qr^ut^'i w -«
'srfe T<£hfwf^j tor^i srrt *rcf?r 11 ^roft i troft i
-^T I WtT I I <3f%Tpr I wfr^ | TOF I ^-^FT I WR I
fr^fr i i ^ i f 1 1 i^r i g-^ft i g-^fr i 11
i i to i i to i 'sfeg i i i i
'J \$ vi
to: i ^ i *rfoqrr i |i i i ^ i groj ^ i i
twtortst: ii
12 3
W adds fq*f^. “ W adds fqjqrt- A ^F55fT: • see note S. 21.
4 5
BDW DE qqjqs§; AC seem to read qqjqj; B¥ omit it;
Qy. q^^ ? see Sutra 30. A fq^f (?) The q|j in A is only a
rudely formed ?}. BD add = TOT- W *TO3 = S^-EER-
So BDW, with Sans, qysq; A is not quite clear. ” AW qqj; B -gqj.
II RTUrnmw: 11
li S RT II ^ II
W^ilTl W^TTt *TRfa RT II W*TT I *§*TT II I RWfII
I II ^^TTT^IT^TT 15H ^<T3I«C ’qY(*RTf»RT-
fafa ii
II w*nfw§«9 W- II II
y T<irw ^ttt wfn it rri n
fwr i ^t i wt i fg^-srr ii rTr i i wr i f%^R it
> S
ii t^: ii ^ ii
^r^»rf r? TW^T^sfr »Rf?r n 1 rts^ i 11
w ii i rrir ii ii i 11 is rr? 1
f?n$' ii ii RRifr i f%Tj^r ii =?% i 3i3B i tor i to i few i
v3 Sj s3
URT I TO^! I <ft^5 I 'R^f I ftr^I II
II -XT. II ^8 II
fwi^ *pfiTO 7m TRJRRT^Tf »TRfR II II
ii toto w. ii ^8 ii
Tm^rtxr RRf?r ii i gus i f^-wRT^r it
RTO I I fa-tq-TR II
v4
|| TOTO St^R fTOWTO II 3S II
' DE aid ^Tjrf here; W adds ^ sfq | TOCt |
2
BDW ^=f ; A wrongly ; AW transpose ^SJ and ^ in the Sutra,
g
but A agrees with BD in the order of the examples. BD ^fTT^;
A > "W 4 Lass. om. A has a marginal addition
sfq ; C ° DW fqrwRHrT; ABC fqttEjpsfr. 7 So D ; W
g
has fipsn^. W ; it reads S. 38 before S. 36.
II II
wre xr *;ar>rRiT5fr *n*fa 11 ^»sY i
xk^ H wsf i it
11 fir ^ ii ii
XJref fifij<Tj% TaPTOT^ft II XfTf^f%^t II II
II S’srfw II 3x: ||
Nj
graj-jr^ xq ^TfY cfr^T II 3TTT ||
xspsrfir fir II WWT II Xfrtq X3^r«r II
J N
II grTWTW II ^£- II
cfrntTWT^ ^nrt vr^ffi n crt^t^wV ii
ii ^t w: II 8° II
ttw w^rfY *Rfir ii ^ i xrfi^?? i 11 <w i i
t^KY ii w i firmer i *r^t ii qf%^r i i w i i
finjT i ii
\» s*
ii ^w: ii 8\ ii
■% ^fT^[ 3^- TW^T^T *Tgfif II II
ll *jYrxg<rr®ec|*iY; ii 8^ ii
•?r^=ir V#rT^t: W ST^rRI W^fY H K^fif II ^T^T-
W w Tfif ■RTTT T?firf%'Sra II -3^^rr I II
v9
1 2 3
DE ; W X||^fV ; BC corrupt. ABC om. W Xff%f%fT.
ABC om.; w -^r^T; Of. i., 2. 5 AC qrf T^xijY. BD add ^ -
7
So BD ; A originally had ^ but has been altered to
to * 5 ^*; W has ; the same holds of the Prakrit ex. in Comm.
A B c ^sfT; D ^xqY; E w
v»
■?rT5^T- 9 A ^^cf;; BCD (C ^-) ; E ; W ^xqY ;
ii TTTiifTTr^m: it
^8
11 M \ II 8? II
T<?TTOt ^ T^TOTTTT *T?fa I ^IVT^ TU* II 5|WT I
5# ii i ii
II ^TOTJRTOT^I w: It 88 II
*H Tt TWTOY: TOHr?^ TOT?f Tjs^rg ^^1 W^T^f
wfa ii ’toi ii topti ii w ii wr i from ii totwt i tot-
sl
TT II TOW I ^TT I fTWT’T I TOTJTrfJ TOT^ »
n ii 88 ii
<TT«r^ TW^TT^Y Trwfw II rfT^fW^ ||
ii fM^T% w: II 8^ ii
w tw*t fUT'sfr ii faf^TOrr ii
ii !%w wr gi ii a® it
f^gnjnpT TOTTTOTTt 3T ll%^f^TT 1 faWT II
It wwf* W. II 8* I!
^ITWJITT TOTTT wfw II ’TOIT II
in such uncertainty, E’s reading has been followed, because it at once
brings them under iii., 1 ; Cf. Sanksh. Sara, 138, 190. Cf. iii., 2.
2
So CW and probably A (for Lassen’s ; DE read Sutra
giying ex. in Comm., but ^y, Tj^y are covered by iii., 2; B has been
3 4
greatly altered. BD XJTSJXXI (D originally -<(jx) > AE -jjy > W -xft- A
5 B tjt: ; T|^:. ° So BD ; C VRXTt; A *srfV; w gives the
Sutra ^X I adding to the Comm. "asWR^ij ^T^^X‘
faf?r wfire: ll fawt’ ll- 7 bcd^^-; w
8
; A C ^X^T > A originally ^yxtJX but altered to ^x~-
II S'ffta: II
II II Hi-- II
^rn T^fT^t R3HTT irwfrf II ^nj | II *nRf^RTT
fWrq: II
II iNli^tf^aR-pfr II <io ||
*TW ^T rRIR^T^T ^f?T II
1TW rfRnTjl *frf I II II *Tft I f^ft I TWt II
^T^TfafTT ftf II I ^r^WT I ^ II
ww i ?rr*f i *jfir i Yfe 1 w i ^rf%m i i 11
II <i*tg ^p: 33 : II y? I*
^t ^wt fenta^'qT <*t fgf%7Tw ^r: jr*m^j<ft*rr ^t
ii ^nr© feffcrei uwgrsw er<¥t^rr f^R f%-
Vt*R I ^sirat; R^R? : ^RTTTRT^ vrm
^ri: II
iN^t II WTW I WT I *?^T I fW^IJTT I "T/TT I fw^TT II
vj \J ^
^TTW || f^ft | Rf| | <n^t | fpfifpTT I fwTSTTTT I ^tWT I
I I II
3JTW*T I ’?RT I I f%3R: I waj I f%WT I f fe • **f¥ I
i fwsf 1 fwir i *ra i RWt i ^f% i pr 11
11 ^nf 5 ?i ii y » ii
1 Gf. viii., 40; and Panini, vi., 2, 59. " AC *j; q^;. 3 After
AC h ave ^fij usureffto^Yf^N rre tit-
^T^rfo and Wseems equally confused: the remainder is therefore
given from D, to which B has been altered : the examples are given
as in BD, A being in several places illegible and confused.
E
II irrisrpwni: II
33*tt 3^? ^ f^ wfw ii w ii
Tr^T^tiwifr^n' xr<3 ii vN i w i mfvri i trapsY i sra-
^fr i ii i i 3*13 i ^r*rf i 3?st i ^i33> i *rt=R 11
ll ^-RfiTwri: II ys II
3H5f 3T3 33>lft wfrf || ^ | 7R H
II 3 wr: II H8 II
T3r?3fTT3Tff<3 3 VT3f3 II xJtt I (ff I ^TT I 3TTf II th? I
<3X3 I fWT I II
ti "sm im ii y y it
^3TTX5 ’ST TWWT^W f%<3 3 *T3f3 II WWT I 3TT-
w tt) ii ^irsrr i ^rafn 11 t!w fsi 11 33tt ii % it
[B 3 f^r n y$ u j
3i3^fTT3T f%<4 3 xT3f?f ii 33?ffr i 3srr n 33>T3T i 3 -sjt n
B 33T3 3T II y*> II
Cf i., 19. AB -^g[; D -ff; E -npf (DE add, with a similar
variation, ^^f^rf%33Tf%fW3f%3-lT3 Tf?T 3#T; Of. Hofer
g
Zeitsch., yoL ii., p. 514); W om.; Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 233. DE
■^pf. So BCD plainly ; Cf. Lass. Inst., App., p. 45. W adds
331: f%<5|3 f ^ XT 3l33%- °A^(#rf3 (originally ^
rfej); BCDE ^©qf (D orig. ^}©Ef) Tfogf; W ^spf rTJ^; Hema-ch. has
TTTwra^: i 33m3? tT *J3f3 i 3 x 3 'six#; Qf.
v* \j
Lass., p. 246. BDE ^x^"S[3J- *W TT33J AW ;
DE add fg^rft; BDEW add ’gT^Jmfrf f3T ( W W®') xstf^ri-
This Sutra is only found in BDEW; Hema-ch. has a Sutra, No clir-
ghdnuswdrdt (i.e., par ay oh seshadesayor dwitwam .) This ex, only in
ii ii
f%«g Mgfa ii wg?*rnfr i i
i i ^g^jt i ^ggt i -mwrawr i
^rrwmwr 11 gftai*? i i Tg^fg i ii
l| ^TfiTl ^« UF ll , > ■
ggT TW^Tf^S m ft<4 ggfg II iNfT *RT 1 w
T% I ^wr WT I I ’gfag I wr^ W^S I
%
f%fwr fafHt i ?5ftwr TjRt^Y i grfw^nrt gifw^irr i
fggg ft* i Tit i ^f^iY ^fWr i wr wy i twA
t^A i fgggiA gtgiA i fwggiA fteTA i twI tA i farrY
fa A i ^§Y 4A ii Ait i i 5 ri i fg i ^fag i ggfrgg i
fafag i i gfagnr i fH i TTfa i ^:fam i gp* i t^T i
0
fg^T* | fg^Tg 1 Tfal | fag | q-si ||
v*
Anffaum* ftAffat ”9 Tffa II
|| fgggig: || «^£_ ||
A^grrA sv i ^t faggrgf ^gfg it
ii fasf^T*rfa*nrr$$ g<^g;ggjgfai ii \» ii
fifrgTff U gg<gt fggggT ^gfr? 1 fggfrggrg g: ggf gmf
fafwgi g^TiT ggfg i ggg Aw grftjr ggf gf: grgf
B; DE instead ggj ifW fg Tfg ggTf TT I An (?). ' So D ; AB
Wf^^T - j in the other words the MSS. clear up some doubtful letters of
A; W has several errors here. BDE rnsjYgj > W rfgrYsjj. B (not
A) AsYA 1 ADEW ; B -Tfr- 5 AH the MSS. wf gA (W
\3 x ^
q^jY). AEW xpej (cf. Lass. Inst., p. 261); BD seem to read q^ which
C\ \S
7 8
is better, as q^q is neuter in iii., 35. AW iqj^FTj. W here and
10
elsewhere rTc^^Wf- E> ^RTTfarU- ‘ Autgsf. " W ggfa,
s C\
Nt>
11
II HTSifTR^nr: ii
wfa i tw*}: ii ftftnF i f%f%j i i fgrfT^n i rttrt 11
II 1W HT ii <H II
3>WI[S? fcTIWRT I RW ^ rfr^TrlT II
^SRfepif^U^ I 7R WW faw fawh I fWft 7 % *T II
otwt ii ^tj5T ii
II T' #^t^RlRT^^T#SI^7NRT^R% II 4<? II
TTTJ ^frf | T^TT: rfr^TrlT^ «Rf?T II
f%ft i f%ft i fa?ft<fr i ftreiffr i f%wt i fR^Tw i fwfwf i
Rifr^t i ^fr’TT i ^frrr i ^rfnfr 11 nrt nfitrr i i
SPT I WT®T I ^TSM W3! I I ^ I *Tf II
II =s: ^TiEiT'eiqt: II 4? II
^fTT W^TT H^frr I
J ©V
r^rfT^ »T?f?r II ^sRT I RtfTT^T II
II %% ~4T II 4« II
fcTU^RT =(T wffT I ^ WR^T^RT
'sS ©\
^ ^frf || uwr I WT II
ii "?: ii in ii
s# N
R’CJ T<iNww ^ 'enro f^grerf wfrl I ^
xj vj Cy
^T^7^TfTT ’n VRfW II W*T I riwt I RHlt II
vf
which may account for the marginal addition in A, noticed by
1 2 3
Lassen. Lassen om. W A BD
w ' w f%WTW- 5 S° DW ( Of .: i., 3); A B
6 7 8
not clear. W . A om. So ABCW; DE (but D
not so originally) ; W adds (Hema-ch. rVrt-) A om.
II 'qfr’#?’: H ^
II ^rarfltri H <H H
f^Raqf wfrT I R*hl a f^TT^fr^T^T ^ II
v» O'
wt^rr it
ii Tf?r maTTRaT^ ^aR^fafv^TTt
sl
<s-r?to: II
D adds ; w *rct- DE add another Sutra here, which is
only supplied in the margin of B, and is not found even in W;
n II TW R Tfa II RTW=R W || HTW T3 V*T II
Cf. Lass. Inst., pp. 192, 370, where he quotes Sanksh. Sara, 385.
The Sutra can have no place in this section.
II STUrll^TSr: ||
ll ^ II
II 4vTq'qmwrqf%^qT qiPsi II ^ II
qRTfafq wttttvww i ^f3if?i -q i wr qffTnsfTq-m^t
qrfqqifaT qfrqfqirqrg qw vqfq n
■qfsqiiqTqrrqqjl «T3WT^ I Wt^TWT wIbY
qfr i qinH i qrwr q> wv i fHfrqwT fq^Nwr i
qHnqH fwrfq^ i xrfairfN f%qjrf%q? i qqY?rqrr qqt*Hrr i
nS C\
wft^s *Ar? ll
qftqfqw: || Ij3f I I *T?-
| qTq^qi qjwfqi I ^wft ^proTft I qqw^3 II
1 So AW (Of. iii., 52 ); BD -ffj* in both; Qy. Tir^^g- ? ABg^-.
3
ABW have only qTqpfhi ^V’ST’fH 5 DE have fwrfH twitTO
fW’qpqH (D q^sn-qH qtqtifq^); dew give the
Sans. qt?rrq}rr f%rTTf% 7 f' * So BDEW (only W qosft-); A q«TT-
qsf qqtqqj (the last tsf confused); DE explain it by fqqfjjrj, W
G\ sS
x 5 6
by qqf^q: A om. both. The MSS. are here very corrupt;
—^TtY f rom BDEW (B for the 1 st, and om. the 3 rd);
DEW add Sans. '> ^ then adds
^q? qqfvft ^qfwft qqwi;'*; w adds qrqiw qtq^ i
’^fW’^'T l HcfJST^^i ; A has instead after raaulam ,
^qw q}qr^ wqfr^t ^qfw^t (supplied in marg.) qqqj^-’q with
no Sans, explanation.
II ^7$^: II
tpNiHt wW: i
C\
isfM^ng 7rcrercn?WTrc i ^rrafw^f-
^TT^f »ref?r i
II ^t^f'q: ii ^ it
^ Turret Tjffxfr VRfa II ^wt II
II w ^T II ^ II
w tit wttfr 11 vrare *&T*rr?ra ii
II HT*R 5|% II 8 II
?TT5R-3!5? ■SI^TW "CRT 3T II w<n MTW ||
II ^TTfTT| || y ||
^RTW WT "TT’TT VRfrf || ^T | TfT
HT7JI qnj^r tfTTT^ I ^rrfrT WW^rf | ^tf%^ I THS
ir^ | TCT^J TJ"Sq I II *TT7f?rj cfT^rT I qr^RTT I W
7nfo 8 T»r i ^tf^rr i i Tg i $=p?r?r i ii
ii ^r: ii f ii
f^-rf i n^T*rt ^frswr wjto ^rr^r wfn it wr i
No MS. gives this as a new Sutra ; W om. and adds
after with several new examples, as T$rf^
•n 2
^tTT etc. de ; W adds two new Sutras here, Sam-
3
yogapurvo hraswah and DirgJiddishu vd. W Tf^f with a similar
4 _ 5
blunder in the Comm. A q^TW- B ^Trirjrf -q?j rj ; D "5|1 JTtPJT
sj 9 v#
^jtrq^njr (originally -"rTTf); E ^qrrTf? qrpT 5 w om - B ^tf^ST-
J 3
D adds (Pf* Sanksh. Sara, S. 196)
§ 9
So AC and probably originally D; BE ^i^fXef • AC om.
ii HTwnmir ii
WT I *TTT I 3fTTT I I <TTT II T1RI I *T* V I TTST^ I
*ITTfTJ TTTTrni
|| femUT^II *> II
f%Tt TTSTPreJT’areTT ’StT^TTT VRfrf II Tft’SIT I qf^TSlT I
^T'^rr ii srfrTj TTfrre^ i tttji
II TT TT || c ||
f^reTTparei WT T*»ret TT TSTTHT^STT KTfTT II ^TT I
fTTT II
II *t fwf?? II i- II
J
^ffttV *1 wfrr H 11
II TTTTT t: II \» II
TT *TTfa II TT^f II
II fT^T^t: €: II \\ ll
fTrrcPT^nwfTr: nr^T^wft tttttt n fr^T i
Trs^T ll
ii m !%*f: ii tt. ii
’sparer wnrrei n i ^■^ \ vrf i
3
’srfrT i TT i i vw ii
ii W ii ^ ii
’Slfg TT<iV sff »TTf?T TT II TTTreTTTT I TiTT ’SITTTT II
1 *N 2 r
So B; the others Tariff (Of* 19). Lassen reads this Sutra in A
3
as an ex. TTTT to S. 7. D <r'g‘ explained by (^|r •) ; Ag-f;
4
Ccftnv^; B confuses this with the next Sutra. A adds
v5
g
in the margin. D *?T fT^: ; W has TJcffTT^T fJ^TTT *RfrT
II xjrj’jj: II
ii sjsJHffcr h n is
<?T<TT {%-^|cjf% II W II
wr i qmY II ii g^rgiirW i f^jt f^gsfr 11
s \
l| II II
fa^TT^mt II I rDJ I wr I ^ I
5 0 7 8 9
^ I I gg I gwf%wt I I wr I wf I I I
II 3sR I eSDIT I ^ I ^RT I 3JP5T I gfg I | g?lf%-
O vJ sl
5Rt I ^"sN I I I 'HfTRTrT I ^ I I T^TT^: II
|| itfUTftl ,T « \$ II
gfarfirg -ar^ 3T ngTWf: ii w wb i w w i
19 |g
wui WTtT I rff? rff% | ^II TRTtRRfifm' gfalf^lW: I ^
fif%jTm^UlTr^ fJlWifT??J f^RTTW^g « gf^T-
fri yg-^r: H
■^gfTTTfjwfV ’ MSS. om. ” W has for these, ^vjr ^jxj'yx I ‘<XryT
gfTjgt- 3 A fatR^T fcsHlT; B ftfrsHrT f%*WWT; D ft-
S s S» ^ ^ V
3*^ (a iding Sans. cffsq ft'^J ; E ftwf 5
W ft*r WT = * So A (not T 3JR). 5 A ^tg) ; B ;
C\ N. Cv ^
W fJ[f^ ; DE ; Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 254. AB (not C) TfcEf ', Qf>
iii., 56. 7 AB gtiTj ; W ^15; DE gtijX- 8 AE (A originally
tjf?-); BD tjf%^; W qf%^. ° AB WT- “A ^[f^xj^x ; B
; W " DE ; AB TrsrsT ; W n.l. '" So BD =
v> C\®* ^
; AC -f%. So MSS. (W om.) ; A has no Sans. expl. ;
DE give ; W adds several other examples. A om. ABCW
; DE : the latter is taken, because all (except W) have
N FTUFFFiTFr: It
Ffa FTFT fa’fFITFtFT FT FFf?f II F^T I F^T I FT^fr !
1 9 3
**f I F'gTT I wV I FFRT I Ffarft II FFtfa far I ’FFT II FT-
faFTTTTFj ’fa? I faf I FFTT I FFTT II
It FFTWT^FTT: *jfF u %t: ,j
F^nrfarrg Ff% fft?pft: h ft-
<Tr: ii ftfit i ^ftt i fftI- ii ftft: ii ^ift i fft i ftt ii ft-
wr I FTTT II
B F f^TfFFFt II \t- W
faj^F JWF TSTfV F FfF FFTFiFlT it f%t I WF II
U IFTfFWT: t%Ff FT ti H® ii
FF f%FT FT FFTFPFT: II Fft FT I FT^ft FT^F I FFTT
O v*
FFTT II IF I Flf% I TFH II
u ftIt^tffY: u u
FJF FIF TWFFtFFFFFTFT Fftfa FFfa II FlT'fTFT F)F~
7 8
FTFt Ii WFtfTFJ FIFFTfTFf II FIF^TF I FIFFTffaT 11
il FFnFFfafrF^ II ^ II
rTFT s <F T#Wf: F<5pFFfalFITFFF TT tTF TWFTFTiNft
Fi: M i W I FTtTF! II
II M W: II ^ H
TTO ’FTF TFTFFTT^fT FFfrT II WW I fVf?F? |
as the ex. of the exception, which does not apply to AB om.
2 BD-^. 4 A-^;D^;B n.l. D
B has ^ for 7 So W; ABD 8 A ; D adds ^^p-
^Sm~- 9 All except W (Of. Pan. vi., 4, 140) ; B has ^i$r .
II H
3fr3fW I ^T3f¥ II I ^prr I Hc^T I ^<atT II
U XT' « *8 II
*n*j^irar*rr fqf%7iw vT ^fri n
g
Wlfm ^fafT I ^irifart ^r«TT II
II flqq: II <*, t li
WW Tt ’SITO q^Tl XT* TWfl ^TT^UXT W$q: BSTt''
Wfcff II
'sgm^uqrrji f;qm i fwi^ H ti: ii fqmfwr i w*tt-
<i H fq^rrwT 11 *rre: ii wft i q^rerY 11 n
VWWt I II XT*’ II qT<?li^ II ^T-
wT^t: «r ii
f^nraj f^^TqTrj fqqnrq^i wvmmj v*Rrrj u^b i
^Vq^qrfJ ftqq^l TTP5R7TJ
[wfa^T Trqqt s^apsi ^T(ft qr -x;?m ufacrj
iw i usmrrr ii
3 's*
T'lT^TqqT qra: trfaqf^ Tf^*l?f 1
qftvq qfr'w i qn*m u
vj <j
qftw$ ^4frf i
%?y qrffr^j i it^rw iffrra i i q X'i xtfcps n
So W ; DE ^j^fi; AB have no Sans. So EW; A <jJi^; BD <g*K.
3 4 5
DE add ^f^rfX l[f%rTT* DE ~^rTrTT ? B here corrupt. W has qj -
and in the next line f^^5U^\J'^'. . DE ; and ^ in ex.
A D DE ^rf* here and in ex. W BW
T|TW^<rTt; D 7ft- AB have no Sans. expl. D 7fr«j-; W
13
TIJ-. The passage enclosed in brackets is only found in AC, and
II •RT«rPmir: II
t « '-T^TT I
i g^girfr ii
«iT#r ^t ^Tfthr: 3>: i
^ITffV 3i3TTT: JT^r^: II ]
ii frfrwkwr h ^ h
f^f^rTJt^mf ^T?l: WUcST^ft *f4f?f II few I frsf-
s> C\ »3
II I ^ II
[ n tT ^ t: fl ^ it ]
5?rra Twr wt x^nnsj: 11 wt i f<r ii
II 9&WT Twt: SI II
^qjxii 2 FT-?:^r: it 11 ^
51 *ref?f II ^T 131 II
Cv
ii ^r^V: 11 »<l it
^mT5T^ f^friqfTlfxf^^frf II
II
has been conjecturally restored by the help of the corresponding
passages in Hema-ch., and the Prakrita Sanjivani. It seems (with the
exception of the last two lines) to be in verse, wdth examples inter¬
posed, and as such to be quoted at the end of the Comm, to Sutra 25,
hut it will be further discussed in the Appendix. BDEW here re¬
commence ; DE add ^y ; W has <*TB adding as new
examples ^T^R^tV EE add ^y, and it is supplied
in the margin of A. This Sutra not in ABC. W W i-i
fg^. 0 1)W add ^tf^PlifsiTrr,,- 7 Cf. iii., 57.
It n
is si 3, 0 ii
wsffnp? EpRTT'^nr’^Nhire^f n
»T^rast II
ii «rf%r% fWifwr st tt ^ n
*Tf%*Taf sg fa^TT^TT^T^TW^fa^TT^TTT <T: II
*JT"T I T?f%W ||
li *j% 'gft sqaf u li
■^TJT^ TST^TRT^fr *r^fw I gfrnrsg q^<ft *! wfw II
'Eft II ^rTTf^f^ f¥ II *Tlwt II
ii a®« ii 9 ^ ii
37ST TTS^r ETU^T fsTOToEI^I T^Tfcl II «T^T 1
^TTT II TTT^ff I Vf^ II ^fffTT 1 *fblT V^T II tTHJEJ | ^TfJ-
|| TTf3>: I ^4 tV II V% faferf I EJT ftjif%r? II ^rg# |
G>. Cv
3f^ffY II ’TT^Tgft I ^TT^TT II I II I II
1 ^frs ii ^rwg i u ^ i wtvr ii
1 A : " BW -mf\ 3 AB ^j. 4 So DW and probably A ;
B has been corrected from 3 to ^; several variations occur in the
examples of this Sutra : Cf. Sanksh. Sara, 162, 165. BCE THS^f;
6 7
D A only f^"Wt; B fq^T f^ft ; w only ^ngy. Altered
8 ^
in A n.l.; C ^T^-. Altered in A to *rr?fr; B n.l.; DE »'^rrY.
<\ «0
9 AB f%f%^ (B altered to -ff). A -^T (?) ; W -■£. " A ;
D tjt- ; W adds another form j AC end here. WE ;
DEW give Sans. ; Cf. Sanksh. Sara, 162. B W
flfrfr vr^^t ; W has besides as new examples, 3j(-gjx^ | *fnrr 11
: 1 11 grg^r: i wer: it i gT< 3 <st li f^?u i
ii urarnrarnn ii
V s
Wr i ^ *?4 tt3 ^4$ nire tt w^rir^T :
#
ttf^ftwr: ii
II TfW ^TC^faliW TJTIifTWrij
^ 75 ^: qfr^N;: 11
D adds Tf^rrx:: UTf"35-
1
il 11
II ll
u irrwt: u ^ ii
•wr^THr^^Trinr^ ^t: ^rr<4 u g^fr i qw-
Tr i qfrwT ii i we i n^tr: 11
sf s>
u arsjfttwfq: i •?. u
^7T I '3q»TTT<TOT’mT 4V oJ^IWt wr^T^T
sf
**qf?r ii ^rr qftfa i w: i Wwwhi «fH.Tft
sft q^friYtfr i
ST# I ^TfW^rT il ^ 4ft TSP^f «W T^T
wtq: ii
u ■qrat «: u ^ ii
^^TTtrlW^fTt *1T S*f v ftlftlNfWT <T^T^ ^Tqt
wft II II ft^ftft ft^: II
u snift?: u 8 u
^wr s^rit £T^^^qrTq*rq#faiJwi*fHqrTfY u
q^w i i irq ^qtcim i T\i Tft ll
II fWwT ft || i H
wr sw^t ftrat ft ii T#ft ii tt^ ^ft T<iM ii
D adds ^ft^p|r = and quotes iv., 1. 2 D generally has g<f[.
’ BE ; D 5Hr«nrg:^f ^; Cf.v., 11. *W = q^?f-
5 6 7 8
DeestinA. Cf.v., 12 . B -trr. D E
• B om. This Sutra not in B.
ii ■jfTSHnrafnn 11
IS ii i ii
^<TT $q?TT«l q’q^jqfqqsT^l ^fTq ^T ^T ^ f% T<5?I
^T^T II I q^T^f 1 q^T^ I q^Tf% II SH^IJ^-
II
I) >ejwt fwt ^?TV II O it
^tfr S^qT^q >qWT Nm ^tfr TWrfTWT^T *fqq: II q^T
N<fT I q^TWt II TT^ ^sfqr TfrT ^TTW fH<q II
II # q=«; Ii c II
^qY S5tfTW qj T^n^TT »T^frI II q^X^f II
it a c ii
qjqV SqqT*3 ^ : TT f% TaTTTTt »rari: II q^ I nfq^
T-f%^T^fq: II q^fof II
H *?q; w. ii \° it
sqqw ^ wit^t *qfq ii q^^ i tr^r ^fq
TW^ II
II nusftp^t^ j| ^ II
aiwr^ q^qt sm q^T vqfa u q^r qWfq i -saw-
xqfq qfq -qwT HTq: || q^pfT ^T^T I q^T^ 1 q^lf% II
TTfT^Tq: II w^rw II 11
2 • 2
B ; D as in p. 39, note 3 ; E as in p. 39, note 8. W
3 Of- v -> 13 > DW add ( not in E > 4 A ^ j
E w. " B corrupt; D ; E ojq^Rrpj. ° Only W has
an ex. of irq, i.e., q^ , adding qj^f qxqfl q^qxqq TT<q qqT ^Yq:
Only EW add q^^j.
li qqsi: qfr#^: II
li tjtt H \R II
■^r? wrnl<q qqfq ^fq qq:qY fewt q^fqMT I ^qtTTT-
|| q^ qwf II WHn^Tq: II q#W | STqYw: II T#-
li q^#i li
qqnrT^Hqrfq 11 q^Tf^qY q-^rgqY 11 -nm ffqY ^qY 11
^fwcrfrfq fqj 11 q^fw i q^qg 11
li ufa^q-fa^Ywfq: u ^ 11
wt f%* tw^^Y: qq/r: qifwrqY qqqfq 11 q^r ^t-
q^Y i wor^qpq Tfq 11 q^ i 11
II T^wt: *qY nrt II q .8 II
T^qqY: qrqY wY qqfq it ^ftwr toY i qrewY to ii
ii qqY qT n ^ h
q;^qqYwr qr qY sjqfq H ^fYqwY i 'qfarqg 11 qrqqjY 1
qr?qg ii qrih i qraY: 11
II qjq^ ’qr q<q ||^ ||
®\
T^qqY^q ^YqnrT^iiY qqfq i q^qY^ t^<q qT i w-
TT^ wY’q ii qi^rt^Y i qr^T 11 qjfYqqY i qrqqY 11
t 2 3
■^fq—^TT not in AB. " W DE ^1-
4 E . 5 1) ; ABW ; E has both. ° W
and ^T3?qt* ? The MSS. here and elsewhere vary between and
Tf^5“. ^fX Inserted in margin of ABD. W has two Sutras for
S. 16, i.e., two various readings of the same, with distinct commen-
taries ^Y qY qT S <4 q?4q II Tq^qqT: q^qYqq ^rqT TTqT-
qqq: I ^j<q T<3 fqqr^q | -qqiTqqq^tY Sfq I q%
ii m?irnwni: 11
8^
II ?T WT II V® II
wt T^pmT^Tt ^frT ii wftwr i giwr 11
ii fH: it X* ii
v* vl
T^T?i^r: ^ ftr^i\TWWi ftgf wgfg ii
^ ii W 7*xt i grsr ii firwji '’smftft i gT^rf? 11 ijgji i
gran ii
II f%Rjt ^rw wft#T « II
f%Wt ggTTTW WW W?T v vr?f s TW<TTgTTwV Wgg: II TIT"
grra TiraT^jt i wf w wtwt i g^a g^grr 11
[a «nft gV u Ro it]
«ra: f%wt ^^rTri v TWriT^TTifV gT *rg?r: i gir wTgggii
wigrra i WTgrnrT i tiWt ii
II wtri w: II ^ H
wfw thtt: ferwt ^gfg 11 Trrgi i wt i gi* 11
II TT^g^tgTfa^f^Trf: (I ^ II
ZT ^ f%* TW^T f%WT T<T^ s ^<T s ^ITTI s T^rr
^gfa II
zr ii wiT i wtr? i wtw i wtwT gpg ii gnji wir I wig; I
wiw i wiwt w ii ft ii wir i wig i wiw i wiwr few u
wggggji w”T1wt wTrftgr wfvwwY wnwr w?wgt wr^it i gr
etc.: then follows ^TSSf- W f%wt wiwrrggtgt-
This Sutra is only found in BDE (D erroneously cfj both in
3
Sut. and Comm.) and in the Prakr. Sanj. So E ; B ; D
WTgrgg wigiTT- * w srsfe^wfeife--
II *hm: trfv#3r: II
8*
ii *nm h ^ ii
wr 'simriw ^tf^rwrcrn: 3rrw#fat ’’rajsu^T#-
rTRT^Tl' 5? ^T^rr: I XJW THlfr II T?TWTT ^T^TtT I
^iiwi fy* ii
II ETRW || \% ||
f%^nTT^TRjfTT^T7i: W* ^TfT t TW <fV II
g
^*TTWT *WWt I W|T w^t I ^tWft I WFfT
WT'ft II
II «f «mi II ^ II
n i wt tH:
,3 C\
T^<T^t: ^H<4 *r 57 ^$ ^t4h ii i
*rc? i it Tfa i i ii
\S
II Ii it
W 5 ? 'C^TVSTT
W as before ; the q^ etc. are used to imply the inst. gen. and
loc. cases, i.e., ^ V*7 f%rf- * A ^T%(ft; B ; in the
3
Comm. A has the same, B (originally HTff s ) and • AB
4
have only this ex. W then adds another Sut. ( S. 25) TTf^Tf \ ||
*ns*rf*ra[«pr<ffi i wr: tw^r-
^rr^arr i f%*TTf»raR3<ra i i tt
•3
^^ra^T«Tji ^ rftxr ^ sftf'i <Ytff i *dj rm^
^itk mf? ^Tf? ii ^t: wt: s*rwr: mfir: wriw
D adds the six examples of the genitive to the preceding Sutra ; Cf.
vi., 6. W adds #r tH: uw- "Yft—sirsra given from DE
^ 7
{Cf S. 18) ; ABW om. and add ^t?T ^^$r in the ex. AB only
88
ii nT®fnran"si: 11
II gWTT I I WT II
ii gnrgw n
WT^Hw gagWTW 4Y xj?7f ^ I Wg
wYgfrfrgfr^ gig i ■fH Tfg 1 gYfg^g^ggr
Tfgfg^gnr: ll ^ g^l % I % gTW I % gw I % ^f? I % WsJII
II fe^TTfTr! TT<T s II ^ II
f^gTHTgj-gw ^m: wg g<g **gfg 4t g^g: ii i wra i
% gra ii ^gug iw Tfg gtwfg: ii
ii H ^ ii
WT*Hw t^g¥f gfl - II % WT I % 31? II
ii gffg.^g$ ii ? e ii
gggw grfaTW gYfg<^gfw II I i ?r$ II
ll Wfl wtt: 4tfa II ^ II
^grrTTgwt g^g wtt T^xtwt *rgfg 11 ^ttttY 4Y-
^t i *twrTT ggssgt i ^tutw grw ii
ii WfSTngi ^ it
wswgfww ^wTwwuwTft **gfg ii ^twt 4Wt i w?
i ^twit grg i WTwrg n
ll ^WTirflHrT^gj gr II II
grssrgsT^EPH g^g wag wgrrTTTwV ggfg 4 t ii
v \3 vj
1 2 3 4 5
W $p)*;. AB om. masc.ex, Cf.iv.,6. W adds f^f^f. WputsS.
30 after S. 26. °B^ by mistake. ' W \^x$? ^T and
N v5
g
transposes Sutras 32, 33. The examples in AB are rather obscure,
and the forms from *prlTT are only fully given in DE.
II wn: II
n
ire i KrT^hr ii ire i »ffnrr vtttt ll <tt i wwt
^ttw ii ^rej ^tutc w^ttm ii i Wrrg ii ^it-
v \3 "> C\
TTf^: ^cl II
ii <w>3T <?htht w ^ttit : ii 38 11
^TT<T ^ffT sfY I ^ITTTWT* H fa^T
I W^T I utof^w II
II ^t4 CT II 3 * II
ftntT^tanRrenfY *refiY 4Y ^?r: ii ^rrri^T^ ll fasu
fq^fY I WW W^tY I UTOrST UTHT^rfY II
[iTnwmij
uireip^i T^r^^T^ifr #r wr: ii tt^t ii
S.
[ll ^iTiniir 3T fw^: ll 3-0 n]
^T5Rir®^i ^tiN% wt f^: ^m s ii % i % Tra ii
[ll nia^ret wY ii 3 ^ ii ]
tts ^wjrej§re s Twwwi wY Tar^m^rr ii
TT^TWT wfw I TT^TWT q*RI 1 TTTWT *re' 1 V^TT V^T II
[ II HfTJI 3i. II ]
ttw qr^i ire v TW^wrt^Y *Rfa ii ttv qw i xt^twt
TO II
[ll ^U?Y 1! II 8o ll]
TTO ^rnrenre: rataire'qsref ^ TW^reTTifr **qf?r ll
W^^;Aom. A tt, but C ^rj. 3 D (not E) spfr^jr. ’a^tT-
sS \i x ^’
5 G
mC-> D ^X^f- These Sutras on rdjan (S. 86—44)are only found in
DEW; W has a few variations; DE agree. 7 AY puts S. 40 after S. 48.
I! ^Tlirl'R^T^: It
8 ^
TT^T^T ||
[It TT WT II *\ II]
TF3 ^tH^it: wt wrrfjl tttwt ll
[n wg f%(4 3tw^n3 ii 8>? 11 ]
Tra ^tTT^ STT^in?}^ 3T VRfrl I
Wfti: II T^v TTT^r II TTTWT T^T ^ II
[n » «* II]
if?T fa^xi I ^®7f TTtJ
gif?T II tttwV tttwt II im f^ g wfg II II
[ll ^n trrmmT^fw 11 »a ttj
wtwf: <*wr: tt'wV ggrr^i ^rnrrrT^'Jr: ^ttt s i wf%
g ^^frf || TT^ITWt I TT^T^T *N»| I TT'^Tw'
W II f^f II TTTWV wt II ifag^rRrf Jl TT^ I TT‘
Hft I TT^ST TT^IT^r TT^T^ I TrsnfSffr TT^T^ffr I
TnjTnn ll Trgra i ^Tgfg: i tth: i ttwhi: i ttT^ i Tr^ng 11
ii ’siTwifr s*unrr st ii «m s ii
^tw^t smrw Trgr^gt *ref?r m 11 ^wr i 'snunsfr u
[ II II 8^ ll]
^Tcfl^rC S«!T^ TlsRrTJSTg ^TTf^T^T cT^fg^iT II ^ttJT (
'STOWf | TgiqwT I ^urT || ^TWT I ^ITriTTg: I '3nm 5 (T I ^T<IT 5 T: II
II ST^T^T 8*> II
slirnJT: ^T II g^T-
’ W ^t«rT<}T ^T- * C f- “•> 48. * This
Sutra is only found in DEW. ; W adds the forms ^TfT
ii <hnr: n
as
wt ii w i urgrift ii w*r v Tnr-
W^ff II
II Tfa "STfirJ-R^TTr f^fewHUT^!!::
ll
ACW
'sgnsi^t ’’BTWST'SjY > A om - Sans.; W explains it by
T*T v ; B n.l.
8 ^
ii HTsmwnx: 11
n wsr: 11
H xr«i ii \ ii
TfW V^f?r II ^ I $ I 3 I f I II
•vr ®S ®\ *\ ®N
XJqf I *f I ?T I ^ I ^rJT II
II f^0f%7HTT: ii ^ ii
WTreforrqw wf^TTf^iw ^T*r f%f f% m Txipr
*r#r ii u^§ i w^t%r i 11 i T’^ncfar
t^T^TH ^Wftff^l TfTTf^TJ
|| T^fTf^R^Tr^rgT TWT Wl II ? I!
Tt I TXTTrfJ f* I *frfj f?rf v I TSprwi: 3T TWTTTf
6
*raf?r ^t ii Ttwr i iif^rr i f%<rr i f^jwx i f?nsrT ii i twt i
Tf^W I I I WW II ms? I I m 1 m 1 II
II ^5T*? xrfw II 8 II
T^Tf^l Tfm TW^TTsfr WT II
T^HSJ | I 3TP5J l 3TRT | ^
cfT^ II
it f^rrTifl' *ۥ*? mw: II y ii
1 ABW f^u for 2 ABW f^fj, but all have Cf. S. 15.
3 4 5 6
A B -f^jj. A - 7 EJ 7 . So BD and Hema-ch.; AW ^T^TJTT
7 8
'SfTWT rfT^T* ^"WT f° r “W i n these second forms; B -Tji. W
adds ^tf^TTT Smif% WfW II TmfH I TT^Tfa' I 3>Tffr I ^Tfw I
II tre: u
si.
f^f I rfcT^I TT-HI <r?n:^l ^TU TW^T^T ^tff
3T II 3TTW I ^ II *ITW I anjj II cfT* | rT^g II
H TW- W * II A II
T^ttt^wi: ^xnc^r ^jt i
H^cf: II f%W I I I ^txr | ^ I ^tT II ^ I
^T I I I ^tT II f?fW I <?tw | rfl^JT I T^TT | <fH | ?ftT II
II II a II
^ xPC^J ^; f? WT II 3>f? I
g>fig i ^»f% i ^ ii *if? i ^f^g i i ii riH i *rfM i
rTf^T I rTW II
II T^T qfT'i II « II
f^^xr^T t^t t^TT^tit ^t ^rj: 11 ^rr% 1
5IT^ I rfT% II I *TT^T I fTT^T II TWT^^V Sf^T II
I ^T I rRT II
II xfi ^Y II t. II
f^xJ^JT xfr ^T TWrTRT^^fV II 3Tx»*Y I 3>^Y II
^txTY I ^T II Tlxfr I rf^Y II
l| 7\J || \° j|
rl^ ^xTT^ ^fT^rTT^TIT »refrr ^TT II ?fY I rTrfY I rT^TT II
mfw ii- W reads S. 6, : ^gTBY f%*lt II T^TTTW^rgT^TTT-
ferei f%^Tf^“«j ’Triw t-v: ^gT *Y etc., after the ex.
it adds t3TOTOT|}3f (Cf. v., 22, yar. lect.) Cf Lass.
Inst., p. 321—3. BW and similarly <fYt- 3 B
etc. BD 7^ for tTV? and similarly in Comm. W Tf^ - Ng^. AW
7
^TT- A om. ; W Tjxj ; for fft cf S. 20 ; Hema-ch. also gives it,
H
II UTWITStTW: II
V
II « II II
%fa I <T^T ^T *3 * TfJp9*T^rr wfrT I **T-
■JTTTT II B I rfTW I rf^f II
II ^nw f« II ?,«> II
rf^ ^T*T fa 4 t **fa II fa I ?TTW II W^lt
TfTWT II
II fa*: **: II ^ II
fa^*i^fa ii i % i i
•s^. 4
srfa 11
it t^* T*: II ^8 II
^fa HT<7 T^* T* TST**T^^r *4fa II T*T I T* I T* I
T*W I T*fa II
H ^gfa*flW II X'i II
^f%*T: ^ V^*T S^TT^ 3T *gfrf II I T*^l II
^fai T*fai ii
•V »V*k
II W. II ^ II
T^*T #: *TT* WXT^T 3T *?fa II II
I I T*fal I T*fa II
and it is found in tbe Setubandha ; see Hofer, Zeitsch., p. 517. A
om.Sans.; BD add rf^Tt (for ij?); W adds fal*T*fa * fa^0T I
^fa^W * cTtIT- * Only in DW. * So BDE (B 7fTW) 5
s
•\ ♦ • 4 ,
A r^XWT ; W ft fXTW rlfa ; Hema-ch. also has f«. AB grfa
5 6 7
DW add cJT B confuses Sutras 14, 15. W *fa*TT^T- A T ^-
8 9 10
71^[. W^gf^(^f^gin S.16.) A but not so in S.16. Added
II qq: qfq^q: n
II q <*r: ll v® ll
qqq: w t: w *f qqfq 11 t: fqgfqjTqr
?fq qTq qfqfqqm II ?q I 'qfqj I T^f^i I T^fw II
ii qqqt qmlltqfaqrfawr n 11
qqqqrftq qqq: ^at: qrq: qfSwfqtqrqf qq tw^t
^-3
TWq ■q^r ^TT'STT qqfq II qq I TWI T^qT VW ||
II qqq: qiqra 3T II ^<L. ||
qq^^qqt qt qqq tt<q qT ^r^f?T 11 fqqf qiq fqqr^qm 11
2
qq I qqT II qq: It
II qff qq: II 9° ||
qqq: qqqi q=q: tPt qqjqqiqqt wfq ll t^TT i qqiqt i
qqT^ I qqtfq II qqqTTqjl
ll qrr<spqrqiqfrq: it ^ it
qqqqmqqr WTqqT: qqqT "TTqT qqfq II qqft l q<q II
II q: qiqqqqt || ^ ||
q^fsqqi qq^sqqt qqrqqq: q^f qqqqTqqT qqfq ^q-
qqt qt qqq: || qV qfqqT I qt qfq«TT | qq | qqT | qqT || qq
>3 vS
fqfq ft ll qq i q i qq i q ll ^tfqqr qfq ft ll q qq vw ll
-ir
ll qiqqt qt«: it ^ ii
qjqqT qqrrTqj ^fq qqqt *f T?qqqTqtt vqfq ii qjq
from DW
s
A qqtq
qqq v - "DWqY-
these cf. Lass., p. 129.
; B 9 AB Tf.
■ ’ A qqT ( ? ) ; W has as an ex. qqtqt =
BD (not W) qqT- 5 DW * D qrff; for
7 qTfqfqft and its examples not ill A. A
9
li miunrafrsi: it
i i wsfr i w?rr ^fwHrr i ’w
\» • C\ C\ \> C\ ^3
I ^SRT 3WTT II
G>
li ^ rt* li ^8 li
^T qT? 7 T Wr^T^t »T^frf || jfT^T I
77f%*TT I ^ || ^T^ifr f^rSnj
^T?T 8 ^ II
II ^«T^I II II
| ^T^f^T 5 U 7 T s l Tjf^rf ' 371^1 WifTTSITTi:
ii ?5*? n ^ ii
i ” t 1 U 7 n <t < 5*7 77377: ii
77 ’ST^T I ^TTP^T II
II fHTfij II ^ II
*3
3^1 3777: 77 Tsn^^fr 3 T 773(77 1757737 11 g
33 ^lf 77 I 7577 ^^ttfri ll
li ?pij 75^” srf% 11 11
1 2 3
So DE ; A om. ; B ’sgwT; w ^77^- w ^|T7^. B^Tf.
C\ C\ C\ C\
Cf. Lass. Instep. 327. B throughout. DE ^^^7^ <jcf anc i
similarly in Comm. ABC > DE cT^Uf*! > ^ (and the
Prakr. Sanjiv.) rf^lfjT >—if t! be correct, it must be the enclitic
3
form (Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 328) but it is probably a mistake for 7 f in
copying from a MS. in the Bengali character. W cj fj^Xrf ; DE
seem to give as a new Sutra, and add to this in its Comm.
f)
337TTTT7 n 77 75337- MSS. here : in the following Sutras D
ii qfr#T: 11
13
^)f% ?5^W <5^ TWTTTlT^h v^rf: n
TJ^J I 75# ^T^I^T II
II THJ TTfw II *>L II
■aif% tt ^gf?r i ^ttttt v 75#j
rt# ^ II Tf ^Tfa II rf*fj 75# qwfa II
J s>
ii 3T^t^T ?nr 75*7 75 * ii §o ii
^’JT^tTT^T: ZT f? TWfT^t: 7TT 777 75*77 75 # T7777 T7T-
77T II ?T II rfT 777 ?5*T7 ?5^ 7R# II fe II 77T 777 75*?7
75# fe^S II
ii (S^Tj'fTS^g^w: ii ?7, ii
^JTT: 77^ 75#T ?57 75^ 75*? 757) TT^Tf ^T^TtT
*ref?T ll 75 *tt 77 1757 T^u 75 *? 7577 77 II
II 'SfTfe 7 77 # II ^ II
STfttfTR^# 777TTT^ ^f% 7 7T7TT 7777 : 7^77 # #
77777777775 »?5|rr: II 7f 77# I t H # VW I # *7# II
II 7JOTT ^ II ^ II
^t{% ^77^: 7^ 75*7TT TW^T^"3fr *77fcf II 75*7TT 77# II
11 Tj^f? 75 #^ 75#f? f#f% 11 sy 11
fVrf% 7T75T yiTT: 75#7f? ?5#f? 75#f# T7&7T 'SIT-
#HT HTfa II 75#ift 75#f# 75#fl? 77# II
generally has i§, the other MSS. ^ {Cf. iii._, 8); W generally writes
for plain in CEW ; AB not clear, except in one ex. ;
D reads corrected in the margin to ; only D has the
2 3
others rjlp- W adds ^^T^TrT So MSS. plainly; D as
ii TfTSSrrJpifrai: 11
1 ^
II WT TJtTT cITtH 7J??T^ 75*Tf% II II
wlr fTrfr TTwr <5 *t^ <pift
TWrf ^T^T ^4f<T II TTtVT ^T^T^T I 7TWT rJ^T^T <JW^
75^Tf% ^rpr^r II : 11
ii <5^Tfwr ^T^?fr -«rf% ii ^ ii
q^sr -«ff% ^iNffi <5^T^<rr tt£t-
?IT^TT'3ft *nm: II r^WT ^TR^T II
II €Yi| <5^T^j II ^ It
’srifa ^T<fC ^ ^ <5^5TW rJ^TW T^«T ’ST^-
■JTT vifh II fr ^TW I $T I <p§JTW fJ^TW v^i II
II II ^ II
^t q^f?: <prf% Twr^t 11 rj^far
far^ II tRT^ rTTWrR^TTT W^frT II
ll <5^1 <S^N ll ll
q^l TWrTRT^lfV
*R<r: II <3#5 I <5^ ^ II
II wft ^ II 8° II
w?: *V trt ^ w^i tw<t ^t^jtt ^f?r ii
^ vi 3>Tfa II
before, corrected in the margin; only D ^ for in the
1 «►». 2
second form. BD rffU rlT<TT, but B not so originally. AW
3 •s.
-ipEf t as a compound ; Cf. S. 48. So BDE ; A has if
fJ^TW ; W TT ^ TJ^TW ^T^iTTf^T > and similarly in the
Comm, of each. 1 T^—*f cff?f not in A ; Cf, S. 30. 5 So BDW (and
C\
II : II 14
II II 8^ II
^ TT<ft sw^: 'siTfrr i *T t 11
^far w i ^Tfrr ^rrfir H ht t w i ^r? ^ftfir ii
ii ii mt ii 8^ ii
^iftfa i w^: tttTt it wt T^fTT^TT^
W7T: ii it wt w II
ii ^ WwV: ll 8^ ii
mt: ^ tw^htt^t ireftt ll ’ini
TTPI^T I ^ W II
II ’Tt’lrfw II 88 II
wt: *r^r ^f% Twt wV TW^HTirifr ir^fa ii wt w ii
wt’tJtw ii
n ^rrf^F it HWT II 88, II
WT : ^Tf? $ HHTT TWffRT^fr H^rf: II
^ ^ I UUTT *lN II
II #N HT mt II 8^ II
W^: ^T q^ffr UT HTT TWTTT^T^irt U^rf: | ^T-
II ITT HT fr* I HT UT 3P5 II
£
ll firfw ll B'Q ll
probably C ) ; A as * n S. 37; A has rfip^j in ex. 1 A
in Sut. and ex.; W reads the Sut. ^Tf^T* A ^ ea ^
(Sutras 43—58) is here lost in A ( Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 330) ; C has the
missing Sutras, but often corrupt. BCDE TJT; W isyf ; Hema-ch.
gives as his Sut. ’ s 5FfY W TRT- B ^Tf^^T^V-
ii TfT^rnmin 11
fafa IT^ffT II ^II
it httV *?Trrr twt^t jwi^ *mTfi it 11
w«c: wr q^?r TTri wfa 11 wt ?t^t i
^TT^T I *TOFfr ^ifT II
ii ^Tfwr ^T^ffr >ofa 11 «i_ n
WT : >Jjf% tfTrT ^Tf^fTT ^T^T TrS rfT 3 T^?lT
Wrf: II ^TRrft ^TW' II
II £? WT Tf^ TT^f ^fw || y ° ||
W«T : ^f% ^Trf Vrf ^TT^TT VRfa II raiHH *T?
*H 3 J VW II
ii *T 5 §j wr ^Tfa 11 yx 11
W^: ^Tfa UTrf ipr ^TT'JTT II WT ^P*
^ VW II WI? II
11 #■ ii ii
#T q^ffr TWfal Tf 5 rT^Tr II
fe’’* II trff#r HT WT T(i)?rN II
ii ii y,? it
wt: srnffta^r^ 4 ?fa ^Tn: Tfisr^TORift'
ii fy^ II
1 B ' B om .; Sutras 48, 49 desunt in C. B
^^fTT- ‘ W ^R^JTWT. BC om. the Prak. Sanj. om.
and varies between T?rf and qr. BC (in one word); W
E has no Comm.; only D ^T|T T^V \jqr, which Hema-ch.
confirms. 7 qq — added from B; Cf. S. 46. D ■ 5 35J^^.
ii qfc#^ 11
II II *8 II
q^^f?r f%TTr i ^qtfa ^ ii fsrsrs^t ^t
wfa ^fq q^TH ll i fW ii ^n*?T i q^fr: ii
it ii in, ii
fro^i qT^r: fn tstt^’jit *fqf?r 11 <ftff 8 i 11 f%-
fa: i f^i ii
ii farfs ii ii
fsrcr^j ^ frifs TWTT'sfr *ref?r 11 fafa ^ito-
I fr?f*3 TO II ■3RT ^TOrTT: I II
II frfw WT II V s II
V? qrq VRrE II ^
^wf?T I ^tf% ^xgfyj || q% ft ^wf?f II ft ^rH II qq^ I
^Tfqr qq*| | q% ^ qq^ II TTW II
ii ^?}T^TrrfV -q^ifr ii *jc ii
si
gtKfjCHjf ?n? ^tTTTT ^xTTfr ^(grfTqrt’^t
^qrt: ii Trnfq; qft^T i ^rnft ^mfr qft-
•N *\_ 1
q qq*? ii
il TrqTWTwr ^ ll 'it, ii
W (and the Prakr. Sanj.) So W; the other
MSS. f^-. So CW; the others (D -^j). The Prak. Sanj.,
5
Sanksh. Sara, and Hema-ch. all have i; Cf. Lass., Inst., p. 102. B
fw (sic) J C ff|T!TX; D ffjfa;; E f^f%[ ( sic) ; W ff|f% j Cf. Lass.,
6 7
p. 319. A recommences here ; cf. p. 55, note 2. W adds
A T'fi'TOTT^rrafq: I ?|q ’q-gif^ etc. A throughout.
II TTTlirflf^Tir: II
xmi ^ *Rfa 11
^XTf VW I ffPSf W | W ||
II SHfr S^cRrfJI i° II
in?: I ^TTRTT fwr f? T^’TTf'JT
T^TTT^T^trrT^fTT I 3T^ff4 I TR W«rTN
wifi i ^rr^j i ^i^ft^r i gT^i^r i i
I TR fftf^ ’TSf? II
ii 5 t f%R^r^T^r ii ^ ii
trrrtt'^Y *r m4?t: ii
^frJlfw ^IT^fw I 3TTRT I I
^T^f% II
|| ^ •wrf% || It
I Rf% XTTTrT T^TTC^ITt*T wfrf II
^**rif^<iY ^ratfwr 11 ^ft^iffr i ^rrsRwr 11
II feeing giR^si II <t3 ii
TRTUt fWfifat W fa^N f%T5tW ^SR^T TRT^cjj ||
ACDE Tffjxni 9 W; B ora. and confuses the Comm, of SS.
59,60. " So D; A f%f^-. " W ; the rest ffff^ ; Cf. note 4,
p. 57; mox W ^3tfs; A ^fM ;bde 'tsN ; the other Gram, have
u. *A <TTr[ ; B -<TT*ft; W ^^RT^irfT^t- ' Of- v - (; > 9- °W
added xf to the Sut., and, therefore, adds erroneously here
f^Tf% The MSS. have etc., the anusw. being optionally
added or not by S.iv.,,16. ACDE (and the Prak. Sanj.) yr; BW ^y ;
and similarly in the comm. ; Cf v. 12, and Lass., p. 610.
II re: ’jfc’WT 1 II
Wt I II I sr#f? I re^Tf^rlt II T3*fr: I T^TT -
^ I 31^^ II
f?r#Y ^t ii fre?i: i f^i fW II
II II $8 ii
WTW II ■STTlfWT*! I sTTUW^fr H
|| ^f?| TTTlire^T^ ^VTH?
re: ll
A ^FP^f• A ; D (but corrected in marg.).
II HTUfTwni: II
li qqq: qfq^^: ii
II II 1, II
7! friq^T#7T^TTlf^^I qiR TfT v ^fI v T<&rIRT^^r qqq: II
q^T q^TT I qqT qqq II q^fq q^q | q^fq qqq II
it qrfq[?qr: fq q 11 *? ii
qjRJqqj^rq*riT$qW qiTq fq q TwqiqT^ift qqq: 11 q®-
fq q^q i q^fq q^q II
II T^faqVfqMl 9 II
T? fqqjrwqqt: 1H fqqqfq ii qrrfq i qqrfq i qqrfq li
v v
II fqjqTsriwtqqT qiT| II « II
qiH| qqqiqiqf fqqq qjR fqj ^ qT q q Tfijq ^T-
qqT qqfq II qqqqqqq? | Tqfq I q^fq I qqfq II qqjqqj II
Tqq I q^q I W? I qf%7qT II qqrqqt II qbqY I q^q I q^q II
vt
1 BD 2 The MSS. often read ; cf. ii., 24. 3 So MSS.; it is
reversed in the comm, of S. 5. ijrlfr- not in A. A fjj. A
etc. AW in Sut. and comm. ABD ^rnFTlB W
Hema-ch. and the Prakrita Sanj. have ^72JT an d which
seems better ; cf. S. 7; E has no comm. The annsw. in these ex.
erased in A; W seems to have etc. ADE Xff^EJT * B
■R^tT^TT? W cf Lass., p. 336, and infra. Sut. 17. E
; cf S. 31.
ii ttstr: »
il -*)H « w li t II
fsTWra *ffiY f%ill?W I ?rf?pfr: pJ^TWYT TT i TWT'
%-STRrf ^ITf »T^rf: I ^IT^Tr^ II rrffRY: I TOT* II
f%wr 4 Y: i 11 ^?r tPi far i tTt i ’rePr 11
it II i II
w^rnfr: ^Tf^g^iTTT^^: 4 t?tY *fY 4 Y »repf 11i
*?fvrr f% it wt $f% i i^e?Y sf% II
«J vl
Bg 0
it fwrr'iwT.fT^'yW^ 11 a 11
fRjfrTmT^TTRr: ’TTWTWt ^^tt: iroYfirar: i
^Yq: ii wr pf i *ra ^Y i ^ i ^ ^ ii *mY sf%? i
*mT; w. II
ii n* i^TwY ii ^ ii
twt^iiY *r?t: ii q^PsiT i
^fr^TT II to i ii
II *fT7?jf%£ II L. II
VT<flTWf%^ uPf ^ T^T T^JT^Y 5f Wrf: II •
7PJTT II I II TOT^Plt f^f^RTfTJ f%^-
f^w—^ri: from BD; A is obscure here; cf SS. \, 2, and
Lass. Inst., p. 336; B has ^jx^rT for *j<fY, and both have StffraY:,
as in s. l. “A^iwfq;. 8 e q^Y:; a ^irvnfr: *rtt: *rrf%('
TjY't^fq;. A 1TT!TT- A om. $j in Sdt. and comm. W Tfaj in Sut.
's®
and comm.; B n.l. A gives the plur. ex. tj^jx XpT ^T^STf ^fT j B
has throughout; W adds scimyogapiirvo hraswah ; Cf. iv., 1,
note. Cf. viii., 58 ; A merely quotes the Sut. ; the rest is given
8
II fTWTJramt: 11
fqVT«T n HW<T: I f^WT* 7 J qq || *nft-
^ 3 T I f faWT II
II sfinulV wuTsrqt: ii \° ii
w -siT^ s T^fn?r^i^ *tt 5 TTW vq?n 11
q^qt i q^n-qfr i ^'ht i ^q?TTqfr 11
ii f^ret ii ii ii
f%ft q<f qiq^rT: W^r^^Tft^TTT^lfT *rqf?f l
^ II I 1 WTTWT II qqt I q4?ft I ^JW*!FT II
ii w<rftrf%«ifa fq: ii ^ n
qn^ vra’r: qfV fw^: whs*?: ii ^Tf%T i
^f*f%T II €tNf<T I II I ^firafrT | I
'f f%^fW ii
II < 3 tT« f 0 T II ^ II
»Tfq^<SHT^ W ^T T<t<^ Ti^TWi^t I ^qnTTq frg || TT-
s9 x
^gifa i TT^rfR i Ttf%fa i Ttignft i i Trfwr i
T^nfr ii *Tfqs}Tfa i ^firerra: 11
II fw If -IT II II
^frsrajTre f»mT vnff: q^: fftnrsfr qr 11
Tr^j I qqj TT^TfTI I Tf^Tfa I II
is given from BD ; W absurdly makes a new Sutra of it, besides
1 2
having it in Sect. viii. DE 7f for *ff throughout. The MSS. vary
between and DW ; A ^rTj B ; all have f; in the
ex. 4 AD f%. ° A 6 BDW add the pi. forms in
7 s
*T and ^TTOTT? etc. W fqqt- D adds f etc.
V*
II wtth: II
[ II ^T«Tjff^|Tf%7^T II ^ || ]
^RT^T TWW: f%-
W f%c 5 TT TW<TT^TtTf 3 T WrT: II Tlff^T Tlf^T I ^f%f%^T
^f%fT^TT il I || t[% | TlfsRT I TT^TflY I
Tf^mt i ^f%f%‘^r i ^fa^gufc i 'ffwifr i n# wr^trft i
TWTfT II
[II 3 >rw rt^f tt-
^ *r*SF Tl^F ^F II II ]
^fg-StfrT ^TT”T ^tW=FcRR WR R^ITRRR 3 fT^
7 P?RR ^JTTTTT ^frf II 3 TT^ ^fT^Tfa I ^TRITfa I r't’^F
^frarfa I fr^F 3 Wf% I R - ^ RfaRJTfr? I Th^F ■^rf^'snfri I
T'tW ?wfa I RWfa Tmf% II
[ II wffat fR^TORRITTRR fwrtf^ RT II II ]
^ TWRwftRT TT^Trar^TTt^ rtrt
*rf%TZ[fa RfT^ €W TWT^R Rnt" 3 lT I *RR^TT I
fwn'g RT II
Rtf^FT Rtf^Ff?T I ’RTRtfR II RlNFfa I RTf^FHfrf I 3 fT-
^f?r 11 Rtf^f%f% 1 11 wTf^FT^T 1 Rtf^Ffs-
^tt 1 ’rt'sj'sj 11 Rrf^Ffa 1 ^rf^Ff%f?r 1 ^fr-sufa 11 rt^ri i
Sutras 15 —22 are only found in BLEW ; for Sut. 15 , Of. Lass.
Inst., p. 353 . 2 BW om. 3 B (•) 4 DW om. 5 B gives
6 7
these in full. Of. Lass. p. 351 for this Sut. B ^Vc^f > the
other MSS. prefer ^. So W ; BDE ° "VV adds ^^^X!TT-
^RTfa I RRT RTWR# | RTRUTfR R^jTfR- “ W om. ^ftf; for
Sut., cf. Lass., p. 353 . So BW; DE in both ex.; cf. vii. ? 4 .
*8
ii miirrpnjrnr: 11
I -rTf^T? I 5TTf^f%T? | WTf^^T I i
v? v9
^Yf^^tTirr i «Tf^^T^r i irTf^-^ur II ^fr-sanr: ii urg fr^fr-
ii
[im^« ii \' c: si ]
-RflT^ *TOTWT ^ ^ *f TWrf ^T‘
's* \»
tsrr *refrr ii i ^rg i ii '*^75 i i wft ii
[ ii ws?i ii \t- ii ]
^jTRrtrw -R<?pm *rqnbgi *?r ^ *fr twh
^ C\ Nj
’’ST^STT K^fTT II ^#<5 I W? I W^iY II
I! 3T II II
*rfira^sr?jri^ f^T^s ’gVaTW Tiw^r® ^r «tt
TWrfT^TTlft WT WrB | Xf% ^TTfT^ i epf*TT% rfT^rT^ I TT^
TC^TT I W33f I R% TIT T*k II I Tl" 55 !
TfWT I R% •flf%T TWTfT H II
' W adds xnfw^HU --g M ^rf%f%WT t
the Comm, in B is corrupt, but seems = W ; both further add vochha
at full length. W E adds DE add
-15 -IT; W’s ex. are ^?T"3 ^ I Ttf% T*lf% | TT^ the
s5
last two = TSTfa- It then adds ^rf^TITWT^TTTTWT^fT
; B adds a very long Comm, applying these forms at full
5
length to the potent. 1st and 3rd pret, 1st fut. and bened. W <=r-.
6 7 8
W W Only W has ?j€p|”*[ ; E has through-
out adya for anadya ; Cf. Lass. pp. 357, 358. W adds ^^TTTTfT
here. “ BW add xr^ sfa TnraT*R3?=R5!Wf% TT^-
^rrf% which Hema-ch. also seems to allow. So E ; D om. ; BW
ii to*?: ii
[ii •jplhr it \ ii ]
TOWTOfTOJ^nTO^fTOITfc3 tT VTTJSBrTOlTTsr w
WT T^TT^Tt^V 3T TO??: II TO*ITO I TTWT VTWTT I ^
^^nrTTr I fronf^TJ I TTWS TOWr? I W^WTf^ II
[ II WTOrg: II II ]
w^srcl - vn?T:
^ w WT T*TOT9T^ft *f TOT?: ftrTO TO tott: II ’TOT
< 5 TOT II TO WT TOW TOWT < 5 WW < 5 ^TWT I TO*?**
Sw^tw<?wt: II
ii $r* *zn ii ^ ii
add as ex. ‘^V^f | with the following Sans.
expl. TOrr s ^TfT^^fff?*TTOTOr?m,^ftg ^W<T S TOTO S
^JTO W>TO 'TOTT ^W\ TWTfiC I 5 Hema-ch. in his
corresponding Sut. agrees with DE, but adds anye tu anyasam api-
chchhanti ; hojja , bhavati, bliavet, bhavatu, abhavat , abhut, babhiwa,
bhuyat bhavitd bhavishyati abhavishyadva ityarthah. 13E ”=g.
E gives ex. without Comm. Only W adds -T^*
DE om. W ; B adds ^f^rT 3J37T etc., as i n S. 20. D (not
<s» v V»
E ) om. this Sut., and much of Comm., but it is supplied in margin.
7 8 9
D E has i for e in all. D rf^fr^f. BW om. and add
| -*^jT* ADE ; B §^‘ ; W has three Sutras
t^l II TO*?T*IT^T<fr: uww In w?t<t^ii to
*N I I ’f€N I TON II ^nft?TI WXrNtrT^l ’TOTOJ TO-
I TrTOftr I Wfw TJTOTOTO^TOWfa ^ *hr^-
*TTf*?; then follow TOTOT 'fN II (S. 24) and ?J?J II 4TO
K
it UTiirrJmir: 11
^ VTffr: t^I T^T^J^T^-sfr ^frf II 3?Wfa
ii ^?fr s i ^*mji
it ^rrr affa it ii .
n?ra vnrr: ira^rei it^s T^^rmr^t wfn 11
TT’fH? ii ii
ii wrif%: ii ii
^Hp|w grpa ^rrf% Tfw fnromn 11 ^t!% tt^t i
^rcfa ii ^rrftFT^T i 'suft^: 11
©V
I! fa* TTTr^TfT ^TrfJI ^ II
TjnrrviT'sfr *ref?r 1 ^ ^ira
K^frf ii grTTT i itwt i 'nil ii nnx^ifir i i HT^f?i 11
H ^ m ii «^> ii
fcm TcSRwnvT ^rnfa i ^HTrnprfFrg 11 i
©\
a»m vTfff: man v* twi^t: 1 wf%^ i w-
f%? Tf%7T nfsri (W in fact gives the var. readings of one Sut. as
two) ; the copyists add anusw. wrongly, as if the rule applied to the
past participle (for which vide S. 32), Cf. Lass., p. 354 ; Hema-ch.,
the Pr. Sanj., and the Sanksh. Sara read fr*- The Pr. Sanj. adds
in Comm., sarveshu purusheshu sarveshu vachaneshu , and expl. bhuta
by and f%£\ ’ ADE ; B ( cf. viii., 1)
\J V ^ S
2
I; none give Sans. expl. ; the Pr. Sanj. A
fr* in Sut., but '^‘•^in Comm.; BDE ; W (and the Pr. Sanj.)
cf- Lass., p. 354. W adds
rS^XTT . Only in W ; W then adds a new Sut., ^t^5T ;
5 6 7
see App. A only W\n4- B cjrRT - > ^ ie ex - * n ^ ^ ave (L
II !•
I I ^>TTT^T II
it ^rfq; wr ii ^ ii
ftrq T *rrf%TT^sfr ^t tptw$ ^thY wqq^roY^ u
^TTf^ wfq^ q^Tfr 5 * 13 fTfr^ Trt%^ qrf%^ 11
^TTfrssrT i wfq^rr i ^Tfrsrs; i q>TfV«rT i 'fTft^rr i
■qifjws; n ^nfrTT i ’WTf%?i i mf^ft i q»T*m i i qrsra ii
III S|“Ct¥|| \t- 11 ]
Tjwrre;^ TstoTSTT^sfr ?r ^q?r: 11
qJTfV^ I qffrfT’q I ^Tfr^T I ^TTt^STT II
ii m fafq wt ii \° 11
^T^f m^rcrY^, fafa ’w^T^it-arr *nf?r ^t ii ^ht-
frr i ’f li
II 3T»I « ^ II
fYniY qwr srf T^'njt'jfr ^qfw i ii
^fYmY i ^^rr»rr i i wV 11
nS \*
ii ^ ii ^ ii
fircrare 'TTffr s?f T’fqfrr 11 ^fYra 1 qf^i 11
ii utj 11
35T ufq^qfq qrrw ^ ^f?r Tr<q ^qf?r i , qq>T-
1 2 3 4
B BD om. W qT1"j and similarly a in all the ex. " This
Sut. not in AC; B has it, hut corrupt; W reads it XT«^T?f ; DE as above
( E adds in Sut.) ; the MSS. agree in Comm.; Cf. Lass., pp.
360, 363. EW hut 6 BW add the forms of
7 8 9
^ and AD ^TTM* 1 BW add ^T?f. BW j^.
II ■RTUrTH^rsn II
A*
II ^f%<3 I ’fJNsf ^fa^zf I
^%f%T 'ffafST II
it WTT^ WT II 3« II ^ "
^Wl" Srf TT<4 WWfiT 3T II fflT I ^T
q^T i i?«Trr i w? ii
Tf?r UTaffST^ra
tttw: ttfr^N - : ii
1 AB -VJTJT; Cf. iv., 24. ' W
II ^9‘gnu: II
II , wg*T: ii
II WTT TTUTt II x II
vf
^ TJtTTSJT I TTri^i VTTfrff 1S3 TW<rRT^^ Wrj: II TlT
l ’fYfW II
II ^ -g: it ^ II
*J3f: ^571 1? TWT^^ff *Rfa II IPS II
II 7 iTT»fa: II ^ II
Tn^Tn:^ v€t v? *nrf?r 11 i i
SH3T I qfT^T II
ii ii « ii
fa<3TT I VTffr^T «wffT II II
II % wt: I \«
UnraR ?JT T3T^mT$"3TT K^fw II II
ii Wr ^Yw: ii $ ii
\J
WETO | VTfTT^f"T II wr^TT II
C\
II nj^fY wrsi :»'«>«
1 2
BW add several more ex.; B corrupt; W TTf^TTYS etc. A ^
BD ^ ; W ; the Pr. Sanj. S BD^. * A ; D.
° A -gtri ^xn. 9 D for this sj^Y *lYw: II 7!T$ ^ VTifYlfw
TWT^vY *raf?r i wTwt wfwT; E with ex. wY^
ii mirrnra>nr: ii
sQO
^ I TTSHWIT^fr II wVlT I
WTlT II
ii f^r f m : it ^ it
I ^ 1^1 ^IT (ffariTT^lfr H^ffT II II
II tie: mm: H *. is
^W*raY i w ^T<rt: w *ref?r 11 Riftra
fr?mi
I! xHr: tjtw: ii \° «
*i<h i vt?tt: qrer *ref?i 11 qrai 11
ii iTOwww’fwm^ sir: 11 u 11
^<rr^fare?r: Tsrit^r n wfrsr i srfr-
st i *rft*T I ^fT^T II
ii ^e?fr st: ii l* ii
^e^TTtrr^J vnfr^Tr: -mrn kx T^nrart ^ref?r 11 ^ i
II ¥ I *TT II ^ I 3TT II
II @51: ^un ?t I! \z ii
Tj@st i vm vT?fr: wrSr iprr ^r 11 wwt i
^»TT II
♦
® has both Sut. confused; W has first TJT^t Tjft^n with
ex. t^T wtlT I c 4 ; then WTw: with ex.
; the Sanksh. S. (in Delius) has Tirf^; the
Pr. Sanj. as in text. 1 B adds ^ A (not C) ^rt qf^efY; B
T^^lV- BW ; W om. D ; this Sut. is sup-
plied in niarg. of A, but is in the text of C. BW add
II 11
ll anfr II \\i II
I W ^T<rNwr?f TSf^^r^TT v^ffl II
5WT^k II
*\*N?
II ^*ns?: ll 1* ll
TTW I W ^T^T^TT wfrf II WfT II
it ^ H ^ H
*\ *\C *\ *s ^ *\ *N 5
Tawnnnu an<pprrai 11 i
WtI I $tT^ II
>3
ll sw: 3 ?t »g;7wfgw|-g n ^ h
^rRf^^Tt: n>r: ^rr w*mT%Tt »ref?i i ^t-
Ttw. 3iTrfwir<| ^rf: ii ^rft41 ^fTf^T i srrarw i ^rr¥ i
^ v sJ I..
ll
|| WTWT^JHTT II ! >*- ||
W HiTT^T I W *IT??T«TWCT ^rf: || WTT I II
1 2
W ^rxY ? B reads tlie Sut. ^foxx^D- So D ; A om. ;
B *ifix ^ff$x ; W ; Cf Westerg., sect. 10,29. 3 B 5T*XX^TT-
(L ^
w vn ; the others ^ (the Pr. Sanj. 'ij'Tl) and so in Comm.
Qy. (?) cf. iv., 23. In the ex. ABCW have xT (B once ^T^TJT;
cf. iy.23); DE 7 f, as etc.; cf. Mrich. Stenz., p. 22, 8. A gsj“
fvs ; B grif^l; D cRrf%^ ( altered to cfirffa?) ; EW qrr^f 5 w
explains it by but cf. note to yii., 24, where W gives ^fX^ft^
as an ex. — ^^TXT > the °^ ier MSS. have no Sans. expl. E ^ffx{%^
g
(and so D, but alteied). All the MSS. and the Sanksh. Sara (c/1;
Delius, p. 11, note) ^x - ^; A has ^^XXl a ^ so ^ but or ig- like th e
ii qiwqq>nr: ii
it ii \i- h
fq^ft *rii i w VT<TtHTfrTlr *rqq: 11 vtt i 11
[it fsrew: qm^ft u \° 11]
wr i w vtttV: qT qT^i wi: ii qir
qr^iT ii
ii % qTqHrf ii *u ii
l
% nrqfqsTTO i w vnfHiTqHrir *rqq: 11 qTT i qniT ll
n wqf^jq: 11 ^ 11
^q «rq ettY i qpg ^TqTf^qT >rqfq 11 fgqT «
n qiT^wt ii ^ ii
vl
qjqqT^q i qret qTtfr^TqrcrwY vqq: ll qiTWT i ll
Nj V>
ii qpjqw? g: ii >?a n
gqq qnsTqif qifa i qrei gnfr^q»TW *mvt ^qfq ll
gqr ii
ii ^Tvu»TTqf Tpq^rqqrqT: 11 <? y ii
tjt i Nqiqf i $ ?r r ^ i qqqf zrq
ur* ^TT'q T^w ^qfq 11 zrqfq i igrqfq i grqfq ll
[ ii ^T^r^T-g qww^wfqqjfq'ajTqrqfq^q’i 11 ^ 11J
rest. W faqfr- This Sut. not in AC ; in DE it follows S. 81,
3 BW -qjqi- W cf Westerg. sect. 22 , 8. A om.; B ^t;
0
for muna, cf. Lenz, App. Crit., p. 15. AW (W ^gj-) ; E of;
the Pr. Sanj. ; and so in Comm, of each ; D throughout in SS.
7
25 , 26 ; B om. Sut., but gives in Comm. A ; DEW as before; B
g
om. This Sut. not in AC ; W has only ; E for has S{
II : II
■gri'*5TT'*TT«lt 3T 33T ^TT TtSTTT*[T M^frT ^RTW W?fiT^
^Tri: II ^TT <TRIT I 7Tf?T -3T-
i ii s?rr i uiffT i sjt? w-
^3 II *TTT ’TT^T I ^ITf^T ^irsf%T I *IT3 *TT^ II
[II ^rrf^vT^: wtvt ii ii j
TfTf - I VT3 4% I TTrRTMraT: WT VT TWT^T
Wrf: I II *$TTT I ^Trf%T I II
^TT I VTf%T I MTS II
II ii ii
^ I w WTffrff^t II f%WT II
II f%»if%w: II it
i w vTmfg^T 11 fg^T 11
ii f^w: H 8 5 ii
i w MTm: f%wY *Rfa ii f%WT II
ii g: iH ii 3i ii
^ttw it i fa-
%wt ii
(like D ). This Sut. not in AC; B ^T^^TT^rf l ; W reads Sut. ^cjj-
2 3
^VTWT: WT MT- “ D *=TTfa ; w ’ D om. ^-. So¥;B
VR ’■ T> VTfa- * T> om. 5 W^ifrfTJ^T: 5 The MSS. have ( W ^)
here, hut as AB have ^ in Comm., and E’s Bengali is clear, Delius’
'’Ef is probably incorrect (^j, ©q* and ^ being so alike in MSS.) : the
6 7 8
MSS. have ©^ in ex. ( W ^). D . A far throughout. W
%: inriRT || with ex. fWSFTfafaiWT; the Prak. Sanj. as in text.
it uTfirnfsmn 11
^8
II II II
'fTT ai^Tfsrwrwr: i °sm vniY^pNi II
II
it tst^t vY jj: i aa 11
^T=T S mT^qYwW^t: I W VTffr^T-
^ifr ?rgf?f ii i ii
II ^TTr%^: II a# II
7TT1T I W Wffr^T^TfT^I 3r?T^ufT ^f?f II
^rftTrs; i ^*raro; ii
ll II a y 11
wr *ref?r ii i ^prtut ii
0
II Wi: II a$ II
i -vw VTTiYf^TR:^ m^T^afr vafYr i fowTOT i
ii fwt %wr: || B>$> If
f% ^ i w vnfrfilwr *iaf?f ii fw^rr ii
ll fSrf^fefYrspa ll a* ll
I ^rT^TTW^I ^Y Wf?j II I fw^T II
II f>$£: II a i- II
' A ^rf-vp-; C ^rf-sp -; W ^pspY V?1T ; B corrupt j for Tp; Of.
V v ©
2 '34
Pan., vi., 4, 140. B ; W ^rVTlTT' B ttt%- A 7ipf%; B
r © ©v
5 x 6 7
-^. A cffTlj;- in Sut., but not in Comm. A B X^TTTWT*
3 9
A f^sn*. D f^“5f throughout, to which B is altered from f^g-.
10 11
B <r; but in ex.; AB for AW <£, D originally so ;
ii ii
i w wTglvgf^T ®t irrfw ii grsv 11
II 5%^ II 8“ II
qg WgW I W 'fcJTffrtsi'^I ft Hlfw II gfST II gTgfWo?
, 3 tRJ^: II
ii ii 8 ^ ii
^^■HfT^TTT^I wt II ^4 t 1II
II gg#: H u\ II
I W VTfflTSI^I TT'^OT II gWT II
II ^?ff fo 5 ?: H II
^raphi fAfgr*?r *rcfcr ii ^frorr ii
ll gvg: II 88 it
gw to i w wnrYv^r^i gV wfa ii Wig ii
ll 11 88, ll
•v. 13
wfr wwfw ii ii
ll gtwm II 8^ ll
B ; E ^ but all have kwcither. AD Only B ; E om.
Comm, as usual. The MSS. (Bgjg, E^) ; the doubling
«. 4 5
seems required by iii., 51, and the clause Cf. iii. 49. A
BW here and in Comm.; Cf. iii., 50. BD \jip-. W -^fy - ^
8 9
here and in SS. 43, 44, and elsewhere. Only W etc. B
0 AD (A is not clear, but the r proves that it is
S
not ^r) ; W has ; B "gy. The MSS. as before (W
Cf. iii., 51. So MSS.; Qy. ^ (?) cf. Lass., p. 245, note. W
fwwr:—jpurfr *rem i fwg i vfn-
14
In W this Sut
II TIT® rrwnj: II
Wf® II I (JTTT I TJ*T II I
Tjpfa i ii
ll Vt pw: ii 8^ II
■51® I ^®TTWT?I ®T ®gf»T II I II
ll ®fvwr^: ii 8^ ii
J vl
Zi® | I ^*nT^T? 113 T II ®® 5 T I
VJ vl
^SJT II
ll ^vaj^lV ll 8 <l ll
vfar i w^i prtV *r<t: ii i ^ ii
s
II *2<ft ll v ll
Tg-% I W VTffrtm^I ®T ®gf?r II II
ii n|wt?: ll *1% ll
®T<T% Tig qrin | II I TI®T II
II f%® II ^ II
I TW3®T3ffat f%^ ®^f<T II ®15T I ®PIT II
Wlf® I P^lfrT ||
II T»fe®wHfr II ^ II
J N v
w ft®®® i ®q® i ®t ft® ii ®tt
'J J
I ®1T ®®T II
follows S. 51 ; in Comm. BW add etc. * W adds tjjjt =
Cs.
Tq’Sjffif. B throughout ©^(?). 3 W ^J'T^ujY* S° ACW ; BDE read
^T^gV, with ex. 5 W V ; the Iri is a
later add. in BD, but the orig. text of AE; the Pr. Sanj. has ®ft--
7
W adds I I ^^?7? ( c f- var - ^ ect * 8) and
g
then gives S. 58. A ; BDEW ; the Br. Sanj.
II ’srgn: H
II ii y» H
•JTT^rfTT^ SW*?J fe<4 M^frl WTII trfagT I II
ii >pTfl*rt ii yy 11
TiifagT^fat ^TnV *rhfr ?raf?r u
iim i i *tttP 3 11 i i ?-=& \ >tT^ ii i
TTtTO I TTtT I TTtT^ II
Q\ ^3
11 wV 'fg: ii y^ u
* 35RW I 3? ^T5fT^T^ I fa 31$ | *Ta* I I
T<imwfa?iT g: -jfafana: i ftw ’fgY ii gwT i itsft i
faWT 1 ^ V 1 v^T II
>1 \l
9 ^ ^ 10
ii w^wfaig ii y^ ii
ugt ^rc^': wtisg: ii wg n
g*rr gfa«nr i n^T ^fam; I fag* fafassrT i ggT
gfa'SSTT I gfagTT I
II *FRTftat ft* 3T II y,^ II
quoting ii., 20. So DW : AB TfT^ajg BfaT ; E om. Comm .;
2
only W gives an ex. besides Tf. So D; ABE ; W
BfariT I fagfaT fagfaT- * w adds ?ft fagg. 4 W ?fr-
^3iw i i *rtgg, but ’xf in the other ex.; DE have 7 ^ in all
5
the ex.; Cf. infra, transl. note. W 3T^f5|7ra»Tt XjrT (sic
placed after S. 14 !). ° BD -ij^pj-; ; W ^Tij. 7 W - 3 ^. 8 W
= IF&t- 9 w OTWWT: as an adhikara with no ex. A
si
11 12
-wq m > D corrupt. AB ^- : but only B ^ in the ex. D om. both.
13 .
W puts this Sut. after S. 52 with ex. 7 [ 7 jj^ "^^RT ^T^RT
-sec
I! Tnwsramr: n
srwftet wT<g/?t f%?j m *r=?fW it i
TfaWT I WT ^f%^TT II I I wn II
II II \L. II
fwi? i w vnftfifrjV **=# ii f%-
II
ii M° it
i ^2!5 ? s =r:«jt i ^i»rgT^fTetri' w^mt
s* 4
urr^^ff: ii 'SKr i ii
ii it ii H
wli<rlr^Nrf wt *Rf?r i wg^rwlT^^r: 11 *TTffwrT i
^rfloqfT ii
II ^ H ^ II
explained by ^PT^rfrf; Cf vii.,9, where all refer
it to the passive ; the rest om. Sans. expl. here. So A ; DE f%-
with ex. ; BW have a difF. Sut.; B (and the Pr.Sanj.)
(the gg written in B^; cf Del.,
p. 12, note; the Pr. Sanj. -^g) with ex. 3*«g^ f%^g^ ; W
2
^wf%Wj|^T: with ex - fWT « WT- * w ( and
3 4
Pr. Sanj.) IfS^SH”- A om. Here follows a Sut. in BW, not in
acde ; b ( B r Y) ii tjt i w-
tfhfosi *;arrrstV *Rw: ww*rwt: 1 w®rr WW 1
wrfw^TT i i ; w has 'wiWT^^r^Tr 11 •wt
\J c
5T(ff ?rn?f%^ra I 'SR^rOTTW W^TWTt - i W^TT
^¥T I 'WT^TH sjsr^- W for this Sut. TJ%4 t WW II with ex -
0
^ c^"T ^rPrf^T I So EW ancl D 0I %- > AB here
II ^rgnn ; h
|| ^^T3T S I
1 2 3 4 5
f^3 II I ^ II I f%^sf II ^ I II Tfa I ^Tf II
s s
<i u ^ ii
I W fa^XT wfa II I f%TW f^XC
WT*TT II
ii jgvsfr: il ^8 II
■gre I W 5TfY *P?frf II ^CT II
ii wg*r: ii ii
^ 'g-sigg i w vTrfrgxr *Rfa ii ii
ii ^iNhsr: » ^ it
^ ggx 1 W VTXTxaft II g«TT ii
II II ^ II
s$
raft I VT<flT TWT%3fr II *wr I
C\ v ^ vj
^<IT II
and in ex. 1 AB ^tg. 2 MSS. ^f% ; Cf. S. 66. So BDE ; A f?f^f
W rltSf (in Sect. ix. W has a Sut. f%75r gtf%rr^ftrrgV:> * AE
(and prob. B) ; D prob. ; W ; Cf. Mai. M., p. 115, 2.
B adds | (? y 5 So BW; A f’lfi ( ? ) ; D ^ ; E
W continues to add bhdve or karmani in the Comm, to each Sut., cf
S. 57, var. lect. 7 DW om. the rest. So BDEW ( suppl. iii D in
9 10
marg.); A and Pr. Sanj. ; C n.l. BDE ^q;. After this B
Cv
has a new Sut. with ex. | q^STTfq ; W gives after
s. 62 ii ?re i w<rr: grxfw g^T^'sfr
C\
II | Tj^jg ||- So AD j B qg- in Sut. and Comm., but
Ttq- in ex. ; W reads ijljsf W ; B
c» \S S' Vj
II TTTlirfRiSTir: ||
■C®
ii 31*1 wt imi: 11 11
I w VTrflT 3¥Tl4T *RfT II 3 TTI ||
n w^tfw^lj^WT: 11 it- 11
'* <«#
1 w 11 g^rsiT 1
fakirs; 1 ^mx 11
II ^WT^<ftTT: II 'S>° 11
TTJf I w vnfT: fIT <fK T<tfl ’StT^T ^f?I II
rlTT I 1 <ftTT II
II ^TWT^rffTT II ^ 1 , II
WWt ^prTsphlT^TH^TIT *Rfw II WT I II
II Tfa TtTlifrU^T^ VmT^I
II
gives San. TU^f?!- 1 A gf - ; CDE (and Pr, Sanj. ?) cfTg*-; W ^tT^-
\* % s» ^ s» \>
•s. • •s 2
; the Sut. deest in B ; the Sanksh. S. g Tf I^TlfT (Pf* Pel.) A
CDE as in Sut.; W spfTT ^ f¥T 5 B om. W f
WTOi: II with ex - I WT I f%WT I I II
<j y>^ || It also adds in the Comm.; cf. 63, note. So ADE
(the second ex. in A may be ; B •aci^R^T^TT: II with
ex. 71^ | ^Jcf^T I <ftTT I WTf% TT^frT -W 5 w has tuif^T-
3 cflTT: II with tff^fhr in Comm, and ex. rRX I I <ftVT II
BEW then add (supplied in a later hand in the marg. of D)
$fa I ^ sfa f^^T7T^TT'l[r
wV^t: i 7?ir: ( bw add wft) i fq^ni: wit i
II The ^ r ' Sanj. gives this as a Sut. but its Comm.
5
is very corrupt. BW for give ; W refers both ex. to
ii ii
ll ^ru ii
ii fwm: ii r ii
^if^rrft sv i ^jitit faqTrrewT if^ri^T: i hwit-
faxHTUTT^ *TOT3j II
II 3? II ^ II
IT W*f Tftwmwt WrfFf II
^r?r *tot 1 it 5r^ ^nrrr ll ¥=^T*rt i w wr&q wwri ll
f%^TTW 11? inrs (5%# ii i? ¥¥TWTm^r i ts
¥tv^ i it ?k ll
the passive ; BW (and Pr. Sanj.) then add a new Sut.
¥1^' II 5 W’s comm, is ¥WT¥TT: I VTTJ 5 ?TTT5fT^"3TT:
FSPri I cfTWTfJ J¥T Ff¥T I WT ¥tfT l ^¥T
¥>¥T I TT^T I *T¥T I ¥¥T Vf¥T I V¥T ftfT I
^§¥T ( w ¥?-) ¥t¥T II 3¥f?T I W^fw I ^faf?T I I Rf-
>5
f% I F^f?T I I II i B’s Comm. VT(f sjTiUTr^^
(B -^g) «rs*r i ¥tt i ^t^kit: i ?ttt
i 'Ffars ^¥¥T% ^ic) ^V^tt ^R¥TT ¥rsr i ^wfrr
^T^?* 9 the Pr. Sanj.’s Comm, very corrupt. BD ; in this
'si
book AD are chiefly followed, particularly in the ex., where B
often differs, and W almost always ; W has several new Sutras (see
2 3
App.) and often a different order. W So BDW ;
4
AE Only BW give Sans, expl.; both have but only
ti m^rf-ncmr: 11
II II 3 II
f 3 ps T^fTT^vTT^ wrr: 11 f%^ 1 ti 4
c.^g || -qwi II
II ^T ^^Tq^TTTTqf^T^^ II 8 II
f’pnrN'sfr >r^fw 11
^f% it 5-g^: 11
|| ^ftf^rTTWR II y II
TT f%W Tt^ W 3 ?T ^f%f%rfTW*J f^lTOW *PL
f?T II W TT I t%T ?Rr I ^ f%<*T
f%f%wni ^ 1 ^ h*i ^rc1%rr: i ^
ftrer ^n?: 11
11 it ^ Pi^rfaTi^w^s 11 $ 11
w ^ 1 twhV f?rg?it%<T^¥iTT^g fsrcTriwwr *re<r: m
1? TWt 1 ttw)- ^ wfV II ~m ttw: 1 *r^: w WT: II
\S sj s3
11 ut^t: ^Nir 11 ^ 11
W 3 T TW^j S*l f^’TTrtWf wfw II Wt V 3 II
II ^IT«if!^J W^tr II * II
W ?n"VW also. Ex conject.; A fg*ig (g^g in ex .); BDW
i E fe^g ; In Hema-ch. MS. a has gr^ gpg fggj og 'gg^J- ;
but b xi[ for g ; the Pr. Sanj. f%^g ^J"3J ; Cf. Lass., p. 189. Only in B ;
W has as ex. ^ fggj | fgig I gp?^g <gigg. * So ABDE ;
B adds ^gY gffxjT^ | gft- TTEgfagigr^gigr (?) j W, as usual,
diff. BW om. So BW; AD ; only W has any Sans. expL
0 W^r. ? Wfgfsrg-. ' So A ; BD om. ex. A tggf- ; B om.; W
ii si^ro: qfr#?' ii
f^^TfT^wr ^f?r it <Ptfr n
ii f%<rr w ii ii
fwT T^f^j *[*?: W fWW^t JTWfTT II f%wt *prf% i
f%wt vsf% II w i f%*r ^*rf% II
^ Cv
II ^T ^:*§^l*fTO*mg II \° II
fwrrewr it
i ^^fr ^rssrervstfantfg 11 ^^furr i ’srar
II WW I ^fsR ^T? II wr
"3
fwi i wr i wr wfwrrf h
II WTfl fa^TTW II U II
WTTf? TW^J f%WTTW f^RTcR^T *RfW II WTff
I wft WT^IVW II W I W ^f^T-
WW II
II W ^ TOHPli II \? II
W5CW rTcST d$- 1 w f%WT f%*T and 8' ives it after s -
2
15. B om.; D and prob. A ^j^f%; the is conject. to suit S.viii.
\$
57 ; none give Sans. expl. I)E ; B varies and ;
W has and also after S - 2 >
4 5 »
A om. Ex conject. (cf, S. 16); ABD Tirfil^Xxf ( or ■ tT); E -< 5 ;
0 7
BD give the Sans. expl. as above. W These ex.
corrupt; A cfr^p^rf^TiT ; B (the /^erased); D c?f^~
wiN; E om.; W as above. A
expl. by ^^Tf% WrfT ; D qf^PR^VW >' E om - 5 AE>
om. Sans.; W quite diff. W
ii qTUrnRrrsn 11
-srs; wtw faqT?R# it
I W fir qrfifa ^gq% II 'Slfq Tjg^-EgfrT i qii fir qrqr-
*rf% i II
H qrfq qqffcir II 13 H
qrfi tw^ "Jr^r tqftw fwrnr^r *raf?i 11 qjfi rr? q^wr
?mr I fiqi^trT TT^T q^ffT ^T II
ii ^ wuit ii vi ii
T»2f^ *r^: firqiwrf wfif 11 ^ fifwt n
firerjsrsr: ii
II T ^ f%? WHTqWTfsrqfqr?T%q^ II 1^ II
T I I f%T I TW^ ^t: ^TTqq!Tfi3'*rfTifi‘<J f%qT-
crem *fifrj ^irei n t w qrvf% i qn^fr f% i fi"?t f%
ii v w u^sr ii *rnrr $f% i fi~gt sf% for 11
II faRfinfi^T T^ti II \i. II
fiiR fin? fi^ tww tqri firqTrre wt *fifi II *raqi
This ex. corrupt in AD • B as above • W has q*rg = *qfq
2
(•)• Here follows in B a new Sut. (added by a later hand
in the marg. of D) not in ACE ; TV gives it after S. 6j ^josjY (D
^5j^Y throughout) ^qrr ( B throughout) <|:*sTTqjqfiwrq^q
with ex. ^tsfr (B ^jqV) ^T if I
fir qdfir i ^fr ^qrr wt§*t ; Cf. Boehtl. Sak.
g
p. 11, 17, note ; for avvo , cf. S. 10, supra. AC with no
Sans. expl. ( cf. vii., 23?); W diff. W ^j. AC j
vi
B f%raf?r^firaT.; D altered from A to B in Sut., hut not in ex.;
ii snw ii
ftp? I Wsi faw I 71^ II ®^jr II
[II ^lnH% II II ]
^TSSf TW^J ' 5 T®? ’SITtHw f^RT^m || ^T 55 T trU^Pr faf
*K^f% II fif ^rfVfw II
II *WTT<TJI ^ II
**T*«r: tw: i ifo:
^WfT^m^j: i Tf 11
II Tfa miirPmir famrRmfwfW^
*rsra: yfr^hf: ii
E corrupt, with no ex.; W ; Hema-ch. has frj^
facl ^ T^Ti 3 T- A -Tji for -IQ in each ex. This Sut.
g
is only found in BDEW (added in the marg. of D). So W ; the
others om. 4 W
II urarnrani: h
II tjfi^^: II
II IU ll
ftuT^T^t »rm i mtm w^iwMwrHrr M§ztfi«MM 11
ii nwfir: mYt^ n ^ il
w: 'Riifn: mYt*^ i fWim ^ait ^ut-
MfifMW imffiTrDS II
II W^TWt ^•ftMMfJ^T’f^MreflXT^Y II ^ II
MfTM
TrpgV TTMMfeYftMY M^rf: II I $*§Y I ^TMT I fir^fY I
gfs# I ^WreY I MT*HiY I *iYffi?iY I ^W'TT I I w^sY II
MMMYfrfir fir II mmtmY i srmY 1 TWTfi' II MMT^Tfifir fir i
MMM I TWTfi - II MMM I MM I TTMT I fiH3T I I I
MTMM I MTfir^ I I MTMM I M"JM I WM I MfTM I MMM II
BDW always ?i-. So DW; B fi^fjfY > A ^"fifTrTT ( marg. cor-
rection). E has only the first two ex. A ttmwtY (?); BW
TTMT fir^fY; D -fit^TT 5 BDW “ A ^"jr-; BDW add
7
AD here add ^x^TT expl. in D by (hnt both are marked
8 9
in. D as spui.); B has with no Sans.; W om. A -*qxT* S° DW
and A orig. ( altered to ^-) ; B corrupt. Only BDW give Sans.
Ex conject. (as an ex. of ^ seems intended, although properly it
12
should not be a conjunct) ; BD ; W BDW add
13
D adds ^^X > Of* note ? •
if 11
il fa*: II 8 ii
T^ir^?T fag II fag II
ii wt «r: ii ii
^Tg ggnr TW*WT^fr ggfa il ?n^t i wirt il
ll -ggi vs: ii 4 ii
S Tmvt ^gig ggpggTTVT ggfg it grg? TfT II
*VS g<Tg II
II W *g: II « II
^ TW^I ^fT% «^T TW^WT^Wf ggfa II *T*?T*T I 4%TT II
Il gg? fafa Il c II
4 T3P3 ^TtS' fa* TW^Tt^fr ggfa II wfagjT ii *tHst II
10
II W II £- II
T T3PS? ^ ggfa II f^WT I g^frII
farm* I g^TT II
II gfgjTgt sggi II \° II
gfgjT'Jig? gjgj ^JT% ^jr TW^WT^'SrT ggfa II II
18 14
II W 'W II W H
gsni^gi 'aftTgfagTfaiggj ^ TW^Ti^T ggfa II
So MSS. ADW (but A orig. ^ like B); cf. Lass. p. 443.
3 4
Only W gives Sans. A w Tffa; only W gives Sans.
B 6 Only in A. 7 W ; B in Sut., but in
Comm. 8 So¥; AD ; B ° Only in W. 10 B -^f:
11 |g
in Sut. and ex. B om.; only W gives Sans. " B ^f. D ^
14
(and perhaps A). Bo^ (?);¥^;,
ii Train wren ii
i . a .<■
3TW II arm II
II TTWT TTf^ ST^fWnfe'5 nT II ^ II
zt ^f% arcnt TTfn TninnT-
t’ft nT nnfn II ^TfanT TWT I TTfanT W>" I TTfafn Tf^TH
TT^f^fW far II TT^T I TT^Tn I ^ff II
II <Wn II W II
i^nrarW ^IT% (3?t Tf^^WT^lfT rafrT II ^Tfjn I ^T(3?T I
•\10 .
^TTrf ||
C\
ii fWW ii ii
f%rf^t^- f^tfTS^ || flTTW ^ TT^tf^r II
II Tfa aR^fa«n TfT«rfTf^iT$ ^TTTfwT nTTf
TW -crf^^WT : H
'BW qro^ (B n.l.) 2 BD om. 5 B -f%rgin eft; W WT ;
4 5
the in 'A corrected to *g in marg. B om. f%;; W adds ■g. AW
0
om. So D except -^T -f% 5 A Ttfw T^T I Tlfafn
tP§t ; B TTfnnr Trsrr TT’ftnV tt^T Trsn ( sic ) ; w zt
TTf%*fT I I THtT* - Trftarr I f%^ TTfa-
f^R 7 A T^T ( added in marg.) ; B («*<?) ; W 5
8 9 10
D om. B -=ft rf. B xT?f ; W 7=£7j. The only ex. in BDEW
®v ®\
is ihrTn ; BD (not in AE) then add ^«nf% TpTT 3TiStf?r fef ( B
itfn f *) Tfn fti ^n?J (?); W has a new Sut. tarTfe
fanVrTfir m ii nrrnt^ffc w: f%n ^Tf% TWK^fi vnfn i
Wf% w I Wt^tfn I ^nf% I fan T,fn fa I 3?wfa
33W I^Tfa 33WT?5 I • A *fa throughout.
II -qn-ffT^ar: : 11
■C£_
II II
ll *n*iwt li l H
*rm *rnrvt i ^r^r^T'^t ^JgTt ll
li iriifn: aftr^ 11 ^ ii
W mai-SlT: TTlifH: ^fT<r^ II
ll wr: it: ll 3 ll
TjcfTT^TjcTTTT^f: TT »T?f?T II *TTT[ I fWrTT II TfTW: I
f^TTW: II
ll *r: ll 8 ll
aPffTT^t ^^TTT VRfa II II *IT^ II
|| ^=[3hg TJTgrJT rl^T^TT^: II 8 II
»TgfrT ii tjf^Tr i i
f%^ i fw?3% ll i ^sta^r: i f%srer: i f%3fr: ll
ll ’f : ii £ll
B ?J7T-; only BW have a Comm, to SS. 1, 2; E gives only the
2 3
Sutras throughout. ABW -■sjY in both ex .; cf. S. 10. A
and adds xEfpRT = Wr^TT* BD ^cfTp^'lTffT; Lassen (p. 397 ) conj.
aspashtata; the Sanksh. S. has managuchcharyah. So MSS.; A
0 7
altered to -T$f; E om. Sut. A for in all the ex. A frsni-
8 9 _
BW ^z*j\ Only BW give Sans.; Lassen proposes (P-
N
ii wurprarni: »
<L°
■%bitb iwr B3f?r ii 11 % ^jttbbt bb ii hb ^ir-
liY bb ii
ii bwHb: ii ® ii
^gnT^^TWr: Htb B^fa ii *irsf i ^bjw ii itb i
^ib: ii
ii w m- j| c ||
w bitb Bfinrr BBti ii bthti i » tt^b: i h
ii w^: bY ii ib it i_ ii
WT : UTB bY BTBT IB ’>Tf% TWW BIT^IT B3f?f II
f b BWTfa ii wi ^rwrf^r ii
II ’SB t^j?Y BT1B II \° II
BTf%c1B3BW I 'BITTTBT^^TBtY BTB TIT^IT^Y BBB: I
^ ^ 11 ^ 1 ^ 3 ^ 1 ^ 3 ^* 11 ^ ^ T1
ib bbw: ii
II ^trfT^ II %\ II
397). ' A ’ A adds bbIb- AD om. Sans .; BW
add (B -BTBT) ’BTBBBTflf^fB BT (?)• 4]D "Bi 5 B
-■^r: ; but both ■$£[ in Comm. A o for e; W ; B ;
ABW give Sans. °MSS. -ij. 7 From BW. *BDEW (and the
*N '
Sanksh. S. in Lass., p. 393) om. cf. Sak., Williams’ ed. p. 217;
Boehtl. p. 242. BDW t • 10 W for These ex. are
from W; B has BITBT I 1 B^bY ’71 tTf^lT; AI) IBf BBfT I
s9 S5 vS '
IB 1TBT ( D ifl BBT) IB Bf%B ( D ifl Bf%1) H ^frlBT ( D
11 Bf%ir) 11 BBT (11 BBT) ; only W gives Sans.
II ^T^"ar: II
tr^?r win n wsttt^ T^nt
ii i ^fafa i gfn^ i ii ^f%?f: ii
II ^WT -f t ^T II ^ I!
g=n: ^nn wrttstt gr win i rrwnY 5 fa
ii gfaniir? i gfanpu vw 11 vn 11
N nS si sS
II «fa#t II \ 9 , II
^rnfanfa i ^T<Tr^^T^^rrfr Tfaf wfa w^pft 11
6 7
nf^rcrr w i ww’jtt ii g^irfafa fa i ii
si s$ ^ ™
wn it
ii fa?*g fag: ii \h ii
faj^i wn fag ^npsmfawY wfa ii fagf ^ 1 ii
^ si
wfwfn ii
l! nsjWnnf -g: is h
i w v fiTwfa i TijR i tiw nrjrarw
wn ^rfa wfn ii i ni i *ii ii un: i *j<t: i nn: ii
w -^: ^tT^. ' ad ^f%^r: (AD if for throughout) ; B’s
g
ex. are gfa^ ^f% gfa^T ; W as in text. All but W confuse '£f and
’JT. *W -niSrt.44»^W?^r (?)• “Lassen (p. 397) prefers ^
to ; the MSS. have but they cannot he relied on. ABD
«WW^Ef (altered in A to TfTjnj); W (cf. var. lect. 3 vi. 64).
s9
8 BE -^: ; D --g-; ; A f^-g: ; W fgf;. °D --g; B fgg^ (sic); A
fw A t%¥- •> E nL ; D faifa; w fajfa ; A adds (sic)
faljfa I T^TTfa- 11 Only in W. ’' BW . “ BDW -JijR
" BW add a Sut. ^^3^ ^ffa II Tffa
II UTIiTPT^T'Si: II
ll ^Tfw: II H II
aiFSTW^J ^Tfw TSTWi^ 5*=lf% II Trf%^Tf% 51% I
ii «TfT 5T?r: i u^T’irr: ll
ll 335rr*«r^j wnf^^Tiftr^iT^r^T: u v® u
a^T^S^f 5?fT% ftr^T^TTT^ ^T%I[T ||
^Twf^ i ftntT% ^rrwfr i fPTw ii as’rra
II
II Tfr? ^T^sS% T?TSrfTO3iTil 5?T5I^T53f
Tnjrr^ar: ll
T^T^^fr *HfrT I ^rfw 3T% (B --^f) ; Hema-ch. gives this Sut.
f 1 2 3
in his Sauraseni chapter. 13DW -fWT- MSS. ^-. Only in A.
4 5
So BDW. B ^ for ^jy in Sut. throughout, but not in ex.; A
6 7
ftr^^TT orig. ab fai^r-. A -tjr.
I) qfr#^: II
II ^ ii
it Tfnrir^ft II \ H
II 3T3sf?r: hwi'ii ^ ii
it ^RT^raaft^ frq^vV ii ^ ii
ii snrin ^r: ii a ii
%
II jV $fa sfif^rfJl \ II
ii t ii ^ ii
II ^^lfWTRTr^^?RPrf t§?Y qr II « II
ii ii p it
BDW ; Book xii. has no Comm, in ABODE ; W gives a
Comm, but full of gross errors^ and of no authority; Of. Lass. App.
pp. 49— 58, with the Sanksh. S. quoted there : several Sut. are very
corrupt. B -rf- MSS. (D orig. -^V) ; BE add
(added in marg. of D) and then give as a new Sut.; W
also divides them, qjqT^-Tqspi: || qifni’IT ^TI qq '3^-
*piT: WlUnST: I tfWhTT tTtsn? I qtiq ; then q^qr^VT-
4 B-^; w - ¥ ^ : . 5 So EW; A q^T; BD q^r sfa- °BE
sJ 3
7 BW om. qqj. * So BW; D n.l.; A jqqjqf. 9 A qy; BW
^TT; C ; D ^T; E 3?f ; Of. Lass. App v p. 53. A f?[-
wlrw:; b -q-fq whit: ; D -qfq fipfrtt:; w -q-fa riw^h;
only E -Tff rr*T*ITt*T: ; c f- &•> 5.
ii uranrosirnr: it
£-8
II ?.^j: ii £_ ii
II gi*mT^: ll \° 11
II ii u ii
ll vT ll ^ ll
II 5? II II
II FFTWT I JTW wfe II 1,8 ll
ll wsj: ii ii
ll : ll ^ ll
ll WF*: PT: ll V® ll
ll T^ : W: ll v* ll
® N 10
II : II ^f~ II
II II i> e I!
’ ABEW-gp ; ^ ; AD ^j; (?) ; B jj-. 3 W
for fhr*-, with ex. gfTT^Tfw wf = ^^TTf*! etc. ! A ; c f-
5 6
Lass. p. 54. W E om. S. 1£—31. Lassen’s conject.; AC
FFT^ ft I FF^J B fiFFT F I D FFTT?F : 1
FF^r TW^I 5 W has two Sut. ^ ^T^-
■srT I ^FT *reff I 3^ I ^F^ ^>F and then FFTHF
wf? I FTVT'Tt: F^TT^t wfe FT<TT % I
7 8 9
F^tF etc - A •¥:; B -'3T; cw -tz: > D -t:- a W- a n - 1 -
10 BW (and A ?) i c 5 D^^qr; ( ?). Ex con-
•J
ject. j ADC fgtiT ; B faqt ; W fafq tjj; || f%fq q^?r:
^ s ^fT(fV: ^ ^T^TD | ^ifijr; Hema-ch. and the Sanksh. S.
II ■qfr’#?: H
it faqi n' 4 t ii v., ii
ii f%mfa7^t 11 ^ ii
|| Uq?5? 9|4 II *3 II
II II *.« II
II W^T 3WT q^N II 0 y II
ii wqqiwf & fwqi ii ^ ii
II 4nfr4Tqqu?qmi qwqT it *?*> ii
ii 4*rai ii ** ii
ii faqr mfiH it *c ii
give no help. Ex conject. ( cf \ Lass App. p. 56); AC
(the 7f in A altered to in a later hand; C has yy) fjJiJTfTT (f^F
only added in marg. A) ^y^y- ; D *y^: (the vd
Nj
partially erased) ; B vjq: faq faq ^jT^TrfT; W vrq: f%q faq fi?q
vj S ^ S» N S \.
mwt qC with ex. ^qpfq -fq- -fa :. ’ A -faf. 3 AC ^q (A
orig. ?);B ; DW -^aq-. 4 Corrupt; AC ^ f%<5}p • D :
B 4 faqqr ; w reads Sut. II ^SfTTnx^T^t ^<5^-
qrqq?rej q^j »?qfq ii qfq^ Trqq’q <yqq^ 11
qq4 etc. ; Lassen, p. 57, proposes f%t^T or fajf%RT:- W
absurdly adds f%^Vi before ^jjfpy- (W VT<^t") fro m S. 26, and
restricts this Sut. to fiysy^ and . ° ACD TT^y ; B ^5j«jyy
Tj;^ (?) ; W ^4 qq || fa^rqraTWqTfqHJ fqfa?T qrtRqRq^
qq >Tqfq; Qy■ Him qw (?) cf Lass. App. p. 57.
AfaqY ’q; BCDW faqt ^plfe ^ (D orig. 4-); W’s
Comm, is qrlfa q^rTT faq qq 3fqfa I Hi qrqqTfa Hi
ii iTTUrnnKnn 11
|| || 3° j|
II T?3P®T II ^ II
|| ^ 1?rSTTTfta<TJI ^ II
ii Tfa Jnwnm$ Tf^T^T^t T^rt
•TT'*?
*npr ^fo#^:
«*u?r: ii
^T^eTf^r i ^T^ifw ^i^Tfsr- a -fH- Lassen’s conject.
p. 58 (cf. ii., 35); ABCD ; W ITT^<fY and in Comm. -ifTCicf!
S •v
ir®^: Trsft-Ttrsi:: So W; ACD ^f^T5^l[»rq (A has a mark of
omission over ^f) ; B 4 W *j-.
r
For Hema-chandra’s Sutras on the Sauraseni dialect, see App. C.
APPENDIX A.
97
APPENDIX A.
[The MS. W contains many Sutras, which are not found in any other ;
some seem to be taken from Hema-chandra or the Prakrita Sanjfvam, but
others it is not easy to trace to their source. Those which have already been
given in the notes (as in p. 15, note 4, etc.) will not be repeated here.
None of those which follow can have any claim to be considered as
Yararuchi’s, and many indeed at once betray a spurious origin.]
ii ii’wiDu?} wfa: ^Trfji wft iNj i wr-
TTf WVTTt siPr i wfY TWTf^ II \ II
II II4 ** ^imji
i i ii ^ ii
n ^^TTrxitf w: ii *NN wt *nrf?r ii firrft i
C\ C\
fw*s<fr i wf^r ii i faww i ?nf% vwrfF ii ^ a
II WT II WT W WTrlJI
i ^tT wfr ii w vwtIf ii a it
II II ^ TffJJW T’S ^TW v ^5inVTfJ v 3iT-
imi^raTfq ii i ii ^ u
n sfa ^sr ii ^nrar^nitTfa '^sfr ?ref?r ii
sr^si ii $ ii
1 This is added after iii. 6. 2 After iii. 9. 3 Here and often elsewhere W
has a double aspirate, which I have corrected. 4 This and the next, after
iv. 1. 5 Cf. iii. 58. 6 This and the next, after iv. 23; both belong to Sect. xii.
o
98
PRAKRITAPRAIiASA :
it H frytsra II *t^i-
wt i ^vrv?r i % •»re ^ spa# II II
H WSf 3 T II W ^ITrTJI II *Rfa: I Wl 1
WiTT II ^ II
ii ii i t ?4 wreirji *_ 11
II ii wr^rffai ^mifa^Tr-
^srr *ref 7 r 11 ^far^g i ^rgift i ^tf^if^r m-
II \° II
ii ttstotvi vi 5 ? ii $1 f^rrc*
*t f'w w ^ ^t: ^TiirW^T wY^rr: i ^rar 3 TTT twt-
f% 11 w 11
II ^PTJSTT '€Hl II '€?f 3 >rir TWrt'^l'
JT^frf II TTft^l I I II ^ I *fTZ^ I W II ^ II
II %N*U II f% rlT^ I W VUirfwt'sh wfrf I f%^T II II
11 11 1 fawTf^niT H«11
11 srtwro 11 m t s w<to ifrwNi »m^TV * ^rrfft 11 f%-
^ 5 TT I WT I ^fTT I ’SfW’CT « *X «
11 II f%T 1 w ’m: ll
*RT fw^TT II *4 II
1 This and the two next follow v. 44. 2 After vi. 60. 3 The last Sut. in
Eook vi.; a long list of ex. is omitted. 4 After vii. 24 \_cf. note to vii. 23] ;
this Sut. seems unaccountable. 5 After viii. 6. 6 This Sut. comes after W’s
version of viii. 56 (hence the na-Jcdra) which in W follows viii. 14; [cf. Yar.
Lect.] 7 This Sut. follows and restricts viii. 18; the m being elided by iii. 2.
8 This and the five next Sutras follow viii. 37; W also has visura in viii. 63,
which proves this to be an interpolation.
APPENDIX A.
99
|| II TISI I %jT<frTTrtwV I
w
twt ii V s ii
ii tinN: ii tw T^T^f i w vT;?r*r5T^irr wfn i
w ii w ii
ii ^rvf^r: ii <Tr^ i w wfa i f%-
w; ii H
ii ii ^ i w m<frgT*$rT^wf *raf?r i
W ii ii
II TT’sjTw't-ftiTOct <fr<Sf^ || grnfr V<4 WrTJI $T
i ^ifW ^vTfn ii ^ ii
ii ^r^:° ii i w vufr^uw ^rrr *nrf?f i
ii ^ II
ii ^Ttw- ii femir i w vTffiTw^i ^<4 *nira i i
^rg^f?r ii ^ ii
II II f%<^ WT ^JTr! K i ^TTT^N II
frwT ti^t i finT fr^r ii i *r
^rw ii ^8 ii
II fil^TWTm^faWr: II ||
’ft^TT I I 1 WT I I V78TT I ^tTT II
i?*ra w f=R^m T^nf^ ii ^ i!
1 Cod. n-. 2 Cod. mahdi. 3 Cod. vibhbhai, whence Delius conject. vijjha.
4 Sic Cod.; the sick may be an error for Jchkh. 0 1 omit the recapitulation of
the roots. 6 This and the next, after viii. 38. 7 After viii. 53; the Com¬
mentary’s chakara is wrong, as there is no Sut. for otwam. 8 Cf. ii. 12 (?).
9 After viii. 71, before ajdde'sd bahulam; cf. Yar. Lect., p. 81.
100
PRAKItITAPRAKASA :
ii ^q^rat fqwr ii ii
ii q^ur f% II ii
II ^ %qfq^*T$W^ II ^ II
II Wt II
11 %»rr ^Wf 4 m ii ? v ° ii
ii ww^iiwV 5 ii ^ ii
ii 33 fsf?np^ ^f% ii ^ ii
ii ^rfwr ^f%w wt ii ^ u
ii to q^m ii ^8 ii
ii <ro f?n$*ra ii ii
II " 35 %: ii ^ ii
II f%^r II ^ II
ii ^^qvre TTTqfwmqvria wr: ii ^ it
\$ V*
ii qrf%t *ffa: ii ^f~ ii
ii qq: II 8 ° II
s
ii qj?rr ^rrri ii 8 \ ii
1 This and the next after ix. 3 ; I omit the Comm, and ex. as being-
needless in Sutras on nipatah. 2 Cf. i. 14. 3 This and the next, after ix. 8.
4 After ix. 13. 5 This and the remaining Sutras are inserted after ix. 15
(being immediately preceded by the Yar. Lect., of Sut. 9, q.v. in notes). 6 With
Comm. daJcshinasabde dahino nipatyate vihalpena ; dahino pavano. 7 Tor this,
cf. viii. 62, note; the ex. given is hittham datthuna raam — bhttasmi drishtwa
rajanam . 8 The Pr. Sanj. and Hema-ch. both allow hutta to be used in the
sense of abhimukha ; cf. Appendix B.; W’s ex is huttam gaam.
APPENDIX B.
101
APPENDIX B.
ON PAGE 35 (IY. 25, COMM.).
The passage enclosed in brackets is only found in AC and stands in A
as follows: —
'TTTTt' (altered in a later hand to -(eft)
f~*?m gif^ i i ttt^: !rfa% TPjsjg i
gfDre i wi i qfrww *r4f?r
I Tr^Tf I fafrP* I ^frCS I I I ?NfW
grs: i ^art g t^w i gg-
Itt i *mfV wr i ^rnh ^fig wnc: wtw: i
1 2 3
C -IRF® rfT- ’ C gjgi. C ^}cU but in next line :
v»
C has no other Var. Lect. worthy of notice.
The division of the passage into Sutras (proposed by Prof. Lassen, cf.
Inst., p. 93) is open to several objections : 1. The silence of the MSS. BDEW ;
there being no instance of a Sutra, much less of several Sutras, being found in
AC alone, although the other MSS. contain Sutras not found in AC. 2. The
two MSS. themselves do not seem to give them as Sutras, as in every in¬
stance, if we separate off a part as the Sut., the Comm, is thereby rendered
incomplete. 3. The passage needs hardly any alteration to run at once into
verse, with the examples interposed between each line ; with the exception
of the last two lines, of which more presently.
As printed in the text, I conceive the passage to be quoted by the
Scholiast at the end of the Comm, on Sut. 25, for it should be borne in
mind that the first three verses still refer to the affix matup, which is the
subject of that Sut., and the fourth seems only added because other Gram-
102
P RAKRIT APRAKASA :
marians ( ityanye ), had introduced a pronominal affix, which the author of
the verse maintains to be merely a provincialism.
The Prak. Sanj. in the course of its corrupt Comm, on Sut. 25, gives
appullam and purillam (explaining the former by dtm'iyam, and the latter by
purobhavam paurastyam) and then adds Bhavettam ( sic ) matupo 'ntyasya
akdrastu tatha kwachit; hanuma, Jianumanto; sankhydydh kritwaso huttam
. # . y *
dbhimukhye ’pi drisyate; panchahuttam, panchakritwas ; chhahuttam shat -
kritwas ; saahuttam satakritwas ; piahuttam , priyabhimukham ; ishtau kimyat-
tadetadbhyah parimane ttiahau (ttiaddahau ?); kettiam, keddaham, kim pari-
manam asya kiyat; jettiam jeddaham, yavat , etc. These do not appear to be
given as new Sutras, but follow in the course of the Comm. After these
comes a new Sutra, “ S war the ko va; asminarthe pratipadikat kapratyayo
bhavati va; bhamarao, bhramara , pakshe bhamaro with other similar ex.
Hema-chandra in a corresponding passage has the following Sutras,
which may have occasioned the introduction of the lines in Bhamaha at all.
II VTffffv ll
vfWWTW TfW* TWTTah wf?T I ^ I
I I V^rT^Tf%T5 I
t (**<0 Tfw^r
i vtpii* v i i favwj
f%PrIW etc -
ll utt ii with ex. ^rsrtf i srq fTrarbr-
ll ll
One ex. of manta is hanumanto, of itta (sic) manaitto , of ira, gavviro, of
mana, dhanamano; then comes kechin-madesam ap'ichchhanti, hanumd.
• ' • • •
After three unimportant Sutras we have
ll ii srra: vft Ti TwnV f%rT
vS>
3^<t: i etc -
* This sense of abhimukha is given to hutta by Hema-ch. also, see infra. Cf. the
spurious Sut. of W (No. 38) App. A.
APPENDIX R.
103
vrwrf: i
Hema-ch., therefore, and the author of the Pr. Sanj. both confirm the
corrections which I have made in the text, down to p. 36, line 2, the only
part which is left uncorrected being the two succeeding lines. These will
not readily run into verse, and certainly bear strong marks of being a Sut.
and mutilated Comm. The jatau at the commencement seems inexplicable,
and the absence of any ex. proves that the Comm, is imperfect. Whether
we should read it swarthe Ico va, or whether under the jatau there is hid some
allusion to Hema-chandra’s illollau ditau is doubtful; but as it stands, jatau
is almost unintelligible, and certainly is unsupported by either of the Gramm,
who are our authorities for the meaning of the whole passage ( Cj\ the Schol.
quoted by Stenzler, Introd. Mrichchhak., p. vi„ which also partly runs
into verse). All the MSS. agree in adding swarthe in the Comm, of Siit. 26,
which is a strong argument for a Sutra like this having dropped out here.
104
PRAKRITAPRAKASA :
APPENDIX C.
HEM A-CHANDRA'S CHAPTER ON THE SAURASENI DIALECT.
[As the twelfth Section of Vararuchi has no Comm, and is therefore in
several places corrupt, I have added an abridgement of Hema-chandra’s cor¬
responding rules from the MSS. 200 (a) and 171 (b) in the Walker Collec¬
tion in the Eodleian. This and the Sutras of the Sanksh. Sara (Lassen
App., p. 51) are of great use in correcting Yararuchi. The numbers affixed
*
are given from b, which numbers all the Sutras. The Saurasem Bhasha takes
up SS. 260—286 of the fourth Pada.]
TO DO ’NADAU SAURASENYAM AYUKTASYA. (260.)
Saurasenyam bhashayam^ anadav apadadau vartamanasya takarasya da-
karo bhavati, na ched asau varnantarena samyukto hhavati (Yar. xii. 3).
ADHAS KWACHIT. (261.)
Yarnantarasya adho vartamanasya tasya do bhavati, kwachillakshyanu-
sarena; mahando, andeuram.
YADES TAYATI. (262.)
With examples * dava,’ *tava.'
A AMANTRYE SAU YENO NAH. (263.)
Ino nakarasya amantrye sau pare akaro va bhavati; hho kanchuia,
pakshe bho tavassi. ( a is optionally substituted in the voc. for the n of
words ending in in.)
MO YA. (264.)
Amantrye sau nakarasya mo va bhavati, bho raam, etc.
BHAYADBHAGAYATOH. (265.)
Amantrya iti nivrittam; anayos sau pare nasya mo bhavati, bhavam,
etc. (In this and the preceding rule the final m becomes anuswara; of.
Yar. iv. 12.)
APPENDIX C.
105
YA EYYO YYAH. (266.)
Eyasya yyo va bhavati; ayyautto, pakshe ajja (of, Yar. iii. 17; x. 11).
THO DHAH. (267.)
The Comm, adds apadadau’ (Yar. xii. 3).
IHAHACHOE HASYA. (268.)
DJi is substituted for the h of iha, and the Prakrit suffix of the 2d pers.
plur. imperative (which Hema-ch. calls hack ; of. Yar. vii. 19) as Idha or iha,
* here;’ Hodha or hoha, ‘be yed
BHTTYO BHAH. (269.)
The Comm, adds vd with ex. bhodi, hodi; bhuvadi, huvadi; bhavadi,
havadi (Yar. xii. 12.)
PUEYASYA PUEAYAH. (270.)
The Comm, adds vd.
KTWA IADUEATJ. (271.)
With ex. Bhavia, bhoduna; havia, hoduna (the MSS. have iya for ia,
but both frequently write y for a) pakshe, bhotta, hotta (Yar. xii. 9).
KEIGrAMO DADUAH. (272.)
/
Abhyam parasya ktwapratyayasya dit adua ityadeso bhavati; gadua,
etc. (Yar. xii. 10).
DIE ICHECHOH. (273.)
Tyadinam adyatrayasy’ adyasya ‘ ichechav ’ iti vihitayor ichechos sthane
dir bhavati, veti nivrittam ; dedi, bhodi.
ATO DESCHA. (274.)
Akarat parayor ichechos sthane deh (chakarad discha) bhavati; gach-
chhade, gachchhadi; ata iti kim, nedi, bhodi.
BHAYISHYATX SSIH. (275.)
The Comm, adds ‘hissaham apavadah’ (of. Yar. vii. 12, 13) with ex.
Bhavissidi, gachhissidi.
ATO EASES DADODADU. (276.)
Akaratparasya hases sthane ado adu ityadesau ditau bhavatah (of. Sanksh.
Sara, 9; and Lass. App., p. 54) t
IDAEIMO DAEIM. (277.)
( Cf. Yar. xi. 15, Yar. Lect.)
TASMAT TA. (278.)
r
106 PRAKRITAPRAKASA.
MO ’YTYAYYO YEDETOH. (279.)
Antyan makarat para idetos parayor nakaragamo va bhavati. 1
EYAETHE YYEYA. (280.)
HAYJE CHETYAHWAYE. (281.)
(This and the remaining Sutras refer to nipdtah.)
HIMAYAHE YISMAYAYIEYEDE. (282.)
YAM YAYYAETHE. (283.)
AMMAHE HAESHE. (284.)
HIHI YIDESHAKASYA. (285.)
SESHAM PEAEEITAYAT. (286.)
1 The ex. given are * i-lcare, juttam nimam, juttaminam, e-liare , kim
nedam, kimedam, evam nedam, evamedam. ,
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
OP VAEAEUCHI, TEANSLATED.
Yictoey to Ganesa! who is filled with pleasure as he rubs his cheek with
his trunk, while the corners of his eyes are closed as he listens to the sweet
sounds of the bees, delighted with the juice which flows from his temples.
By searching out the things which were to be defined in these Sutras of
Prakrit definitions, composed by Yararuchi, Bhamaha, having attained their
meaning, has made a clear and yet concise commentary.
SECTION THE EIEST.
ADER ATAH. (1).
This Sutra is supposed to exercise an authority [adhikdra\, by virtue of
which it is implied in the succeeding sutras. The various rules, which we
shall go through in order, are to be understood as supplying substitutes 4 for
the first a.’ 1 Eor the first ’ is implied in all the Sutras to the end of the
section; ‘a’ is implied until it is itself enjoined as a substitute for another
vowel [in Sutra 10]. The t in at is used to exclude the homogeneous vowel 1
[Panini, L, L 70].
A SAMRIDDHYADISHU YA. (2).
In the words samriddhi , etc., a is optionally used for the first a. Thus
Prakrit:—
Samiddhi, samiddhi; paadam, paadam; ahijai, ahijai; manansim, manan-
/
1 Ader does not merely refer to the vowel in the first syllable, as it
strictly ought to do, but frequently means the first vowel of a certain kind
in a word, e.<j., the a in ishat in Sutra 3.
108
[sect. I.
THE PRAKRITA PEAK ASA
sini; padivaa, padivaa; sarichchham, sarichchham; padisiddhf, padisiddhf;
pasuttam, pasuttam; pasiddhf, pasiddhf; asso, aso.
Sanskrit:—
Samriddhi, ‘ prosperity ’; prakata, Manifest’; abhijati, ‘ family’; mana-
swinf, ‘a wise woman’; pratipad, ‘the first day of a lunar fortnight’;
sadriksha, ^likepratisparddhin, ‘a rival’; 1 prasupta, Asleep’; prasiddhi,
‘fame’; aswa, ‘a horse.’
This is a class of words which can only be determined by observing the
forms used in classical authors.
SHU. (3).
In the words ishat, etc., i is substituted for the first a. The optionally’ of
the former rule does not apply to this.
Isi, pikkam, sivino, vediso, viano, niuingo, ingalo.
Ishat, ‘little’; pakwa, ‘cooked’; swapna, ‘sleep’; vetasa, ‘a ratan’;
vyajana, ‘a fan’; mridanga, ‘a drum’; angara, ‘charcoal.’
LOPO ’BAHYE. (4).
In the word aranya , ‘a forest,’ the first a is elided: as, Rannam.
E SAYYADISHU. (5).
In the words sayya , etc., e is substituted for the first a.
Sejja, sunderam, ukkero, teraho, achchheram, perantam, velli.
^ £ C C i
Sayya, a bed’; saundarya, beauty’; utkara, a heap’; trayodasa, the
thirteenth’; ascharya, ‘wonderful’; paryanta, ‘limit’; valli, ‘a creeper.’
0 BADABE DEHA (6).
In the word badara, ‘ the jujube,’ the first a, with the letter d (including
its inherent vowel), becomes o, as Voram.
LAYAHAHAYAMALLIKAYOB YEHA. (7).
In the two words lav ana, ‘ salt,’ and navamaUilcd, ‘ double jasmine,’ the
first a, with the following v (including its inherent vowel), becomes o : as,
Lon am, nomallid.
2 Such is Yararuchi’s explanation, cf> iii., 37; Lassen (Prak. Instit. p.
265, note) proposes ‘ pratishiddhi.’ I may add here that in the first four
Sections I have generally followed the MSS. in giving the Sanskrit word in
its crude form, while in Prakrit it appears in its nom. sing., as modified by
the rules of Sect. v. This chiefly applies to the termination o.
SECT. I.]
OF VARARUCHI.
109
MAYUEAM A YUKH AYOE YWA YA. (8).
In the two words mayura, ‘ a peacock/ and mayukha, ‘ a ray/ the first
a, with the syllable yu, becomes optionally o : as, Moro or tnaiiro, moho or
mciuho.
CHATUETH1CHATUEDASYOS TUYA. (9).
In the two words chaturtln and cTiaturcla'si, ‘ the fourth ’ and fourteenth
lunations/ the first a , with the syllable tu, optionally becomes o : as, Chotthi
or cJiauttln, choddahi or chauddahi.
ADATO YATHADISHU YA. 1 (10).
A is no longer implied [see Sutra 1], in consequence of the change of
sthdnin or * primitive element.’ In the words yathd , etc., a is optionally
substituted for a.
Jaha, jaha; taha, taha; pattharo, pattharo; pauam, pauam; talaventaam,
talaventaam; ukkhaam, ukkhaam; chamaram, chamaram; paharo, paharo ;
chadu, chadu; davaggf, davaggf; khaiam, khiiiam; santhaviam, santhaviam;
halio, halio.
Yatha, ‘as’; tatha, ‘so’; prastara, ‘abed’; prakrita, ‘low’; talavrintaka,
‘a fan’; utkhata, ‘dug up’; chamara, ‘a chowrie’; prahara, ‘a blow’; chatu,
‘flattery’; davagni, ‘the burning of a forest’; khadita, ‘eaten’; sansthapita,
‘placed’; halika, ‘belonging to a plough.’
IT SADADISITIJ. (11).
In sadd, etc., i is optionally substituted for a: as, Sai, sod; tai, tad ;
jai, jad.
Sada, ‘always’; tada, ‘then’; yada, ‘when.’
ITA ET PI YD AS AME SHU. (12),
In words like pinda , e is optionally substituted for i : as,
Pendam, pindam; nedda, nidda; senduram, sinduram; dhammellam, dham-
millam ; chendham, chindham; venhu, vinhu; pettham, pittham.
Pinda, ‘a lump’; nidra, ‘sleep’; sindura, ‘red lead’; dhammilla, ‘braided
hair’; chihna, ‘a mark’; vishnu, ‘Yishnu’; pishta, ‘pounded.’
The word sama or ‘like,’ is used to indicate that the rule only applies
when the i is followed by a conjunct consonant (as in pinda).
AT PATHIHAEIDEAPEITHIYISHU. (13).
1 The Prak. Sanj. constantly uses this siitra to explain the change of d
to a before a conjunct; as in «chchhera for dscharya.
110
[sect. i.
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
In pathin, etc., a is substituted for i : as,
Paho (or in its crude form, paha), haladda, puhavi.
Pathin, a path’; haridra, ‘turmeric’; prithivi, ‘ the earth.’
ITESTAH PADADEH. (14).
In the word iti, ‘ thus,’ when at the beginning of a sentence, a is sub¬
stituted for the i which follows the t : as,
la uaha annaha-vaanam, ia viasantiu chiram.
• • •
Iti pasyatiinyathavachanam, ‘so behold 4 the hypocrisy (?)’; iti vikasan-
tyas chiram, ‘ thus blossoming a long time.’
We infer, from its being restricted to the beginning of a sentence, that
the rule does not hold in such a case as pio tti , ‘ priya iti.’
ED IKSHEYEISCHIKAYOH. (15).
In the two words ikshu, the cane,’ and vrischika , the scorpion,’ u is
substituted for i : as, Uchchhu, vinchhuo.
0 CHA DWIDHAKEIYAH. (16).
0 is substituted in the word dwidha when used with the root krin, and
u also, since we find cha in the Sutra. Thus, dividhdkritam, ‘bisected,’
becomes dohaiam or duhdiam; and dwidhakriyate , ‘ it is bisected,’ dohdijjai
or duhaijjai.
IT SIHHAHHWAYOSCHA. (17).
In sinha , ‘a lion,’ and jihwa, ‘the tongue,’ i is substituted for i\ as, siho,
jiha. The cha is used in the Sutra to include other words which are not
mentioned, hence there is an i in such words as visattha, visambha, etc., for
viswasta, ‘trusted,’ visrambha , ‘trust,’ etc. [The commentator, therefore,
would seem to bring under this rule the various instances where an i , which
would properly in Prakrit be followed by a double consonant, is exchanged
for an z, and one of the consonants is dropped].
ID ITAH PAYIYADISHU. (18).
In pamya , etc., i is substituted for the first t: as,
1 The first of these examples is very obscure. JJaha or uvaha is a singular
word, which is found in the Bengali recension of Sakuntala [see Boehtl., p.
150]. There is no rule for it in Yararuchi, but Hemachandra [8th adhy.,
2nd pada] has the following: ‘Ea pasya; ua iti pasy’etyasyarthe va prayok-
tavyam; pakshe pulaadayah ’ [_cf, Yar. viii. 69]. Lenz, therefore, rightly
called it [Erv. p. 224],‘ imperativa rpuedam forma vulgaris linguae.’
SECT. I.]
OF VARARUCHI.
Ill
Paniam, aliam, valiam, taanim, kariso, duiam, taiam, gahiram.
Paniya, ‘ water’; ali'ka, ‘false’; vyalika, ‘painful’; tadam'm, ‘then’;
karisha, ‘dried cow-dung’; dwitfya, ‘second’; tritiya, ‘third’; gabhira, ‘deep.’
m NIDAPIDAKIDRIGIDRISESIIG. (19).
In n'lda, etc., e is substituted for i : as,
Yeddam, apelo, keriso, eriso.
ISTfda, ‘a nest’; apfda, ‘pressing’; kfdris, ‘what like’; idrisa, ‘such.’
TJTA OT TEND ARTJPE SHE. (20).
In words like tunda , o is substituted for u : as,
Tondam, motta, pokkharo, potthao, loddhao, kottimam.
Tunda, ‘the face’; mukta, ‘a pearl’; pushkara, ‘a lake’; pustaka, ‘a
book’; lubdhaka, ‘a hunter’; kuttima, ‘a jewel-mine.’
The word rupa or ‘like,’ is used in the Sutra to indicate that the u must
be followed by a conjunct consonant (as in tunda).
GLEKHALE L¥A YA. (21).
In ulukhala, ‘ a mortar,’ u with the syllable lu optionally becomes o : as,
olclchalam or uluhalam.
AN MGKGTADISHU. (22).
In mukuta, etc., a is substituted for the first u : as,
Maudam, maulam, garuam, garui, jahitthilo, soamallam, avari.
Mukuta, ‘a crest’; mukula, ‘a bud’; guru, gurvf, ‘heavy’; Yudhishthira,
‘the name of a king’; saukumarya, ‘youthfulness’; upari, ‘above.’
IT PGRESHE ROIL (23).
In the word puruska , ‘ a man,’ i is substituted for the u which follows r :
as, Pur iso.
ED ETO MAEHTJKE. (24).
In the word madhuka, ‘ Rassia latifolia,’ u is substituted for u : as, Mahuam.
AD DGKELE YA LASYA DWITWAM. (25).
In the word dukula, ‘ woven silk,’ a is optionally substituted for u, and
when it is so substituted, the l is doubled: as, Duallam or duulam.
m GTJPGRE. (26).
In the word nupura, ‘ an anklet,’ e is substituted for it: as, Neuram.
RITO ’T. (27).
A is substituted for ri in the first syllable of a word : as,
Tanam, ghana, maam, kaam, vaddho, vasaho.
112
'I' H E J ’ R A K RI TAP R A K ASA
[sect. t.
Trina, ‘grass’; ghrina, ‘pity’; mrita, ‘dead’; krita, ‘made’; vriddha,
‘old’; vrishabha, ‘a bull.’
ID RISHYADISIttJ. (28).
In rishi, etc., i is substituted for tbe initial ri : as,
• •
Isf, visi, gitthi, ditthf, sitthf, singaro, mianko, bhingo, bhingaro, hiaam,
yiinho, yinhiam, kisaro, kichcba, yinchhuo, sialo, kif, kisf, kiya.
Rishi, ‘a sage’; vrishf, ‘an ascetic’s cushion’; grishti, ‘a cow that has
had one calf’; drishti, ‘sight’; srishti, ‘creation’; sringara, ‘loye’; mriganka,
‘the moon’; bhringa, ‘a bee’; bhringara, ‘a yase’; hridaya, ‘the heart’;
vitrishna, ‘ contented ’; vrinhita, ‘ grown ’; krisara, ‘ a kind of pottage ’; kritya,
‘action’; vrischika, ‘a scorpion’; srigala, ‘a jackal’; kriti, ‘act’; krishi,
‘husbandry’; kripa, ^pity.’
UD RITWADISHD. (29).
In ritu, etc., u is substituted for the initial ri : as,
Udu, munalo, puhayi, yundavanam, pauso, pautti, riudam, samyudam,
niyvudam, vuttanto, parahuo, mauo, jamauo.
Ritu, ‘a season’; mrinala, ‘a lotus-fibre’; prithivi, ‘the earth’; yrinda-
• « • • #
vana, ‘a country so called’; pravrish, the rainy season’; prayritti, ‘news’;
vivrita, ‘opened’; samviita, ‘covered’; nirvrita, ‘ended;’ yrittanta, ‘news’;
parabhrita, ‘ the koil ’; matrika, ‘ a maternal uncle ’; jamatrika, ‘ a son-in-law.’
AYUICTASYA RIH. (30).
The syllable ri is substituted for the vowel ri when initial and not con¬
nected with another letter: as,
Rinam, riddho, riehchho.
Rinam, ‘a debt’; riddha, ‘prosperous’; riksha, ‘a bear.’
KYYACHID YATKTASYAPI. (31).
The syllable ri is sometimes substituted for an initial
connected with another letter : as,
Eriso, sariso, tariso.
Idrisa,
‘such’; sadrisa, ‘like’; tadrisa, ‘such.’
even when it is
VRIKSHE VERA RUR VA. (32).
In the word vriJcsha, ‘a tree,’ the syllable ru is optionally substituted for
the initial ri with its accompanying v : as rulclcho , vachMo. The option
being here definitely restricted, the change does not take place at all in the
oase of the substitution of chh, but it holds universally in that of Jch Tsee
iii., 31.]
SECT. I.]
OF VARARUCHI.
113
LEITAH KLEIPTA ILIH. (33).
In the word klripta, ‘ made/ Hi is substituted for Iri : as, Kilittam. From
the above substitutions being enjoined, we infer that the vowels ri and Iri
do not exist in Prakrit.
ETA ID YEDAHADEYAEAYOH. (34).
In vedana, ‘ pain,’ and devara, a brother-in-law,’ i is substituted for e:
as, viand, diaro. Since ‘ optionally’ is still implied (from Sutra 32), the
forms veana and demo are also sometimes used.
AITA ET. (35).
E is substituted for the first ai : as,
Selo, sechcham, eravano, kelaso, tellokkam.
Saila, a mountain’; saitya, cold’; Airavata, Indra’s elephant’; Kailasa,
‘ the mountain so called ’; trailokya, * the three worlds.’
DAITYADISHWAI. (36).
In the words daitya, etc., ai is substituted for the diphthong ai: as,
Da'ichcho, chai'tto, bha'iravo, sa'iram, va'iram, vaideso, vai'deho, kai'avo,
va'isaho, vaisio, vaisampaano.
Daitya, ‘ a demon’; Chaitra, c the name of a month’; bhairava, ‘dreadful’;
swaira, ‘ wilfnlness’; vaira, ‘enmity’; vaidesa, ‘foreign’; vaideha, ‘a trader’;
kaitava, ‘a cheat’; Yaisakha, ‘the name of a month’; vaisika, ‘meretricious’;
Yaisampayana, ‘the name of a poet’; etc.
DAIYE YA. (37).
In daiva, ‘fate,’ ai is optionally substituted for the diphthong at: as,
daivam or devvam. In the case of its non-substitution, the v is doubled by
the Sutra ‘ Yfdadishu’ [iii., 52].
IT SAIYDHAYE. (38).
In the word saindhava, produced in Sindh,’ i is substituted for ai: as,
Sindhavam.
ID DHA1EYE. (39).
In the word dhairya, ‘firmness,’ the substitute is i: as, Eliiram.
OTO ’DYA PEAKOSHTHE KASYA YAH. (40).
In the word pralcoshtha , ‘ the fore-arm,’ a is optionally substituted for o ;
and, when it is so substituted, the Jc becomes v : as, Pavattho or paottho.
ATJTA OT. (41).
0 is substituted for the first au : as,
114
[sect. 1.
THE PRAKRIT A PEAK ASA
Komui, jovvanam, kotthuho, kosambf.
Kaumudf, 1 moonlight’; yauvanam, South’; kaustubha, ‘Yishnu’s gem’;
Kausambi, ‘ the name of a city. 5
P AURADISHWAY. (42).
In paura , etc., ail is substituted for the diphthong au :
Paiiro, kaiirao, praiiiso.
Paura, ‘a citizen 5 ; kaurava, ‘ a descendant of Kuru 5 ; paurusha, ‘ manly. 5
These form a class of words which can only be determined by observing
the forms used in good authors. In the word Jcau'sala, ‘ welfare, 5 the change
is optional: as, Jcosalo or Jcaiisalo.
ACHCHA GAURAYE. (43).
In the word gaurava, * respectability, 5 u is substituted for au, and so also
is au as before (since we find cha, 1 and, 5 in the Sutra): as, garavam or gau -
ravam.
UT SAUYDARYADISHU. (44).
In saundarya, etc., u is substituted for au : as,
Sunderam, munjaano, sundo, kukkheao, duvvario. 1
Saundarya, ‘ beauty 5 ; maunjayana, ‘ a place producing the munja plant 5 (?);
saunda, ‘intoxicated 5 ; kauksheyaka, ‘a sword 5 ; dauvarika, ‘ a porter, 5 etc.
1 I may here remind the reader of what is further discussed elsewhere—
viz., that in Prakrit there appears to have been no distinction between v and
b, although it is uncertain which was the prevailing sound.
SECT. II.]
OF VARARUCHI.
115
SECTION THE SECOND.
AYUKTASYAXALAU. (1).
This being an adhikara , will be implied in the succeeding Sutras. The
rules which we shall from this point enjoin, are to he understood as applying
in the case of a single non-initial consonant. The elision of k, etc., by Sutra
2, will serve for an instance : as, Maiidam for the Sanskrit Mukuta. Why
do we say ‘a single consonant’ ? Compare Aggho and Akko for the Sanskrit
Argha and Arka (where we find a conjunct consonant, and consequently no
elision). Why ‘ non-initial’ ? compare Kamalam. ‘ Single’ is implied to the
end of the section; ‘non-initial,’ until j is enjoined in Sutra 31.
KAGACHAJATADAPAYAVAM PEAYO LOPAH. (2).
These nine consonants, k, g, ch, j, t, d , p, y, v , l when single and non¬
initial, are generally elided : as, k , Maiilo, nalilam; g, saaro, naararn; eh,
vaanam, suf; j, gao, raadam; t, kaam, vianam; d, gaa, mao; p, kaf, viulam,
suuriso. (In the word ‘ supurusha,’ although they? is the initial of the word
‘purusha,’ the last member of the compound, it is still elided. The author
of the comment, therefore declares that * the initial letter of the last member
of a compound is considered as non-initial.’) Y, vauna, naanam; v, jfam,
diaho [ cf\ ii. 46],
Mukula, ‘a, bud’; nakula, * disgraced ’; 2 sagara, ‘the sea’; nagara, ‘a city’;
vachana, ‘ speech’; suchf, ‘a needle’; gaja, ‘an elephant’; rajata, ‘silver’;
krita, ‘made’; vitana, ’expansion’; gada, ‘a club’; mada, ‘joy’; kapi, ‘an
ape’; vipula, ‘large’; supurusha, ‘a good man’; vayuna, (insir. of vayu) ‘the
wind’; nayana, ‘the eye’; jfva, ‘life’; divasa, ‘ a day.’
Prom the use of prdgas, (‘generally,’) in the Sutra, we conclude that
there is no elision where euphony is satisfied, as in Sukusumam, piagamanam,
sachavam, avajalam, atulam, adaro, aparo, ajaso, savahumanam.
Sukusuma, ‘fair-flowered’; priyagamana, ‘sweetly-going’; sachapa, ‘armed
1 Or b; cf. Lass., p. 201.
2 Or, ‘A Pandava prince’ [naiilof
116
THE P11AKRIT AP RAK AS A
[sect. II.
with a bow’; apajala, ‘ without water’; atula, Unequalled’; adara, ‘respect’;
apara, ‘unbounded’; ayasas, ‘infamy’; sabahumana, ‘respectful.’
As illustrations of what we mean by ‘ single consonants,’ compare Sakko,
maggo, for Sakra, Indra,’ and marga, a path:’ and by non-initial,’ com¬
pare Halo and gandbo, for Kala, ‘ time,’ and gandha, ‘ a smell.’
YAMUNA YAM MASYA. (3.)
In the word Yamuna , ‘ the river so called,’ the m is elided : as, Jaund.
SPHATIKANIKASHACHIKUEESHU KASYA HAH. (4.)
‘Non-initial’ continues to be implied. In the three words sphatiJca,
‘crystal,’ nilcasha, ‘the touchstone,’ and chi/cura, ‘hair,’ h is substituted for Jc
[we now pass from elision to substitution] : as, Phaliho, nihaso, chihuro.
SIKABE BHAH. (5).
In the word silcara, thin rain,’ bh is substituted for h : as, Sibharo .
CHANDEIKAYAM MAH. (6.)
In the word cJiandrikd, moonlight,’ m is substituted for k : as, Chandimd .
EITWADISHU TO HAH. (7.)
In ritu, etc., d is substituted for t : as,
Udu, raadam, aado, nivvudf, audf, samvudf, suidi, aidi, hado, sanjado,
viudam, sanjado, sampadi [padivaddi J ].
Eitu, ‘a season’; rajata, ‘silver’; agata, ‘come’; nirvriti, ‘rest’; avriti,
‘a surrounding’; samvriti, ‘covering’; sukriti, ‘virtue’; akriti, ‘form’; hata,
‘killed’; samyata, ‘restrained’; vivrita, ‘opened’; samyata, ‘gone’; samprati,
‘now’; pratipatti, ‘fame.’
PEATISAEAYETASAPATAKASU DAH. (8).
In these words, d is substituted for t : as,
Padisaro, vediso, padaa.
Pratisara, ‘a servant ’; 1 2 3 vetasa, ‘the ratan’; pataka, ‘a flag.’
YASATIBHAEATAYOB HAH. (9.)
In vasati, a dwelling,’ and bharata, ‘a proper name,’ h is substituted
for t : as, Vasahi, bliaraho .
1 This word ought not to belong to this Sutra, as it is intended only for
words with a single t ; but the Sanksh. Sara, in its corresponding rule, adds
nishpatti and sampatti besides: [see Lassen, App., p. 42.]
3 As this change of prati to padi is universal [see Lassen, p. 204], it is
singular that this is the only instance given by Vararuehi in a Sutra. The
SECT. II.]
OF VARARUCHI.
117
GARB HITE HAH. (10.)
In garbhita, ‘ pregnant,’ n is substituted for t : as, Gabbhimm.
AIR AY ATE CHA. (11.)
In airavata, ‘indra’s elephant,’ n is substituted for t : as, Erdvano.
PR ADIPT AK AD AM B ADOH AHE SHE DO LAH. (12.)
In these words l is substituted for d : as,
Palittam, kalamvo, dohalo. 1
Pradipta, ‘ kindled’; kadamba, ‘the tree so called’; dohada, ‘ the longing
of a pregnant woman.’
GADGADE RAH. (13.)
In gadgada, inarticulate utterance,’ r is substituted for d : as, Gaggaro.
SAHKHYAYAM CHA. (14.)
In words expressive of number, r is substituted for d : as,
Earaha, varaha, teraha.
Ekadasa, Eleven’; dwadasa, ‘ twelve’; trayodasa, * thirteen.’ But the d
must be a * single’ letter [by Sutra 1], or the rule will not apply; thus we
find Chauddaha for Chaturdasa, * fourteen,’ (by iii. 3, and iii. 50).
PO YAH. (15.)
V is substituted for a single non-initial p : as,
Savo, savaho, ulavo, uvasaggo.
Sapa, ‘ a curse’; sapatha, *a curse’; ulapa, *a kind of grass’; upasarga,
* a portent.’
Erom the use of pray as , generally,’) [implied from Sutra 2] we infer
that this rule applies wherever there is no elision.
APIDE MAH. (16.)
< *
In the words apida, pressing,’ m is substituted for p : as, Amelo [cf. i., 19].
HTTARIYAHIYAYORJJO YA. (17).
In the word uttariya , and in words ending with the affix an'iya, jj is
substituted for y : as,
Httariam or uttarijjam, ramaniam or ramanijjam, bharaniam or bharanijjam.
Uttariya, ‘an outer garment’; ramaniya, ‘pleasing’; bharaniya, ‘to be
cherished.’
Prak. Sanj. reads in the Sut. prati for pratisara. Hema-chandra has a
Sutra, Pratyddau dah.
1 Hema-chandra has also dohalo .
118
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
[sect. II.
CHHAYAYAM HAH. (18).
In the word chhdyd, * a shadow/ h is substituted for y : as, Chhahd.
KABAYHHE BO MAH. (19).
In the word kabandha , ‘ a headless trunk,’ m is substituted lor b : as,
Kamandho. 1
TO HAH. (20).
D is substituted for a non-initial t : as,
Nado, vidavo.
Nata, ‘ an actor’; vitapa, ‘a branch.’
S AT AS AKATAKAITABHESHTJ HHAH. (21.)
In the words said, ‘an ascetic’s clotted hair,’ sakata, ‘a cart,’ kaitabha ,
‘ a demon,’ dh is substituted for 1 1 as, Sadha, saadho, Icedhavo [cf. Sutra 29].
SPHATIKE LAH. (22.)
In sphatika, ‘ crystal,’ l is substituted for t : as, Phaliho [_cf. Sut. 4].
HASYA CHA. (23).
L is substituted for a single non-initial d : as,
Halimam, talaam, yalahi.
Hadima, £ a pomegranate’; tadaga, £ a pond’; vadabhi, £ an awning, etc.,
on a palace.’ Since prayas, ( generally,’) is implied from Sutra 2, we infer
that such forms as the following are also admissible: as, dddimam, vadisam,
• •
nivido.
THO HHAH. (24.)
Dh is substituted for a single non-initial th : as,
Madham, jadharam, kadhoram.
Matha, 2 ‘a college’; jathara, ‘ the belly’; kathora, ‘hard.’
ANKOTHE LLAH. (25).
In ankotha, ‘a plant,’ ll is substituted for th : as, Ankollo.
PHO BHAH. (26.)
Dh is substituted for a single non-iuitial ph ; as,
Sibha, sebhalia, sabhari, sabhalam.
' . i i
Sipha, a fibrous root’; sephalika, a flower;’
sapbala, ‘fruitful.’
sapharf,
<
a small fish
>.
>
1 Kabandha also means ‘ water,’ and in this sense kamandha is said to be
a Sanskrit word [see Wilson’s Lexicon.]
2 Masc. in Sans.
SECT. II.]
OF VARARUCHI.
119
KHAGHATHADHABHAM HAH. (27.)
II is substituted for the five consonants Jch, gh, th, dh, bh, when single
and non-initial; Jch, muham, rnehahi; gh, meho, jahanam; th, gaha, savaho;
dh, raha, vahiro; bh, saha, rasaho.
Mukha, ‘ the face’; mekhala, ‘a girdle’; megha, ‘a cloud’; jaghana, ‘the
loins’; gatha, ‘a song’; sapatha, ‘a curse’: Radha, ‘Krishna’s favourite’;
badhira, ‘deaf’; sabha, ‘a house’; rasabha, ‘an ass.’
Pray ah being still implied [see Sut. 23], we also find such forms, as
Pakhalo, palanghano, adhi'ro, adhano, uvaladdhabhavo.
Prakhala, ‘very base’; pralanghana, ‘transgressing’; adhfra, ‘unsteady’;
adhana, ‘poor’; upalabdhabhava, ‘having the meaning understood.’
PRATHAMASITHILAHISHADHESHIJ DHAH. (28.)
In the words prathama, ‘first’; sithila, ‘loose’; nishadha, ‘the name of a
country,’ dh is substituted for th and dh ; as Padhamo, sidhilo, nisadho.
KAITABHE YAH. (29.)
In the word kaitabha, the name of a demon,’ v is substituted for bh, as
Kedhavo.
HARIDRABIHAM EO LAH. (30.)
In haridrd, etc., I is substituted for r: as
Haladda, chalano, muhalo, jahitthilo, somalo, 1 kalunam, angulf, ingalo,
chilado, phaliha, phaliho.
Haridra, ‘turmeric’; charana, ‘the foot’; mukhara, ‘noisy’; Yudhish-
thira, ‘ name of a king’; sukumara, ‘soft’; karuna, ‘ mournful;’ anguri, ‘a
finger’; angara, ‘charcoal’; kirata, ‘ a barbarian’; parikha, ‘a moat’; parigha,
‘ a club,’ etc.
ADER YO JAH. (31.)
The adhikdra of non-initial ’ which was implied from Sutra 1 ends here.
J is substituted for an initial y : as,
Jatthi, jaso, jakkho.
Yashti, ‘liquorice’; 2 yasas, ‘ glory’ [cf iv. 18]; yaksha, ‘a demigod.’
1 This form is thus explained by the Prakrita Sanj.:— Sulcumdra ; the
first u becomes o by i. 20; the k is elided by ii. 2; and the o and u now
meeting in Sandhi, the last is dropped by iv. 1 ; we have thus somara and
by the present rule somala. W’s Yar. Lect. suumalo was accidentally
omitted in notes to p. 14; all the other MSS. have somalo.
2 As yashti is also the subject of the next Sutra, either there are two
120
[sect. ii.
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
YASHTYAM LAH. (82.)
In the word yashti, ‘ a stick/ l is substituted for y : as Latth'i.
KIRATE CHAH. (33.)
In hirdta, a barbarian/ ch is substituted for the initial h: as, Childdo.
KUBJE KHAH. (34.)
In hubja, ‘ hump-backed/ lch is substituted for the initial letter : Khujjo.
DOLADAYDADASAYESHU I)AH. (35.)
• • • ' *
In the words dola, ‘a litter’; danda, 4 a staff’; daft ana, *a tooth/ d is
substituted for the initial letter: as, j Void, dando, dasano.
P ARTTSH AP A RIGHAP ARIKH ASU PH AH. (36.)
In the words parusha, harsh’; parigha, a club’; parihhd, a moat/ ph
is substituted for the initial letter : as, Pharuso, phaliho, phalihd.
PAYASE ’PI. (37.)
Also in the word panasa, the bread-fruit tree/ ph is substituted for p :
as, Phanaso.
VISIYYAAI BHAII. (38.)
In the word visini, an assemblage of lotus-flowers,’ bli is substituted for
the initial letter, as bhisini. Erom the express mention of the feminine
[ visini ] we infer that the rule does not hold in the neuter visam, ‘ the
lotus-fibre.’
MAYMATHE YAH. (39.)
In the word manmatha , love/ v is substituted for the initial letter: as,
Vammaho.
LAHALE YAH. (40.)
In the word Idhala, 1 n is substituted for the initial letter : as Ndhalo.
• •
SH ATS A V AK AS APT AP A RY AY AM CHIIAH. (41.)
forms in use or there ought to be some difference of meaning in the two
words. The meaning in the text seems justified by a Yar. Lcct. madhuyasJiti
in two MSS,; but Cf. Lass. Inst. p. 100. Lassen (p. 195 ) illustrates latthi by
the modern lath, ‘a column’: as, Eiroze Lath.
1 Two MSS. read lohala, *made of iron/ for the unknown word Idhala ;
but as Hema-chandra [see note 4, Sut. 38], recognises the word, as well as
three, if not four of the MSS. of Yararuchi, it is probably correct. Herna-
chandra’s rule is also found in the Prak. Sanj.
SECT. IT.]
OF VARAKUCHT.
121
In these words chh is substituted for the initial letter: as,
Chhatthf, clihammuho, chhavao, chhattavanno.
Shashthi, 4 the sixth day of the lunar fortnight’; shanmukha, 4 Kartikeya’;
savaka, ‘a young animal’; saptaparna, 4 a kind of tree.’
HO HAH SAEYATEA. (42.)
4 Initial’ is no longer implied here. N is substituted for a single n every¬
where : as,
Hai, kanaam, vaanam, manuso.
Uadi, 4 a river’; kanaka, 4 gold’; vachana, Speech 4 ; manusha, 4 human.’
SASHOH SAH. (43.)
S is everywhere substituted for s and sh : as,
*
($) saddo, nisa, ankuso; ( sh ) sandho, vasaho, kasaam.
Sabda, a sound’; nisa, night’; ankusa, an elephant’s hook’; shandha,
a eunuch;’ vrishabha, 4 a bull’; kashaya, 4 brown.’
D ASAD I SHE HAH. (44.)
In the words dam, etc., h is substituted for s : as,
Daha, earaha, varaha, teraha. 1
Dasa, 4 ten’; ekadasa, 4 eleven’; dwadasa, 4 twelve’; trayodasa, 4 tliirteen.’
\_cf. ii. 14, for the change of d to r. ]
SAHJHAYAM YA. (45.)
When the word is a name, the substitution of h for s in dasa is optional: as,
Dahamuho, dasamuho; dahavalo, dasavalo; daharaho, dasaraho.
Dasamukha, 4 a name of Eavana’; dasabala, * a Bauddha teacher’; Dasa-
ratha, 4 the name of a king.’
DIYASE SASYA. (46.)
In the word divasa, a day,’ h is substituted 2 for s: as, Diaho.
SHUSH AY AM HHAH. (47.)
In the word snushd, 4 a daughter-in-law,’ nh is substituted for sh, as
Sonha.
1 It may be worth while to trace the steps by which trayodasa becomes
teraha. By i. 5, we have treyodasa ; by ii. 2, iii. 3, teodasa ; by ii. 14, 44,
teoraha ; and, finally, as the e and o meet in Sandhi, by iv. 1, the o is elided.
2 Two MSS. make this rule optional (by continuing va from S. 45), and
add diaso, which is the usual form in the plays.
K
i c)cy
X <V^v
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
III.
SECTION THE THIRD.
UPABILOPAH KAGADATADAPASHASAM. (1.)
The eight consonants h, g, d , t, d, p, sh, s, are elided when standing
first in a conjunct; and the remaining letter, if it is not at the beginning of
the word, is doubled by Sutras 50, 51 of this Section. 1 Thus,
[X*.] Bhattam, sitthao.
Bhakta, * devoted’; sikthaka, ‘bee’s-wax’ (neut.)
[y. ] muddho, siniddho.
Mugdha, ‘foolish’; snigdha, ‘kind.’
[fl Khaggo, sajjo.
Khadga, ‘a sword; shadja, ‘the fourth note of the gamut.’
[£. ] TJppalam, uppao.
Utpala, ‘ a blue lotus’; utpata, ‘a portent.’
[<?.] Muggo, muggaro.
Mudga, ‘ a kidney-bean’; mudgara, ‘ a hammer.’
\_p.~] sutto, pajjatto.
Supta, ‘asleep’; paryapta, ‘adequate.’
[sA. ] gotthi, nitthuro,
Goshthi, ‘an assembly’; nishthura, ‘harsh.’
[s. ] Khaliam, neho.
Skhalita, ‘stumbling’; sneha, ‘love.’
ADHD MAYAYAM. (2.)
The consonants m, n , and y are elided, when standing last in a conjunct,
1 Sutras 50, 51 are constantly required in carrying out the following
Sutras. Yararuchi’s plan with regard to conjuncts is, first to enjoin the
elision of certain letters (Sutras 1—8), then in other cases (Sutras 9—49),
to enjoin the substitution of a single letter for the conjunct; but whether the
change be thus an elision or a substitution, in either case, by Sutras 50 and 51
this letter is doubled , unless it be r or h (Sutra 54), or at the beginning of a word.
SECT. III.]
OF VAIIARUCHI.
1 23
and the remaining letter is doubled, as before, by Sutras 50, 51. Thus,
\_m .] Sossam, rassi, juggam, vaggf.
^ C C i 0 0 C
Sushma, light’; rasmi, a ray’; yugma, a pair’; vagmin, eloquent.’
[».] Yaggo.
Yagna, ‘ naked.’
[y.] Sommo, joggo.
Saumya, ‘mild’; yogya ‘fit.’
SARYATRA LAYARAM. (3.)
The letters l 7 v, 1 r are always elided, whether they stand first or last in a
conjunct, and the remaining letter is doubled as before. Thus,
\_l. ] Ukka, vakkalam, vikkavo.
Ulka, ‘a torch’; valkala, ‘bark’; viklava, ‘agitated.’
[<?.] Loddhao, pikkam \_ef. i. 3].
Lubdhaka, ‘a hunter’; pakwa, ‘cooked.’
[/*.] Akko, sakko.
Arka, ‘ the sun ’; sakra, ‘ Indra.’
DRE RO YA. (4.)
In the conjunct dr, the elision of r is optional: thus we have
Doho or droho, chando or chandro, ruddo or rudro.
Droha, ‘mischief’; chandra, ‘the moon’; Rudra, ‘ a demigod.’
SARYAJYA-TELYESHU YAH. (5.)
In words like sarvajna, the n is elided : as,
Savvajjo, ingiajjo.
Sarvajna, ‘omniscient’; ingitajna, ‘knowing signs.’
This elision of n takes place in all words which are similarly derived
from jna, ‘to know.’ [This explains the tidy a of the Sutra.]
SMASRUSH AS A Y A YORADEH. (6.)
The first letter of sma'sru, ‘ the beard,’ and smasdna, ‘ a cemetery,’ is
elided: as, Massu, masanam.
MADHYAHYE HASYA. (7.)
In the word madhydhna, ‘ noon,’ h is elided: as, Majjhanm.
HYAHLAHMESHTT YALAMAM STHITIRERDDIIAYAM. (8.)
In the conjuncts, hi, hi, hm, the letters n, l, m are respectively written
before the h : as,
1 Or b, as there is no distinction between the two letters in Prakrit.
124
THE PRAKEITAPRAKASA
[sect. 111.
Puvvanho, avaranho; kalharam, alhado; vamhano.
Purvahna, ‘ fore-noon’; aparahna, ‘ afternoon’; kahlara, ‘the white water-
lily’; ahlada, ‘ joy brahmana, ' a brahman.’
YIJKTASYA. (9.)
This is an adhikdra [ cf. i. 1 ] and is implied in the succeeding Sutras to
the end of the Section. Our rules are henceforth to be understood as
supplying a substitute for a conjunct. Atthi for ustlii (by Sutra 11) will
serve as an instance. The use of the word ‘conjunct’ shews that these
substitutions are not intended to apply to final letters, since the second
member of a final conjunct is rejected by Pan. viii. 2, 23.
SHTASYA THATI. (10.)
Th is substituted for the conjunct sht : as,
Latthf, ditthi.
Yashti, ‘ a stick’; drishti, ‘sight.’
ASTHINI. (11).
In the word asthi, ‘a bone,’ th is substituted for the conjunct: as, Atthi.
STASYA THAH. (12).
Th is substituted for st. This Sutra revokes Sutra 1, which would enjoin
the elision of the s, as being the first member of the conjunct st.
Hattho, samattho, thuf, thavao, kotthuho.
Hasta, ‘the hand’; samasta, ‘all’; stuti, ‘praise’; stavaka, ‘a nosegay’;
kaustubha, ‘Krishna’s jewel.’
YA STAMBE. (13).
In the word stamba, ‘a shrub,’ th is not substituted for st: as, Tarnbo [i.e.
the s is elided by iii. 1],
STAMBHE KHAH. (14).
In the word stambha, ‘ a post,’ Jch is substituted for st: as, Khambho.
STHA Y A YAII ABE. (15).
In the word sthanu , ‘firm,’ Jch is substituted for the conjunct, except
/
when it signifies Siva: as, Khanu. Why do we make this exception ?
When it signifies Siva, it is thanu (by S. 12).
SPHOTAKE. (16).
In the word sjohotalca , ‘a boil,’ Jch is substituted for the conjunct: as,
Khodao.
SECT. III.]
OF VARARUCHI.
125
EYASAYYAEHIMAYYUSBU JAH. (17.)
J is substituted for the conjunct ry, and also for the conjunct in the
two words sayya and abhimanyu : as,
Kajjam, sejja, ahimajju.
Karya, ‘ to be done’; sayya, ‘a bed’; abhimanyu, ‘ Arjuna’s son.’
TTJEYADHAIEYASAEYDAEYASCHAEYAPAEYAYTESinj EAH.
( 18 ).
In these words r is substituted for the onjunct ry, (and as by S. 54, r
and h are never doubled, S. 50 is here inoperative.)
Turam, dhiram [cf. i. 39], sunderam, achchheram, perantam.
Turya, ‘a musical instrument’; dhairya, ‘ firmness’; saundarya, ‘beauty’;
ascharya, ‘wonderful’; paryanta, ‘limit.’
SUEYE YA. (19).
In the word surya, ‘the sun,’ r is optionally substituted for ry : as, Suro,
or else by S, 17, sujjo.
CHAUEYASAMESHU EIAM. (20).
In words like chaurya, riam is substituted for ry ; as,
Choriam, soriam, viriam.
Chaurya, ‘theft’; saurya, ‘heroism’; vfrya, ‘heroism.’
Erom the use of the phrase ‘like’ in the Sutra, this is a class, which can
only be determined by authority \_cf. i. 2].
PAEYY4STAPAEYAYASATJKTJMAEYESHU LAH. (21).
In the words paryasta, fallen ’\parydna, a saddl q k , saukumarya, ‘youth-
fulness,’ l is substituted for ry : as, Pallattkam, palldnam, soamallam . 1
ETASYA TAIL (22).
T is substituted for rt : as,
Kevattao, nattao, nattai.
Kaivartaka, ‘a fisherman’; nartaka, ‘an actor’; nartaki, ‘ an actress.’
P ATT A YE. (23).
T is also substituted for the conjunct in pattana, ‘ a town :’ as Pattanam.
• • • •
1 We may here retrace the steps by which saulcumaryam becomes soa¬
mallam. Ey i. 22, 41, it becomes soamaryam (the Jc being elided by ii. 2);
the present Sutra, with iii. 50, gives ll for ry, and the a is shortened before
the conjunct by i. 10 [sec note, p. 109].
126
[sect. Ill.
THE PitAKRITAPRAKASA
NA DHURTADISHU. (24).
T is not substituted for rt in the class dhurta, etc. Thus we have
Dhutto, kittf, vattamanam, vatta, avatto, samvattao, nivattao, vattia,
atto, kattarf, muttif, (r being elided in these words by iii. 3).
Dhurta, *a gamester’; kfrti, 4 fame’; vartamana, * existing’; varta,
4 tidings’; avarta, 4 a whirlpool’; samvartaka, 4 JBaladeva’; nivartaka, * re¬
turning’; vartika, 4 a wick’; arta, gained’; kartarf, 4 a knife’; murti, 4 form.’
GARTE DAK (25).
In the word garta, 4 a hole,’ d is substituted for rt : as, Gaddo.
GARDABHASAMMARDAVITARDIVICHHARDISHU KDASYA (26).
In the words garddbha, 4 smell’; sammarda , trampling’; vitardi, ‘a
covered terrace’; vichhardi , 4 a fine building’ (?), d is substituted for rd : as,
Gaddaho, scimmaddo , viaddi , vichhaddi.
TYATHYADYAM CHACHHAJAK (27).
Ch, chh, j, are respectively substituted for tg, thy , dg ; as,
\_ty.~] Yichcham, pachchakkham.
Yitya, Constant’; pratyaksha, perceptible.’
[_thy.~] Rachchha, michehha, pachchham.
Rathya, 4 a road’; mithya, falsely’; pathya, proper.’
[%•] Vijja, vejjam.
Yidya, 4 knowledge ’; vaidya, medical.’
DHYAHYOR JHAH. (28).
Jli is substituted for dhy and hy : as,
[ dhg.~\ Majjham, ajjhao.
Madhya, 4 middle’; adhyaya, * a chapter.’
[%•] Yajjhao, gujjhao.
Yahyaka, * external’; guhyaka, 4 secret.’
SHKASKAKSHAM KHAH. (29).
Jih is substituted for shh, sh, and Jcsh : as,
[sAA] Mukkham, pokkharo.
Mushka, ‘ aheap,’ (masc.); pushkara, 4 a lake.’
[sA] Khando, khandho.
Skanda, 4 Skanda’; skandha, 4 the shoulder.’
\_Jcsh.~\ Khado, jakkho.
Kshata, 4 wounded’; yaksha, 4 a demigod.’
SECT. III.]
OF vararucht.
m
AKSHYADISHIT CHHAH. (30).
In akshi, etc., chh is substituted for ksh : as,
Achchhi, lachchhi, chbunno, ehhiram, chhuddho, ucbchhitto, sarichchham,
uchchhu, uchchha, chharam, richchho, machchhia, chhuam, chhuram, chhet-
tam, vachchho, dachchho, kuchchhi.
Akshi, ‘ the eye’; lakshmi, ‘ beauty’; kshunna, ‘ bruised’; kshfra, 41 milk;
kshubdha, 4 agitated’; utkshipta, ‘ tossed up’; sadriksha, 4 like’; iksbu, ‘the
caue’ \_cf. i. 15]; uksban, ‘ an ox’; kshara, 4 black salt’; riksha, ‘a bear’;
makshika, ‘a fly’; kshuta, Sneezing’; kshura, 4 a razor’; kshetra, ‘a field’;
yakshas, ‘the breast’; daksba, ‘ Daksha’; kukshi, ‘ the belly,’ etc.
KSHAMAYRIKSHAKSHAKESHIJ YA. (31).
In the words kshama, ‘ patience’; vriksha, ‘ a tree’; kshana, ‘ a moment,
a feast,’ chh is optionally substituted for Icsh : as, Chhama or Tehama ; vachchho
or rukkho ; chhanam or khanam. It should be observed 1 that the chh is used
in vrilcsha when a is substituted for ri [ cf. i. 32 ], and in kshana when it
signifies ‘ a feast.’
SHMAPAKSHMAYISMAYESHU MHAH. (32).
Mh is substituted for shm, and also for the conjunct in the two words
pakshman and vismaya : thus,
Gimho, umha, pamho, vimhao.
Grfshma, 4 the hot season] ushman, 4 the hot season’; pakshman, ‘an
eyelash’; vismaya, ‘surprise.’-
HYASYASHNAKSHXASYAM KHAH. (33).
hfli is substituted for hn, sn, shn, kshn, and sn : thus,
• • •
[ hn.] Yanhi, janhii.
Yahni, ‘fire’; jahnu, ‘ Jahnu.’
[ snh] Khanam, panhudam.
Snana, ‘bathing’; prasnuta, ‘flowing.’
\_shn. J Yinhii, kanho.
Yishnu, ‘Yishnu’; krishna, ‘Krishna’ [iii. 61].
\_kshn.~\ Sanham, tinham.
/ * * (
Slakshna, small’; tikshna, sharp.’
1 Lassen (Gymnosoph. p. 21) explains ish in this sense as ‘desideratum
est, optatum, i.e., a doctrinae hujus conditoribus constitutum.’ It is especially
used to introduce an additional rule of a Commentator.
128
Til E PRAKRITAFRAKASA
SECT. III.
\_sn.~] Panho, sinho.
Prasna, ‘ a question’; sisna, ‘ penis.’
CEIEYE KDEAE. (34).
In the word chihna, ‘ a mark/ ndh is substituted for the conjunct: as,
Chindham.
SEP ASYA PEAS. (35).
Ph is substituted for slip : as,
Puppham, sappham, nipphao.
Pushpa, ‘ a flower’; sashpa, ‘ young grass’; nishpaya, ‘ without water.’
SPASYA SARYATRA STEITASYA. (36).
Ph is substituted for sp, wherever it is found (that is, in the beginning
or end of a word): as,
Phanso [cf. iv. 15], phandanam.
Sparsa, ‘touch’; spandana, ‘ a throbbing.’
SI CEA. (37).
Si is also sometimes substituted for sp : as, Padisiddlu for pratisparddhin ,
* a rival’ [cf. i. 2].
VASEPE ASRTJYI IIAE. (38).
H is substituted for shp in the word vashpa, when it signifies, ‘ a tear ’ :
as Vaho. Why do we specify this signification ? When it signifies, ‘ hot
vapour,’ we must use vappho (in accordance with S. 35).
KARSEAPAEE (39.)
In the word Icarshapana, ‘ a certain weight/ h is substituted for the con¬
junct : as, Kdhdvano.
SCEATSAPSAM CEEAE. (40).
Chh is substituted for the conjuncts sch, ts, and ps : thus,
[sch.~] Pachchhimam, achchheram; [ts.[\ vachchho, vachchharo; [ps. ]
lichchha, juguchchha.
Paschima, ‘western’; ascharya, ‘wonderful’; vatsa, ‘a calf’; vatsara, ‘a
year’; lipsa, ‘desire’; jugupsa, ‘censure.’
YRISCEIKE ECEEAE. (41).
In the word vrischilca, ‘ a scorpion/ nchh is substituted for sch : as,
Vinchhuo ( cf . i. .15).
EOTSUKOTSAYAYOE (42).
In the words utsulca, ‘regretting/ and utsava, ‘a feast/ the substitution
SECT. III.]
OF VARARUCHI.
129
of chh for ts (enjoined by S. 40) is forbidden : we have therefore Ussuo and
ussavo (by iii. 1, 50).
HMO MAH. (43.)
M is substituted for nm, although (by S. 2 ) m is properly elided when
it is the second member of a conjunct: as,
Jammo, vammaho.
Jamnan, * birth’; manmatha, love.’ [cf. ii. 39.]
MH A JH AP AH CH AS ATP AHCH AD ASE SHTJ HAH. (44.)
JSf is substituted for mn and jn, and for the conjunct in the words pan-
chasat and panchadasa : as,
Pajjunno, janno, vinnanam, pannasa, pannaraho.
Pradyumna, 'Kama’; yajna, 'a sacrifice’; vijnana, 'knowledge’; pan-
chasat, 'fifty’; panchadasa, fifteenth.’
TALAVBIHTE HTA1I. (45.)
In the word talavrinta , 'a fan,’ nt is substituted for the conjunct: as,
Tdlaventaam.
BHIHDIPALE HD AH. (46.)
In the word bhindipala, ' a dart,’ nd is substituted for the conjunct: as,
Bhindivalo.
VIHWALE BHAHAU VA. (47.)
In the word vilnvala, 'agitated,’ bh and h are optionally substituted for
the conjunct: as, Vebbhalo , vihalo [for the e of the first form see i. 12]-
ATMANI PAH. (48.)
In the word atrnan , ' self,’ p is substituted for the conjunct: as, Appd.
KM ASYA. (49.)
P is substituted for the conjunct hm : as,
Buppam, ruppim.
Bukma, 'gold’; Pukminf, 'Lakshim.’
The Commentator remarks that this and the preceding Sutra (which
might otherwise have been united) are separated, because the latter of the
two (S. 49) is absolute, while the former (S. 48) is only partially applicable,
as dtman admits of another form [ see v. 45 ] besides appd.
SESHADESAYOB WITWAM AHADAIT. (50.)
Wherever after performing an elision or substitution enjoined by a rule,
a single consonant comes to represent a conjunct, this letter is always
doubled, except in the beginning of a word.
130
THE PR A K RIT A P R A Iv A S A
[SECT. IT!
As examples of such, after elision:
Bhuttam, maggo.
Bhukta, 4 eaten’ [the Ic elided by iii. 1]; marga, a path’ [the r elided
by iii. 3].
As examples of such, after substitution :
Latthi, ditthi, hattho.
Yashti, ‘a stick’; drishti, 4 sight’ [iii. 10]; hasta, ‘ the hand’ [iii. 12].
Why do we except those which are at the beginning of a word ? Com¬
pare such cases as,
Ehaliarn, khambho, thavao.
Skhalita, * fallen’ [the s elided by iii. 1]; stambha, 4 a post’ [iii. 14]
stavaka, 4 a nosegay’ [iii. 12].
YABGESHU YUJAII PTJBYAII. (51.)
"When the doubling enjoined by the previous Sutra takes place, whether in
regard to the first or the second member of the conjunct, wherever the single
representative is an aspirate (that is, the second or fourth letter of its class,) 1
it is to be doubled by prefixing its own non-aspirate: in the case of the other
letters, of course they themselves are their own duplicates.
Examples by elision:
Vakkhanam, aggho, muchchha, nijjharo, luddho, nibbharo.
Yyakhyana, 4 explanation’; argha, 4 oblation’; murchha, ‘fainting’; nir-
jhara, 4 a cascade’; lubdha, 4 greedy’; nirbhara, 4 excessive.’
Examples by substitution:
Ditthi, latthi, vachchho, vipphariso, nittharo, jakkho, lachchhi, atthi,
puppham.
Drishti, 4 sight’; yashti, 4 a stick’; vakshas, 4 the breast’ \cf. iv. 18];
visparsa, 4 touch’; nistara, 4 crossing’; yaksha, 4 a demigod’; lakshmi,
4 beauty’; asthi, 4 a bone’; pushpa, 4 a flower.’
YIDADISIIE. (52.)
In the words nida, etc., the medial letter is doubled, although it is not a
conjunct: as,
Yeddam [for the e see i. 19], sottam, pemmam, vahittam, ujjuo, jannao,
jovvanam.
1 The Prakrita Sarvaswa explains yuj, 4 Yug iti samanam dwitiyachatur-
th ad in am sanjna.’
SECT. III.]
OF VAIIARUCHI.
131
Yfda, 'a nest’; srota,
nounced’; riju, ‘straight’;
4 a river’; preman, ‘ affection’; vyahrita, ‘ pro-
Jan aka, ‘the name of a king’; yanvana, ‘youth.’
AMR AT AMR AY OE BAH. (53.)
In the words antra, ‘the mango,’ and tdmra, ‘copper,’ b is employed in
the doubling enjoined by Sutra 50 : as Ambam , tambam. 1
YA ItAHOH. (54.)
R and Ji are never doubled : as,
Dlnram, turam [iii. 18], jfha [i. 17, iii. 3], vaho [iii. 38].
Dhairya, ‘firmness’; turya, ‘a musical instrument’; jihwa, ‘a tongue’;
vashpa, ‘ a tear.’
AHO JYASYA. (55.)
'When jn is preceded by the preposition d, its substitute n (by Sutra 44)
f f * * * £ {{
is not doubled: as, Ana, anattf, for Ajna, ajnapti, an order.’ AYhy, when
preceded by d” ? In Sannd for Sanjnd, ‘a name,’ the rule does not hold. 2
[HA YINDTJPAItE.] (56.)
A letter, which immediately follows anuswara, is not doubled : as, San-
kanto, sanjha, for Sankranta, ‘gone’; sandhya, ‘twilight.’ The h and jh
would otherwise have been doubled by Sutras 3, 28, 50.
SAMASE YA. (57.)
In a compound word, the doubling is optional, whether in the case of an
elision or substitution: as,
Yaiggamo or nafgamo; kusumappaaro or kusumapaaro ; devatthui or de-
vathuf; analakkhambho or analakhambo.
Yadfgrama, ‘a village by a river’; kusumaprakara, ‘ a nosegay’; devastuti,
1 Eor this difficult Sutra, cf. the Yar. Lect. Four of the MSS. of Yara-
ruchi read avvam , etc.; two seem to read as above, which is clearly supported
by Hema-ch., the Prak. Sarvaswa, Prak. Sanjfv., and Sanksh. Sara. If it be
correct, I suppose the successive changes are amam [by iii. 3], then [by iii.
50] ammarn , but here S. 53 interposes, and we have ambam or amvam. The
only other way of explaining it seems to be by reading amvvam, i.e., the v is
substituted for the r and then doubled.
2 This instance is not a good one, if the next Sut. be genuine, which
forbids the doubling of the n after the anusw. of sam. Probably this led
to the var. lect., vinnatti — vijnapti.
1 32
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
[sect. III.
Upraise of the gods’; alanastambha, ‘ an elephant’s post’ [for this, cf. iii. 14,
and iv. 29].
SEYADISHU CHA. (58.)
In the words seva, etc., the doubling of the medial letter is also optional: as,
Sevva, seva; ekkam, earn; nakkho, naho; devvam, daivam; asivvam,
asivam; tellokkam, teloam; nihitto, nihio; tunhikko, tunhio; kanniaro,
kaniaro; diggham, diham ; rattf, raf; dukkhio, dnhio; asso, aso 1 ; issaro, isaro;
vissaso, visaso; nissaso, nisaso ; rassi, rasf; mitto, mio; pusso, puso.
Seva, ‘ service’; eka, ‘one’; nakha, ‘a nail’; daiva, * fate’; asiva, Un¬
lucky’; trailokya, ‘ the three worlds’; nihita, Entrusted’; tushm'ka, ‘ silent’;
karnikara, ‘ the tree so called’; dfrgha, ‘long’; ratri, ‘the night’; duhkhita,
‘wretched’; aswa, ‘a horse’; l'swara, ‘God’; viswasa, confidence’; niswasa,
‘a sigh’; rasmi, ‘a ray’; mitra, ‘friendly’; pushya, ‘the eighth lunar
asterism.’
The alternative can be considered in two ways; in words like seva,
there would have been no occasion for the doubling, except for this rule;
in words like dir glia, the doubling is already enjoined by other rules [e.g. iii.
3, and iii. 50], and therefore the option granted by this is required to
dispense with their operation. 2
VIPRAK Alt SHAH. (59.)
This being an adhikdra will be implied in the following Sutras. Yuk-
tasya still continues to be implied from S. 9. We are therefore to under¬
stand that the subject of the succeeding Sutras to the end of the section
wilt be the separation [ viprakarsha ] of conjuncts.
KLISHTASLISHTARATHAKRIYASARHGESHU TATSWARAYAT
PUR VASYA. (60.)
In the words Idishta, etc., the conjunct consonants are divided; and the
first consonant, which has no vowel of its own, suffers vocalisation, and
becomes sounded with the original vowel : 3 as,
1 I should prefer aso [cf. i. 2], though the MSS. and the Pr. Sanj. have aso.
2 Eor this rule, cf. Lass., pp. 275—7, who would explain some of the
instances by the force of the accent.
3 At the same time the new syllable so created is, of course, subject to
previous rules, and thus the first consonant is sometimes elided by ii. 2.
Thus wc have Ratna , ratana, and then (by ii. 2) raana\ and in S. 65, padma,
paduma , and finally paima.
SECT. III.]
OF VARARUCHI.
133
Kilittham, silittham, raanam, kiria, sarango (or in its crude form Yaranga’.)
Klishta, -distressed’; slishta, ‘ embraced’; ratna, ‘a gem’; kriya, ‘ an
action’; sarnga, ‘horny.’
KR1SHNE YA. (61.)
In the word hrishna, the separation of the conjunct shi is optional: in
the case of separation, the vowel must be supplied as before; here, how¬
ever, the option is definitely restricted; for the separation is imperative,
when hrishna means ‘ black,’ as hasano ; but is forbidden when it means
“ Vishnu,” as hanho [iii. 33].
SHARHAGARHESHIT. (62.)
In the following words the conjunct is divided, and the first consonant
suffers vocalisation as before; but the inserted vowel is i, and not the original
vowel.
Sirf, bin, kinto, kilanto, kileso, milanam, sivino, phariso, hariso, ariho,
gariho.
Sri, ‘ beauty’; hrf, * shame’; kn'ta, ‘bought’; klanta, ‘wearied’; klesa,
‘distress’; mlana, ‘withered’; swapna, ‘sleep’; sparsa, ‘touch’; harsha, ‘joy’;
arha, ‘worthy’; garha, ‘acensurer.’
AH KSHMASLAGHAYOII. (63.)
In the words hshma, the earth,’ and sldgJid, praise,’ the conjunct is
divided as before, but the first consonant is sounded with a : as, Khamd ,
saldha.
SHEHE YA. (64.)
In the word sneha, ‘love,’ the division of the conjunct is optional, but
when it does take place, the first consonant is sounded with a, as in the
preceding Sutra : as, Saneho, neho. [Eor the second form, cf. iii. i.]
UH PAEMATANVISAMESHU. (65.)
In padma, a lotus,’ and words like tanv'i (fem. of tanu, ‘slender,’) such as
laghv'i (fem. of laghu , ‘light’) etc., the conjunct is divided, and the first
consonant is sounded with u instead of the original vowel: as, Paiimam ,
tanui, lahui.
JYAYAM IT. (66.)
In jydj ‘a bowstring,’ the conjunct is divided, and the first consonant is
sounded with i, instead of the original vowel: as, Jid.
134
THE F It AK RI TAP R A lv AS A
IV.
SECTION THE EOUETII.
SAYDHAY ACHAM AJLOPAYISESHA BAHITLAM. (1.)
Ach is here of course the pratydhdra, or technical term for all the
vowels. When vowels are in Sandhi, or in a state of immediate conjunction,
various kinds of vowels and elisions arise.
1. Yarious kinds of vowels: as,
Jaimaadam, jaiinaadam; nai'ssotto, nafsotto; vahumuham, vahumuham;
kannaiiram, kannauram ; siroveami, siraveana; piapiam, piapiam; sfasiam,
siasiam; savomuo, savomuo; saroruham, sararuham.
Yamunatata, ‘the bank of the Jumna’; nadisrotas, ‘the river-stream’;
vadhumukha, ‘ having a woman’s face’; karnapura, ‘the mimosa sirisha’;
sirovedana, ‘a pain in the head’; pitapita, ‘drunk and not drunk’; sitasita,
‘ white and black’; saroruha, ‘ a lotus.’
2. Yarious kinds of elision : as,
Itaaiilam, raulam ; tuhaddham, tuhaaddham; mahaddham, mahaaddham;
pavadanam, paavadanam [viii. 51]; kumbharo, kumbhaaro; pavanuddhaam,
pavanoddhaam.
Bajakula, ‘a royal family’; tavarddha, ‘half of thee’; mamarddha,
‘half of me’; padapatana, ‘prostration at anj^ one’s feet’; kumbhakara, ‘a
potter’; pavanoddhata, ‘ tossed by the wind.’
When a conjunct consonant follows, it is always the first of the two
meeting vowels, which is elided (when there is any elision at all, which is
not always required). From the use of hahula , or ‘variously,’ in the
Sutra, we conclude that these changes are in some cases absolute, in others
they admit of different forms; hence, when other forms are met with, they
are still to be considered as here provided for in the lakshana or Sutra. 1
1 The Comm, of this Sutra is obscure, and its examples corrupt, and the
MSS. afford little aid; but the Prak. Sanjiv. by its use of the Sutra in its
SECT. IV.]
OF VARARTJCHI.
135
TJDUMBAEE DOIl LOPAH (2.)
In udumbara, * copper,’ du is elided : as, JJmbaram.
KALAYASE YASYA YA. (15.)
In kaldyasa, iron,’ ya is optionally elided : as, Kaldsam, Jcdldasam.
BHAJAYE JASYA. (4.)
In bJidjana, ‘ a vessel,’ ja is optionally elided : as, Bhdnam, bJidanam.
YAYAD ADISHU YASYA. (5.)
In the words yavat, etc., v is optionally elided : as,
Ja, java; ta, tava ; parao, paravao; anuttanta, anuvattanta; ji'am,
jiviam; earn, evvam; ea, evva; kualaam, kuvalaam.
Yavat, ‘how far’; tavat, ‘so far’; paravata, ‘a dove’; anuvartamana,
‘following’; jfvita, ‘life’; evam, eva, ‘so’; kuvalaya,’ ‘ a bine lotus,’ etc.
AYTYASYA HALAH. (6.)
The ‘ option ’ of the preceding sutras ends here. A final consonant is
always elided : as,
Jaso [cf. iv. 18, 19], naham, saro, kammo, java, tava.
A'asas, ‘glory; nahhas, ‘the sky’; saras, ‘a lake’; karman, ‘a deed’;
yavat, ‘how far’; tavat, ‘ so far.’
Comm, on other Sutras throws some light upon its meaning. Here we con¬
tinually find it quoted to explain any apparent irregularity in the Sandhi of
a Prakrit example, which is not provided for by any definite rule. Eor
instance, let us take the word teraha = Sans, trayodasa, and trace the suc¬
cessive changes by which Yararuchi brings out the Prakrit form. By i. 5,
we have treyoda'sa, by ii. 14, 44, treyoraha , and by ii. 2, iii. 3, teoraha; but
we have no rule for the elision of the o, except iv. 1, which is adopted by
the Prak. Sanj. Bhamaha, in his first list of examples, appears to extend
the rule beyond its legitimate application, and includes under it the various
instances where the finals of feminine nouns in d, z, and u are optionally
shortened in composition [cf. Lass., p. 290], as in vahumuham or vahumuham,
etc.; or where neuter words in as admit, when compounded, of two forms in
o or a, as siro- or sira-veand. (The first three pairs of ex. are given also in
the Comm, of Hema-ch., Sut. 3, dzrghahraswau mithovrittau.) The forms
in line 7 of the Sans, text, pidpiam, etc., are very doubtful, as well as their
Sans, interpretation. Savomuo is certainly corrupt, and neither of the Sans,
explanations given in the MSS. is satisfactory. That in DE seems the best,
136
[sect. IV.
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
STRIYAM AT. (7.)
*
A is substituted for the final consonant of a feminine word : as,
Saria, padivaa, vaa.
Sarit, ‘a river’; pratipad, ‘the first day of a lunar fortnight’; vach,
* speech.’
RO RA. (8.)
Ra is substituted for a final r, in a feminine word : as,
Dhura, gira.
Dhur, £ the carriage-pole’; gir, ‘speech.’
NA YIDYTJTI. (9.)
A is not substituted for the final letter of vidyut, lightning’ (by S. 7),
but although a feminine noun ending in a consonant, it follows Sutra 6, and
becomes Vijju.
SARADO DAH. (10.)
Da is substituted for the final d of sarad, autumn,’ and thus we find
Sarado [for its gender, cf. S. 18].
DIKPRAYRISHOS SAIL (11.)
Similarly sa is substituted for the final sibilant of di's, ‘ a region,’ and prd-
vrish, ‘the rainy season’: as, Disa, pduso (for the change in gender, cf
S. 18 ; di's continues feminine as before x ).
if we correct it to sarvamrita , but the two Prak. forms still need some
correction. In lines 9, 10, if we make the corrections pd- paavadanam, and
add the form pavanoddhaam in 1. 10, we may adopt the reading of BDEW
as given in the text, and their Sans, explanations as given in the var. lect.
The lines 1—3 on p. 31 are not without difficulty. Lassen has given 1. 1
as a new Sutra, but I prefer taking it as an additional observation of the
Comment, to explain such a form as pavanuddhaam. Pavanoddhaam would
have been equally correct, but not pavanaddhaam ; as the elision before a
conjunct (where it takes place at all), must be that of the former vowel.
Similarly in the Bhalti-Kavya, vol. ii. p. 114, on the word ravottunga , the
Schol. remarks that although by the rule ‘ lopo ’ chah ,’ which enjoins the
elision of the preceding vowel, when a second follows, it should be ravut-
tunga , still by the influence of the hahula , the elision is not absolute \_Atra
yadyapi pralcrite < lopo ’cha ’ ityanena achi pare acho lope ravuttungeti syat ,
tathdpi hahulddhikdrdn nasti lopah ].
1 ‘ Id tantum vult regula, non dicendum esse dikd et pravritad Lass. Inst.
SECT. IV.]
OF VARARUCHT.
137
MO YINDUH. (12.)
Anuswara is substituted for a final m : as, Achchham, vachchham, bhaddam,
aggim, etc. 1 2
ACHI MASCHA. (l3.)
When a vowel immediately follows, m may optionally remain; or, in
other words, Sandhi in this case is allowed : as, Phalam avdharai or phalam-
avaharai , ‘ he gathers fruit.’
NAM)R HALI. (14.)
Anuswara is substituted for the dental and palatal nasals when a con¬
sonant follows, and so also is m 3 (as we infer from the preceding Sut.): as,
Anso or amso, kanso or kamso, vanchamam or vamchamam, vinjho or
vimjho.
Ansa, * a part’; kansa, ‘ the name of a king’; vanchanijm, ‘to be tricked’;
vindhya, ‘ the Vindhya mountains’ ( vinjha — vindhya, by iii. 28).
YAKRAJDISHIT. (15.)
In vaJcra, etc. Anuswara is inserted as an augment: as,
Yankam, tansam, hanso, ansu, 3 mansu, gunthi, mantham, manansinf,
• • • •
dansanam, phanso, vanno, padinsudam, anso, ahimunko.
Yakra, brooked’; tryasra, ‘a triangle’; hraswa, ‘ short’; asru, * a tear’;
smasru, f a beard’; grishti, 4 a cow with one calf’; masta, ‘the head’; rnanas-
wim, * a wise woman’; darsana, ‘sight’; sparsa, ‘touch’; varna, ‘a colour’;
pratisruta, ‘promised’; aswa, ‘ahorse’; abhimukta, ‘released,’ etc.
MAYSADISHU YA. (16.)
In such words as mansa, etc., the use of Anuswara is optional : as,
1 As this and the two following rules merely refer to Prakrit orthography,
they are of no importance in an English translation, and can hardly be
understood, except by those who understand the original text.
2 There can be little doubt that this addition of Bhamaha’s is wrong;
the Prak. Sanj. (though corrupt) is silent about it; Hema-ehandra’s cor¬
responding Siit. [i. 24], is ‘ Nananano vyanjane. JVd na na na ityetesham
sthdne, vyanjane pare, amiswaro bhavati.’ In the ex. ansa and kansa, Bha-
maha appears to consider the nasal as a dental, in consequence of the dental
sibilant which follows it.
A
3 Eor this masculine form of asm , cf. Williams’ Sak. p. 165, where
*
Boehtlingk’s correction [Sak. p. 217] is adopted.
T
138
THE PEAK RI TAPIIAKA8A
IV.
Mansam, masam; kaham, kaha; nunam, mina; taliiin, tahi (vi. 7);
asum, asu. 1
Mansa, * flesh ’; katham, ‘how’; nunam, * certainly’; tasmin, ‘in that’;
asu, fem. loc. plural of idarn, ‘ this.’
There is no definite class of words, such as mansa, etc.; hut wherever,
through fear of violating the metre, Anuswara is sometimes used and some¬
times omitted, the Commentator wishes such a word to he considered as
included in the class referred to.
YAYI T AD Y A EG AY T AH. (17.)
When any consonant immediately follows, except h and the sibilants (i.e.,
the pratyahdra yay ), Anuswara may optionally become the nasal of the class
to which the letter belongs: as, Sanded, sanJcJio, anJco, angam, sanchara'i, san-
dho, etc.; or we may use the option of the rule, and say panham, vindu ,
sanhd, etc. ‘ Why do we use th e pratyahdra yay in the Sutra’: That we may
exclude h and the sibilants, as in anso, etc., where we can only use Anuswara.
Y A S AYT APE AVEI TSAR AD AH PXJYSI. (18.)
Youns ending in n and s, and the two words prdvrish and sarad, are to
be used in the masculine gender (the final n and s being elided by Sut. 6): as,
Kammo, jammo, vammo.
Karman, ‘a deed’; janman, 4 birth’; varman, ‘ armour/
Jaso, tamo, saro.
Yasas, ‘ glory’; tamas, ‘ darkness’; saras, ‘ a lake.’
Pauso, sarado.
Pravrish, * the rainy season’ [ef. iv. 11]; sarad, ‘ the autumn’ \jf. iv. 10].
YA SIEOYABHASI. (19.)
Sir as, the head,’ and nahhas, the sky’ (although both end in s), must
not be used in the masculine (but in the neuter, as in Sanskrit), and thus
we have Siram and nadiam.
PEISHTHAKSHIPEASYAH STEIYAM YA. (20.)
The three words prishtha, ‘ the back ’; ahshi, ‘ the eye ’; and prasna, ‘ a
/
1 Asum dsu are conjectural. This Sutra is considered also to apply to the
anuswara, which is optionally added to the terminations of the instr. and
loc. plural, and neuter nom. plur. etc.: as, raehchhehim or -hi, vaeliclihesu
or -sum, vandi or -dim.
SECT. IV.]
OF VaRARUCITI.
139
question,’ may be optionally used in the feminine gender : as, Puttln or
puttham, aohcJilii or achohham, panhd or panho .
ODAYAPAYOIP. (21.)
0 is optionally substituted for the prepositions ava and apa, when in
composition : as,
Ohaso or avahaso, osariam or avasariam.
Avahasa, ‘ laughter’; apasarita, ‘gone out."'
TALTWAYOB DATTAYAU. (22.)
Da and ttana are respectively substituted for the affixes tal and twa
(which are used in Sanskrit to form abstract nouns): as,
Pfnada, pinattanam, mudhada, mudhattanam.
Pfnata, pmatwa, ‘ fatness’; mudhata, mudhatwa, ‘folly.’
KTWA MAH. 1 (23.)
a
Una is substituted for ktiva (the affix of the indeclinable past participle) :
as,
Gheuna, souna, kauna, dauna.
Grihitwa, e having seized’; srutwa, * having heard’; kritwa, * having
made’; datwa, < having given.’
TBIYA IE AH SILE. (24.)
Ira is substituted for the affix trinf signifying sila, ‘ habits,’ or ‘ dis¬
position ’: as,
Bhamiro, hasiro.
Bhramanasfla or bhramitri, ‘ fond of wandering’; hasanasfla or hasitri,
‘fond of laughing.’
ALYILLOLLALAYAYTEYTA MATUPAH. (25.)
a
Alu, ilia, ulla, ala, vanta? inta are substituted for matup, the affix sig¬
nifying * possession.’
a
Isalu, niddalu; viarilla, malailla; viarulla; dhanala, saddala; clhana-
vanta, jovanavanta; rosainta , 4 panainta.
Irshavat, ‘ envious’; nidravat, 1 sleepy;’ vikaravat, ‘ changed’; mala vat,
1 The Pr. Sanj. gives -this Sut. as Jctwa tunah, and similarly the Sanksh.
Sara, 180 [Lass. App. p. 47] ; of. Lass. Inst. p. 367, and infra, viii. 55.
2 Cf. Pan. iii. 2. 134 and 135.
A
2 Written vanda in Sak., Williams, p. 38, 1 ; of. Boehtlingk, note p. 166
Cf. Lass. pp. 289, 290.
4
140 THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA [SECT. IV.
Slaving a garland’; dhanavat, ‘wea'thy’; sabdavat, ‘ sounding’; yauva-
navat, * youthful’; roshavat, ‘ angry’; pranavat, ‘alive.’
These various substitutes for matup must not be used indscriminately,
but with a due regard to the forms observed in classical authors.
[Sometimes 1 we find a instead of matup, and sometimes manta : as ha-
numa or hanumanta for hanumat, ‘ the monkey-chief’; others use the sub¬
stitutes ilia and ulla in the sense of the affixes technically called saishikdh
(of. Pan. iv. 2, 92), as purilla for paurastya (a derivative with the affix
tyak, Pan. iv. 2, 98), ‘produced in the east’; appulla for atmiya (a derivative
with the affix chlia, Pan. iv. 2, 114) ‘belonging to one’s self.’
Instead of the pronouns him, etc., in the sense of ‘measure’ (Pan. v., 2,
39), we should use Iceddaha, etc. : as,
Keddaha, kettia; jeddaha, jettia; teddaha, tettia; eddaha, ettia.
Kiyat, ‘how much’; yavat (explained by Panini as ‘yat parimanam
asya ’) ‘ as much as’; tavat, ‘ so much’; etavat, ‘thus much.’
Others add huttam as a substitute for the affix Jcritwas, (Pan. v. 4, 17),
but the present Commentator wishes this to be considered as a provincialism :
as, saahutfam for satakritwas, ‘ a hundred times’; sahassalmttam for sahasra-
kritwas, ‘ a thousand times.’
The affix ka is also frequently added to a word without changing its
meaning (the k being of course elided by ii. 2): as, Bhamaro or bhamarao,
for bhramara, ‘ a bee.’ 2 ]
YIDYUTPITABHYAM LAH. (26.)
The affix la is used at the end of the words vidyut, ‘ lightning, ’ and
pita, ‘ yellow,’ without altering their meaning : as, Vijjii or vijjuli; piam or
pialam.
[VBIKDE YO BAH.] (27.)
In the word vrinda, ‘ a heap,’ r is optionally used after the v, without
altering its meaning : as, Vrandam or vandam.
IIABEYYAM BAYOII STHITIPABIYBITTIH. (28.)
In the word karenu, ‘ a female elephant,’ the r and n are transposed: as,
1 Eor this passage, see App. B.
2 See App. B. I have added the ex. (omitted in Yararuchi) from the
Prak. Sanj. The word jdtau appears to be corrupt; of. the corresponding
rules in Hema-ch. and the Prak. Sanj.
SECT. IV.]
OF VARARUCHI.
141
Jianeru. From the express mention of the feminine, we infer that the rule
does not hold in the masculine : as, Icarenu, ‘ a male elephant/
ALANE LANOH. (29.)
In the word alana, ‘ an elephant’s post,’ the l and n are transposed (of
course, as before, without their vowels): as Andlalehambo for dlanastambha
[cf. iii. 57].
YRIHASPATAU VAHOIt BHAAU. (30.)
In the word vrihaspati, ‘ the regent of the planet Jupiter,’ bh and a are
respectively substituted for v and h : as, JBhaapphai [cf. iii. 36].
MARINE LINOR ILAU YA. (31.)
In the word malina, ‘ dirty,’ i and l are optionally substituted for
li and n respectively : as, mailam or malinam.
GRIHE GHARO ’PATAU. (32.)
GJiara is used in the sense of griha, ‘ a house,’ except when it is followed
by pati, ( a master’: as gharam , * a house.’ ‘ Why do we make this ex¬
ception’? Because we have gahavai for grihapati, ‘a householder.’
DADHADAYO BAHULAM. (33.)
The class of words called clddlid, etc., are irregularly used instead of the
class danshtra, etc. : as,
Dadha, danshtra, ‘a tooth’; enhim, idanim, ‘now’; dhfa 1 or dhuda,
duhita, ‘a daughter’; chatuliam, chaturya, ‘dexterity’; manduro, manduka,
‘a frog’; ghare nihitam [iv. 32], grihe nihitam, ‘deposited in the house’;
kandotto, 2 utpala, ‘a blue lotus’; gold, godavari, ‘the river Godavari’;
nidalam, 3 lalata, ‘the forehead’; bhumaa, bhu, ‘the earth’; veluriam,
vaidurya, ‘ lapis lazuli’; avahovasam, ubhayaparswa, ‘both sides’; maindo or
maando, 4 chuta, ‘ a mango tree.’
The word adi in the Sutra is used in the sense of ‘similitude’ or
‘ class ’; therefore all words of common speech may be considered as com¬
prehended under this rule, which are used by convention in different
provinces. 5
1 Dliida is a Sans, word, see Lex.; cf. also Hindiist. Lib J dhiya.
2 Cf. Sans. Icandota.
3 Cf. Sans, nitala.
4 Cf. Sans, malcanda.
5 As might be expected, the MSS. differ very much in several of the
Prakrit ex. of this Sutra: cf. var. lect.
142
THE P R AKRITA.P R AKASA
SECTION TIIE FIFTH.
ON DECLENSION*
AT A OT SOLI. (1.)
0 is substituted for su, the affix of the nom. sing., after a word ending in
a : as,
Yachchho, vasaho, puriso.
Vrikshas, ‘a tree’; vrishabhas, *a bull’; purushas, ‘a man.’ [The a is
considered to be elided by iv. I. 1 ]
JASSASOR LOPAH. (2.)
Jas and sas, the affixes of the nom. and ace. plural are elided after words
ending in a : as vachchha sohanti for vriJcshdh sobkante, ‘ The trees are beautiful.’
Here the vowel a is lengthened by Sutra 11, and then the affix jas is elided.
Vachclihe niachchhalia for vrikshdn niyachchhata , 2 ‘ Bring the trees.’ Here
the final a becomes e by Sut. 12, and then the affix sas is elided.
ATO ’MAH. 3 (3.)
The a of am, the affix of the accusative singular, is elided after words
ending in a : as, Vachchham pekkhai , for vriJcsham prehshate, 1 He sees a tree.’
For the anuswara, see iv. 12.
TAMOR NAH. (4.)
After words ending in a, na is substituted for td and dm, the affixes of
the instrumental singular, and the genitive plural: as, VachcliJiena, vach-
chhanaj for vrikshena, by a tree, ’ vriksfidndm, i of trees.’ The e of the
former word is caused by Sut. 12; the long vowel of the latter by Sut. 11.
1 So the Priik. Sanj. ; cf. the addition in D noticed in the Var. Lect.
2 Such is the interpr. of the MSS.; but cf. viii. 69, infra.
3 The sign S is accidentally omitted in the Sutra as printed in the text.
' 4 The MSS. write vachchJiana, vachchlidnam indifferently, the final anus¬
wara in these and similar forms being considered optional by iv. 16.
SECT. V.]
OF VARARUCHI.
o
EHISO HIM. (5)
Him is substituted for bills, the affix of the instrumental plural, after
words ending in a: as Vachchhehim for vrikshais, 1 by trees.’ For the in¬
sertion of e, see Suit. 12.
YASEB ADODTJHAYAH. (6.)
After words ending in a, d do du hi are severally substituted for nasi, the
affix of the ablative sing.: as, Vachchha, vachchhado , vachchhadu, vachchhdhi.
For the long vowel of the penultimate in the last three forms, see Sut. 11 ;
and for the first form, see Sut. 13.
BHYASO HIYTO SIJYTO. (7.)
After words ending in a, Junto and sunto are substituted for Iliyas, the
affix of the ablative plural: as, Vachchhdhinto, vachchhdsunto. For the long
vowel of the antepenult., the commentary refers us to the cha, or * and,’ in
Sut. 12. 1
SSO YASAH. (8.)
After words ending in a, ssa is substituted for nas, the affix of the
genitive sing. : as, Vachchhassa.
YEB EMMI. (9.)
After words ending in a, e and mmi are substituted for hi, the affix of
the locative sing. : as, Yachchhe, vachchha mmi. For the elision of the final
a in vachchhe, we are referred to Sut. 13.
SUPAH SUH. (10.)
After words ending in a, su is substituted for sup, the affix of the loc.
plural: as, Vachchhesu. For the e, we are referred to Sut. 12.
JASSASYASYAMSU HIEGHAH. (11.)
For the final a of these nouns, d is substituted before the affixes of the
nom. and acc. plural, the ablative singular and the genitive plural: as,
1 Bhamaha does not recognise the forms with e, as vachchhehinto, vach-
chhesunto ; but it seems plain from this very artifice of the cha, that such
forms are correct; cf. infra, notes v. 12; vi. 62; and Lass., p. 310. Hema-
ehandra expressly gives a Sut., ‘ Bhyasi vd ’; with comm. 1 Bhyasddese pare
ato diryho vd bhavati, vachchdhinto, vachchhehinto ,’ etc., and so does the Prak.
Sarvaswa. For the difference of meaning between the two forms, see Lass,
p. 310, ‘ Junto caussam significat, a qua procedit effectus; sunto indicat unde
proficiscaris.’
144
[sect. V.
TH E V 11A K RITA P K A K A SA
Vachclihd sohanti, ‘ the trees are beautiful ’ [for the elision of jus, see Sut.
2] ; 1 vachchhado, vachchhddu, vachchhdhi for vrikshdt [see Sut. 6] ; vachchhana
for vriJcshandm [see Sut. 4].
ECHA SUPYAYIYASOH. (12.)
E is substituted for this final a, before all the case-affixes except those of
the loc. and gen. sing, ini and nas) ; 1 2 3 and from the cha in the rule we con¬
clude that the long vowel also may be used; as vachchhe pelckhaha, i behold
the trees ’ [for the elision of sas, see Sut. 2]; vachchhena for v riles hena [see
Sut. 4] ; vachchhehim [Slit. 5] ; vachchhesu [Sut. 10]. But the long vowel
also may be used : as, vachchhdhinto, vachchhdsunto [Sut. 7].
4 Why do we except the affixes of the loc. and gen. sing ’? Because in
vacJichhammi [Suit. 9] and vachchhassa [Sut. 8], the short vowel is retained.
KWACHID YASIYYOR LOPAII. (13.)
When nasi and ni, the affixes of the abl. and loc. sing., follow, in certain
cases the final a of the noun is elided: as, Vachchha [Sut. 6], vachchhe [Sut.
9], (that is, in this form of the abl. we elide the final a of vachchha to avoid
the necessity of lengthening it by Sut. 11 ; and similarly in this form of the
loc. we elide it to avoid such a word as vachchhae. In vachchhado, etc., and
vachchhammi we see the opposite ; cf. also vi. 61.)
IDUTOH SASO YO. (14.)
In nouns ending in i and u, no is substituted for sas, the affix of the acc.
plural: as, Aggino, vauno, for agnin, ‘fires/ vayun, Svinds.’
YASO VA. (15.)
In nouns ending in i and u, no is optionally substituted for has, the affix
of the gen. sing.: as, Aggino or aggissa, vauno or vaussa (for ssa, see Sut. 8).
JASASCHA 0 YUTWAM. (16.)
In these nouns, o is substituted for jas, the affix of the nom. plur.; and
i and u* for the final i and u. From the use of the cha in the Sutra we
infer that no is also used as well as o : as, Aggio, vduo, or aggino, vduno.
1 The Comm, gives no ex. of the acc. plural. It should be vachchha.
The usual form is vachchhe; cf. S. 12.
2 All the grammarians agree that sup is here the pratgdhdra of all the
case-affixes (formed from su, the first aff., and the p of sup, the last), and the
Prak. Sanj. and Prak. Sarvaswa refer hither vachchhehinio, etc.; cf. S. 7, note.
3 The va in the Comm., which is added in the margin in some MSS. to
SECT. V.]
OF YARARUCHI.
145
TA NA. (17.)
In these nouns nd is substituted for td, the affix of the instrumental sing. :
as, Aggind, vauna.
SUBHISSTJPSU DIRGHAH. (18.)
When su, bids, and sup, the affixes of the nom. sing., instr. plnr., and
loc. plur. follow, the final i or u of these nouns is exchanged for its long
vowel: as, Aggi, vdu ; aggihim, vauhim ; aggisu, vausu.
STRIYAM SASA UDOTAIJ. (19.)
In feminine nouns, u and o are substituted for sas, the affix of the ace.
plural: as,
Malau, malao ; naiu, naio; vahuu, vahuo.
Malah, ‘garlands’; nadih, ‘rivers’; vadhuh, ‘wives.’
[JASO YA.] (20.)
In feminine nouns, u and o are optionally substituted for jas, the affix of
the nom. plural; in the alternative these follow the rule of nouns in a : as
Mdldo, mdldu, and also maid (by S. 2). 1
AMI HRASWAH. (21.)
In feminine nouns the final long vowel is shortened before am, the affix
of the acc. sing : as,
Malam, na'irn, vahum.
TANASYIYAM IDEDADATAH. (22.)
In feminine nouns, i, e, a, a are substituted for td, has, ni, the affixes of
the instr., gen.^and loc. sing.: as,
Nan, naie, nafa, naia, any one of which four forms represents ‘by,’ ‘of’
or ‘in’ ‘a river.’
NATO ’DATAIT. (23.)
In the case of feminine nouns ending in d, two of the above substitu¬
tions a and d do not take place; that is, the legitimate influence of the
preceding Sutra is here prohibited : as,
Malai, malae (not malaa, makia) ‘by,’ ‘of,’ or ‘in’ ‘a garland.’
the Sut., must only mean here vyavashtliitavibliashd \_cf. iii. 61], i.e., when
o is used, i and u must precede it, but not in the case of no; cf. Lass. p. 307.
*
1 For maid, cf. Lass., p. 307, note 2, and Boehtl. Sak., p. 150, on
daamdnd (Williams’ ed. p. 6; cf. also p. 165, 3).
TJ
11(3
[sect. V.
THE PRAKRIT A PRAKASA
ADITAU BAHULAM. (24.)
In feminine words ending in d, d and i arc irregularly interchanged as
the final letter: as,
vana’s sister’; chhaya, * shade ’ [ii. 18]. 1
HA HAPUHSAKE. (25.)
The final vowel is not lengthened in the nominative sing, of a neuter
noun (in nouns ending in a there is no rule which would enjoin it; but those
ending in i and u, but for this prohibition, might have come within the
range of Sut. 18): as,
Dahim, mahum, ha vim.
Dadhi, 1 curdled milk ’; madhu, 1 honey 7 ; havis, * ghee:’
IJJASSASOB DIBGASCHA. (26.)
In neuter nouns, i is substituted for jas and sas, the affixes of the nom.
and ace. plural, and the preceding vowel is lengthened: as,
Yanai, dahfi, mahui. 2
HAMAHTBAHE SAY OTWADIBGHAYIHD AYAII. (27.)
When the nom. sing, is used in the sense of the vocative (this being
considered by Sanskrit grammarians as only a modification of the nominative,)
neither the o of Sut. 1, nor the long vowel of Sut. 18, nor the anuswara of
Sut. 30, are allowed : as,
He vachchha, ‘0 tree’; he aggi, ‘0 fire’; he vau, ‘0 wind’; he vana, 3 *
‘ 0 forest’; he dahi, * 0 curdled milk’; he mahu, ‘ 0 honey.’
STBIYAM ATA ET. (28.)
In the vocative of feminine nouns, e is substituted for d before the affix
1 The Prak. Sanjfv. explains this Sut. thus: 4 Stnlinge vartamdndt pra-
tipadikdd d i ityetau pratyelcam bhavatah ; Jcai kri (hay a, kasydh, kasydm vdi) ;
jdi, ju (yaya , yasyah , yasydm vdj ; etc. The MS. D has these ex. as
genitives (cf. Yar. Lect.) added to those given by the other MSS. Eor led,
etc., cf. vi. 6. This explanation is much more probable than Bhamaha’s.
2 The more common forms are vanaim, etc., the nasal being added
by iv. 16.
3
Cf. Pan., vi. 1, 69, and Bochtl. Comm.
SECT. V.]
OF VARARUCHI.
147
su : as, He male, ‘ 0 garland.’ The Commentator adds that su is elided by
iv. 6, which enjoins the elision of every final consonant (the indicatory
vowel of su is dropped by Panini, i. 3, 2, and therefore the s of males comes
under iv. C).
IDUTOR HRASWAH. (29.)
„ A final £ or % is shortened in the vocative : as,
He nai, 1 0 river’; he vahu, 1 0 wife.’
SOR VINDUR HAPUHSAKE. (30.)
In neuter nouns, anuswara is substituted for the affix of the nom. sing. : as,
Vanam, dahim, mahum.
RITA ARAH SXJPI. (31.)
In words ending in ri, dra is substituted for ri, before all case-affixes
(the pratydhdra sup ): as,
Bhattaro, ‘ a husband ’; bhattarena, 1 by a husband,’ etc.
MATUR AT. (32.)
* t
A is substituted for the ri of mdtri, a mother,’ and the word is then
declined like other feminines in a : as,
Maa, maam, maai, maae [Sut. 23].
HR JASSASTAHASSUPSH VA. (33.)
U is optionally substituted for a final ri, before the affixes of the nom.
and acc. plural, the instr. and gen. singular, and the loc. plural, (that is, in
these cases, words ending in ri become subject to the same rules as those
ending originally in u) : as,
Bhattuno [S. 14 and 16], bhattuna [S. 17], bhattuno [S. 15], and bhat-
tusu [S. 18].
The forms with dra substituted for ri [by S. 31] arc also used : as,
Bhattara, bhattare, bhattarena, etc.
PITRIBHRATRIJAMATRIHAM ARAH. (34.)
In the words pitri, *a father,’ bhratri, ‘a brother,’ jdmd.tri, Si son-in-
law,’ ara is substituted for ri, before the case-affixes ( dra is therefore for¬
bidden) : as,
Piaram, piarena; bhaaram, bhaarena; jamaaram, jamaarena.
ACHA SAH. (35.)
In these words (pitri, etc.) d is substituted for ri, before su, the affix of
148
THE PllAKRITAPllAKASA
V.
the nom. sing,
used : as,
Pia, piaro;
; and from the cha in the Sutra we infer that ara is also
bhaa, bhaaro; j amaa, j am aaro. 1
ATMANO ’PPAlSfO YA. (45.)
Append is optionally substituted for the word dtman, ‘self’: as,
Appano, appa. [For the latter form, see iii. 48].
BIUHMADYA ATMAVAT. (47.)
The words brahma, etc., arc properly declined like dtman : as,
Vamha, vamhano ; juva, juvano ; addha, addhano.
Brahman, ‘Brahma’; yuvan, ‘a youth’; adhwan, ‘a path.’ Other
similar instances are to be determined in conformity with the examples given. 2
1 The long list of Sutras on rdjan which are inserted here in three MSS.
are omitted in the translation, as there- can be little doubt that they formed
no part of the original text of Vararuchi. They arc found in the Sanksh.
Sara [cf. Lass. p. 315, note) and the Prak. Sanj., but their diffuse phraseology
is very different to Vararuchi’s usual style.
2 For some further rules on Declension : see vi. 60—64.
SECT. VI.]
OF VARARUCHI.
149
SECTION THE SIXTH.
ON PRONOUNS, ETC.
SARVADER JASA ETWAM. (1.)
Jas, the affix of the nom. plural, becomes e when it follows the class of
words called sarvadi : as,
Savve, je, te, ke, kadare.
Sarve, ‘all’; ye, ‘who’; te, ‘they’; ke, ‘who?’; katare, ‘which of two.’ 1
NEH SSIMMMITTHAII. (2.)
Ssirn, mmi, ttha are substituted for ni, the affix of the loc. sing., when
following a pronoun : as,
Savvassim, savvammi, savvattha; iarassim; iarammi, iarattha.
Sarvasmin, ‘ in all ’; itarasmin, ‘ in another.’ 2
IDAMETATKIMYATTADBHYASH TA INA YA. (3.)
Ind is optionally substituted' for td , the affix of the instr. sing., after
idam , ‘this’; etat, ‘this’; Icim, ‘what?’ yat, ‘what,’ tat, ‘that’: as,
Imina, edinii, kina, jina, tina; or, imena, edena, kena, jena, tcna.
AMA ESIM. (4.)
Esina is optionally substituted for dm, the affix of the gen. plur., after
the above words idam, etc. : as,
Iniesim or imiina; edesim or edana; kesim or kana; jesim or jana;
tesim or tana. 2
KIMYATTADRHYO NASA ASAH. (5.)
1 Vararuchi, in this short sketch of pronouns, coniines himself to their
peculiar inflexions, and for the most part assumes the rules of Sect. v.
a
2 Imassim [ of. Siit. 15] is used as loc. fern, in Sak. [Will. p. 36. 2].
3 Esim is used in the fern, as well as the masc.; of . Hema-ch.
150
[sect. VI.
THE TIIAKRITAPRAKASA
Asa is optionally substituted for has, the affix of the gen. sing., after the
pronouns him, yat, tat : as,
Kasa or kassa; jasa or jassa; tasa or tassa.
IDBHYAS SSA SE. (6.)
Ssa and se are substituted for nas, after the above pronouns, when they
are declined like nouns ending in i (i.e., from feminine roots of the form
hi, ji, ti ): as,
Kissa, kise, Ida, lde, Ida, kii, ‘of what woman?’; jissa, jfse, ji'a, jfe, jfa,
jfi, ‘of what woman’; tissa, ti'se, tfa, tie, tfa, tfi, ‘ of that woman.’ 1 [For
the other forms given, see v. 22.]
KEF HIM. (7.)
Him, is optionally substituted for ni (the affix of the loc. sing.) after
him, yat, tat: as,
Kahim, kassim, kammi, kattha [cf. v. 2] ; jahim, jassim, jammi, jattha;
tahim, tassim, tammi, tattha.
AIIE IA KALE. (8.)
• i
Instead of hi in the sense of time [cf. Pan., v. 3, 15], dhe and id are
optionally substituted after the above pronouns: as,
Kahe, jahe, tahe; kaia, jaia, taia; and also the forms (in vi. 7)
kahim, etc.
Kada, ^ffien’; yada, 1 since’; tada, 1 then.’
TTO DO HASEH. (9.)
Instead of nasi, the affix of the abl. sing., tto and do are substituted after
the above pronouns : as,
Katto, kado; jatto, jado; tatto, tado.
Kasmat, 1 from what?’; yasmat, 4 from which’; tasmat, 4 from that.’
TADA OSCIIA. (10.)
Instead of nasi, after the pronoun tat, o is optionally substituted: as,
to, as well as tatto and tado (the final t is dropped by iv. 6, and the a is
elided before o by iv. 1).
KASA SE. (11.)
The option allowed in the preceding Sutra still continues. Sc is op-
1 These refer to the feminine gen. sing., and correspond to the Sans.
!
hasydh, etc. See r Lass., p. 322, and the Sanksh. Sara quoted there. It is
singular that W adds striyam in the Sutra.
SECT. VI.]
OF VAltAHUGHI.
151
tionally substituted for tlio pronoun tat, together with nas, the affix of the
gen. sing.; in the alternative, it follows previous rules : as, Se, tdsa, and
tassa [vi. 5]. 1 2
AM A SIM. (12.)
Sim is optionally substituted for the pronoun tat , together with dm, the
affix of the gen. plur.: thus, instead of tesham and tdsdm , w r e have sim or
tana, and also (by vi. 4) tesim.
KIMAH KAH. (13.)
Ka is substituted for the pronoun him, when followed by the affixes of
declension: as, nom. sing., ho; nom. plur., he; instr. sing, hena; instr.
plur., hehim.
IDAMA IMAH. (14.)
Similarly ima is substituted for the pronoun idam : as, Imo, ime,
imena, imehim.
SSASSIMOR AD VA. (15).
A is optionally substituted for idam, * this,’ wdien followed by ssa and
ssim, the Prakrit affixes of the gen. and loc. sing. [v. 8; vi. 2] : as, Assa
or imassa, assim or imassim.
HER DENA HAH. (16.)
Ka is optionally substituted for hi, the loc. sing, affix, together with
the da in idam : as, Ilia. In the case of its not being so substituted we
have (by previous rules), assim, imassim, imammi.
HA TTHAH. (17.)
The form ttha is not used as a substitute for ni, when it follows idam,
and thus Sut. 2 is so far restricted from applying to this pronoun.
HAPUHSAKE SWAMOR IDAM IHAM IHAMO. (18.)
Instead of idam in the neuter gender, together with su and am, the
affixes of the nom. and ace. sing., we have the three forms, Idam, mam,
and inamod
1 Se is used in the three genders ; Hema-ch. joins Sutras 11, 12 in one as
follows : “Vedamtadetado hasambhyam sesimau.—Idam tad etad ityetesham
sthane hasambhyam saha yathasankhyam se sim ityadesau va bhavatah;”
w r ith examples; $e, asya, tasya, tasyah, etc.; sim, esham, tesham, tasam, etc.
2 Hema-ch. also gives inamo.
152
THE PRAKRITAPIJAKASA [SECT. VI.
ETADAS SAVOTWAM VA. (19.)
When the pronoun etad is followed by the nom. sing, affix su, the sub¬
stitution of o for su (which by v. 1 is universal) is only optional: as, Esa
or eso, for esJia, ‘ this.’
TTO YASEH. (20).
Instead of nasi, the affix of the abl. sing., when it follows etad, tto is
substituted, the ta being elided by Sut. 21 : as,
Etto. (We have also the regular forms edado, edadu, edahi.)
Etasmat, ‘from this.’
TTOTTHAYOS TALOPAH. (21.)
When the affixes tto [S. 20], and ttha [S. 2] follow, the ta of etad is
dropped: as,
Etto, ‘from this’; ettha, ‘in this’ (the final d having been dropped
by iv. 6].
TADETADOS SAS SAYANAPUYSAKE. (22.)
S is substituted for the t of tad and etad in the masc. and fem., before su,
the affix of the nom. sing. : as,
So puriso, ‘this man’; sa mahila, ‘this woman’; similarly esa [S. 19],
eso ; esa.
‘ Why do we specify su ?’ Because it does not hold in the nom. plur.,
ede, te, ; or the acc. sing, edam, tarn. ‘ Why do we exclude the neuter ?’
Because we say tam, edam ; for tad, etad in the neuter nom. sing.
ADASO DO MTTH. (23.)
Mu is substituted for the da of the pronoun adas, before the case-affixes
(the final s being already dropped by iv. 6), and the word is then declined
like a noun ending in u : as,
Amu puriso, ‘that man’; amii mahila, ‘that woman’; amiio purisa,
‘these men’; amuo mahihio, ‘these women’; amum vanam, ‘this forest’;
amuim vanaim, ‘ these forests.’
HASCHA SAIL (24.)
Ha also is substituted for the da of adas, before the affix of the nom.
sing.: as,
Aha puriso, aha mahila, aha vanam.
This ha does not admit o, d or anuswiira, and therefore remains the
same in the three genders.
\
SECT. VI.] OF VARARUCHT. 153
PAD ASYA. (25.)
This Sutra will exercise adhihara [ cf\ i. 1]. The various rules which we
shall go through in order, are to be understood as supplying substitutes for
a pada, or word ending with a case-affix; that is, they will not supply
substitutes for the case-affixes themselves, nor for a part of the base to
which these may be added, but they are to supply substitutes for the whole
word, base and affix together.
The adhihara of this Sutra will extend until a sab da is enjoined (or crude
form in contradistinction to a pada) which we shall certify, when it occurs.
YUSHMADAS TAM TTTMAM. (26.)
The affix su is repeated from S. 24. Tam and tumam are substituted for
the pada yushmad , ‘you/ when followed by su, the affix of the nom. sing. :
as, Tam, tumam, ( you/
TTTMCHAMI. (27.)
For the pada yushmad, when followed by am, the affix of the acc. sing.,
turn is optionally substituted; and, from the use of cha in the Sutra, we con¬
clude that tumam also may be used : as, Turn, tumam, 1 thee.’
TUJJHE TTJMHE JASI. (28.)
Eor the pada yushmad, followed by jas, the affix of the nom. plur.,
tujjhe and tumhe are substituted: as, Tujjhe, tumhe, ‘ ye.’
VOCHA SASI. (29.)
For the pada yushmad followed by sas, the affix of the acc. plur., vo is
substituted, and fro,m the cha of the Sutra we conclude that tujjhe and
tumhe may also be used: as, Vo, tujjhe, tumhe, ‘ you/
TAYYOS TAI TAE TUMAE TTTME. (30.)
For the pada yushmad followed by ta and ni, the affixes of the instr. and
loc. sing., tdi, tae, tumae and tume are substituted: as, Ta'i, tae, tumae, time,
‘ by thee/ or * in thee/
H ASI TUMOTUHATUJJHATUMHATUMMAH. (31.)
For the pada yushmad followed by nas, the affix of the gen. sing., the
the following are substituted : Tumo, tuha, tijjha, tumha, tumma, ‘ of thee/
AYI CHA TE DE. (32.)
For the pada yushmad, followed by an, 1 the affix of the instr. sing., and
1 This is the affix of the instr. sing, in the terminology of the eastern
( prdchya ) school of Hindu Grammarians : see Boehtl. Panini, Introd. p. xii.
x
L54
[sect. VI.
THE P It A K PIT A V RAKASA
also by nas, the affix of the gen. sing, (which we infer from the use of cha
in the Sutra), te and de are substituted: as, Te, de, *by thee,’ and ‘ of thee.’
TUMAI CHA. (33.)
For the pada yushmad followed by an, the affix of the instr. sing.,
tumai also is substituted : as, Tumai , * by thee.’
TUJJHEHIM TUMHEHIM TUMMEHIM BHISI. (34.)
For the pada yushnad followed by bhis, the affix of the instr. plur.,
these are substituted: tujjhehim, tumhehim, tummeliim, by you.’
HAS AH TATTO TAITTO TUMADO TOIA DU TUMAHX. (35.)
For the pada yushnad, followed by nasi, the affix of the abl. sing., tatto,
etc., are substituted : as, Tatto, ta'itto, tumddo, tumddu, tumdhi, ‘ from thee.’
TUMHAHIHTO TUMHASUNTO BHYASI. (36.)
For the pada yushmad followed by bhyas, the affix of the abl. plur.,
tumhdhinto and tumhasunto are substituted: as, Tumhdhinto , tumhasunto,
‘ from you.’
YO BHE TUJJHANAM TUMHANAM AMI. (37.)
For the pada yushmad followed by dm, the affix of the gen. plur., vo,
etc. are substituted ; as, Vo, blie, tujjhdnam, tumhdnam, 1 of you.’
HAH TOIAM MI. (38.)
For the pada yushnad followed by hi, the affix of the loc. sing., tumammi
is substituted : as, Tumammi, 1 in thee.’ By Sut. 30, we have also the four
forms, Tai, tae, tumae, tume.
TUJJHESU TUMHESU STJPI. (39.)
For the pada yushmad followed by sup, the affix of the loc. plur., tujjhesu
and tumhesu are substituted: as, Tujjhesu, tumhesu, ‘ in you.’
ASMADO HAMAITAMAHAAM SAU. (40.)
For the pada asmad, 1 1,’ followed by the affix su, ham, aham, ahaam are
substituted, as, Ham, aham, ahaam, * I. ’
AHAMMIB AMI CHA. (41.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix am, ahammi is substituted, and
from the cha of the. Sutra we infer that it may also be similarly substituted
for the nom. : as, Ahammi, ‘ I,’ or * me.’
MAM MAMAM. (42.)
>
Am is repeated from Sut. 41. For the pada asmad, followed by the affix
am, mam and mamam arc substituted: as, Mam, mamam, ‘ me.’
OF VA HAKUCHI.
155
SECT. VI.
AMHE JASSASOS. (43.)
For the pada asmad, followed by the affixes jas and sas, amhe is sub¬
stituted : as, Amhe, ‘ we,’ or ‘ us.’
AO SASI. (44.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix sas, no 1 is substituted: as,
No, ‘ us.’
AXI ME MAMAI. (45.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix an [cf. Sut. 32], me and mamai
arc substituted : as, Me, mamai, ‘ by me.’
XAF CHA MAI MAE. (46.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix hi, ma'i and mae are substituted
(and also when followed by the affix ah, as we infer from the use of cha in
the Sutra) : as, Mai, mae, < in me,’ or ‘ by me.’
AMHEHIM EH!SI. (47.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix Mis, amhehim is substituted : as,
Amhehim, ‘ by us.’
MATTO MAITTO MAM ADO MAMA 1)11 MAMAHI XASAU. (48.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix nasi, matto, etc. are substituted :
as, Matto, mditto, mamddo, mamadu, mamahi, ‘ from me.’
AMHAHIXTO AMHASTTXTO BHYASI. (49.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix My as, amhahinto and amha-
sunto are substituted : as, Amhahinto , amhasunto, ‘ from us. :
ME MAMA MAHA MAJJHA XASI. (50.)
For the pada asmad followed by the affix has, me, etc. are substituted:
as, Me, mama, maha, majjha, ‘of me.’
MAJJHA HO AMJIA AMHAXAM AMHE AMI. (51.)
For the pada asmad, followed by the affix dm, majjha, etc. arc substituted:
as, Majjha , 1 2 no, amha, amhdnam, amhe, ‘ of us.’
1 The MSS. [cf. Yar. Feet.] generally read no, but as they all have vo, in
S. 29, it is probably an error; at the same time it would be well for future
editors of the plays to mark whether ne occurs in the MSS. All the MSS.
of Vararuchi give no in thegen. plur. (if my emendation of vi. 51 be correct),
but it is singular that Ilema-ch. there gives both ne and no.
2 Cf. Yar. Lect. Ilcma-chandra’s Sut. is, “ Xe no majjha amha amham
156
[sect. VI.
THE rRAKRITATR AKASA
MAMAMMI YATJ. (52.)
Por the pada asmacl followed by the affix ni, mamammi is substituted: as,
Mamammi, ‘ in me.’ Prom Sut. 46 we have also the forms, ma'i, mae.
AMHESU STJPI. (53.)
Por the pada asmad followed by the affix sup, amhesu is substituted : as,
Amhesu, ‘ in us.’
DWEE DO. (54.)
The adhikara of pada ends here [cf. S. 25]. Sup must he repeated from
the last Sut., bnt in the sense of the pratyahara [see v. 12, note], and not
as merely confined to the loc. plur.
Por the word dwi, "two,’ do is substituted before the case-affixes: as,
Dohim, ‘ by two ’; dosu, ‘ in two.’
TEES TIH. (55.)
Por the word tri, three,’ before the case-affixes, ti is substituted (and the
word is then declined like nouns ending in i) : as, Tihim, ‘by three’; tisu
‘ in three.’ 1
TIMTI JASSASBHYAM. (56.)
Por the word tri, together with the case-affixes jas and sas f tinni is sub¬
stituted : as, Tinni dgada, ‘ three are come’; tinni pehlcha , < behold three.’
DWEE ETJVE DOYI YA. (57.)
Por the word dwi, together with the case-affixes jas and sas, duve and doni
are substituted: as, Duve, doni, ‘two’; we have also the option of using
the form do [S. 54].
CHATUEAS CHATTAEO CHATTAEI. (58.)
Por the word chatur, together with the affixes jas and sas, chattaro and
ckattari are substituted: as, Chatta/o chattdri purisa, ‘four men’; chattaro
chattari pelchha, ‘behold four.’
ESHAM AMO YHAM. (59)
Instead of dm, as the gen. plur. affix of these words dwi, tri, chatur, we
have the form nham : as, Donham, ‘of two’; tinham, ‘of three’; chatunham?
‘of four.’
amhe amho amhana mamana mahana majjhana amdT Amha occurs in Dr.
Trithen’s ed. of the Mahaviracharitra, p. 28, 12.
1 Cf. Yar. Lect. The % seems absolutely required hv v. 18. and vi. 60.
2 Or rather, chaunham, the reading of one MS.
SECT. VI.]
OF VARARUCHI.
157
SESIIO ’D ANT AY AT. (60.)
The rest of the rules for declension are the same as those for words ending
in a. Thus the Sutra bliiso him , which has been given for words ending in a
[_cf. v. 5] applies equally to words ending in i and u ; thus we have aggihim ,
vduhim from aggi and vau; and similarly for feminine words ending in d, i,
and u : as Mdlahim, naihim, vahuhim [v. 19]. In the same way we have
aggissa, vdussa as the gen. sing., and agg'ido, vdudo , etc., for the abl. sing.;
and similarly dohim , tihim [vi. 54, 55], chauhim.
NA NINASYOB EDATATJ. (61.)
E and d are not used as the substitutes of the affixes hi and nasi [cf. v. 6
and v. 9] in the case of nouns ending in i and u : as, Aggimmi, ‘ in the
fire’; vaummi , * in the wind’; agg'ido, aggidu, agg'ihi, * from the fire’; vdudo,
vdudu, vdiihi, ‘ from the wind.’
E BHYASI. (62.)
The negative is repeated from the previous Sutra. E 1 is not substituted
for the final letter of nouns ending in i or u, when bhyas follows: as, Aggi-
hinto, aggisunto, ‘ from the fires’; vduliinto, vausunto, ‘from the winds.’
EWIYACHANASYA BAHUYACIIANAM. (63.)
In all affixes, whether for the cases of nouns or the persons of verbs,
we must use the plural instead of the dual; thus we must say, vachchha ,
‘two trees’: vachchhehim, ‘by two trees,’ etc.; and similarly for verbs; as,
chitthanti, ‘ they two stand.’
CHATEBTHYAH SHASHTHI. (64.)
Instead of the affix of the dative case, we must use that of the genitive;
thus, vamhanassa dehi, vamhanana dehi, ‘ give to the Brahman ’; or ‘ to the
Brahmans.’
1 Cf. Yar. Lect. E and not a seems the true reading, because in fact
the form with a is only evolved from the Sutra v. 12, by the aid of the cha
[cf. v. 7, note]; the original forms being no doubt vachchhehinto, etc. This
being not observed by the copyists has occasioned the Yar. Lect. a.
158
[sect. VII.
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
SECTION THE SEVENTH.
ON CONJUGATION.
TATIPOR IDETAU. (1.)
For ta and tip (the affixes of the 1st person 1 2 in the dtmane and parasmai
pada), i and e are mutually substituted: as,
Padha'i, padhae for pathati, pathate, ‘ he recites.’
THASSIPOS SI SE. (2.)
For thds and sip (the affixes of the 2nd. person sing, in the atm. and
par. pada), si and se 2 are mutually substituted : as,
Padhasi, padhase for pathasi, pathase.
ITMIPOR MIH. (3.)
For it and mip (the affixes of the 3rd person sing, in the atm. and par.
pada ) mi is substituted ; and thus padhami represents both the Sans, pathami
and pathe.
NTIHETTHAMOMUMA BAHUSHTT. (4.)
For the conjugational affixes in the plural, nti, ha, itthd, mo, mu, ma are
severally substituted: as,
(1.) Padhanti; (2.) padhaha, padhittha; (3.) padhamo, padhamu,
padhama.
ATA E SE. (5.)
This rule limits what would otherwise be of constant application. The
e and se which are substituted by Sutras 1 and 2 are only substituted when
they follow a, and not otherwise; thus we have ramae, He rejoices,’ padhae ,
1 The reader will bear in mind that the Hindu Grammarians follow an
inverse order to ours in arranging the persons, their first person being our
third, etc.
2 The apparent confusion in Sutras 1, 2, (as si properly — sip, not thds,
etc.) seems intended to prepare us for Sut. 5.
SECT. VIT.]
OF VARARUCHI.
159
* he recites ramase, ‘ thou rejoicest,’ padhase, ‘thou recitest but not hoe or
hose [ho being the Prakrit for hhu by viii. 1] hut only hoi/ he is’; host,
‘ thou art.’
ASTER LOPAH. (6.)
The root as, to he/ is elided when the substitutes [vii. 2] for the affixes
thus and sip follow : as,
Sutto si for supto ’si, ‘ thou art asleep.’
MIMOMIIMAN AM ADHO HASCHA. (7.)
H is to be used immediately after the m in the affixes mi, mo, mu, ma ,
when they follow the root as, the elision of which still continues to be
enjoined from the preceding Sutra : as,
Gao mhi; gaa mho, gaa mhu, gaa mha for gato ’smi, ‘ I am gone
gatas smah, ‘ we are gone.’
YAKA IA-IJJAU. (8.)
Eor yah (the affix of the passive) ta and ijja are substituted (and the
personal affixes subjoined to these): as,
Padhiai, padhijja'i for pathyate, ‘ it is recited.’
N ANT Y AD WIT WE. (9.)
These substitutions for yah do not take place, when the final consonant
of the root is doubled : as,
' t
Hassai, gammai for hasyate, * it is laughed,’ gamyate, ‘ it is gone.’ Ry
viii. 58, this doubling of the final is optional in the verbs gama, etc.; there¬
fore when the final is not doubled, Sut. 8 remains in force, and thus we
have gamiai, gamijjai.
NT AM AN ATT S ATRI-SAN ACHOH. (10.)
Eor the participial affixes satri and 'sanach, nta and mana are mutually
substituted: as,
Padhanto, padhamano, ‘ reciting.’
ICHA STRIYAM. (11.)
*
I is substituted (as well as the regular forms from nta and mana), for
satri and sanach, when used in the feminine : as,
Hasai, hasanti, hasamanti, ‘ smiling ’ (a woman); vevaf, vevantf, veva-
mana, ‘trembling.’
DIIATOR BHAYISHYATI IIIH. (12.)
The syllabic hi is to be used after the root in the future (and the affixes
160
THE P It A KK.IT AP R AK A S A
[sect. VII.
of the present added to this): as,
Hohii, ‘he will be’; hohinti, ‘ they will he’; hasihii, *he will laugh’;
hasihinti, ‘they will laugh.’
UTTAME SSA HA CHA. (13.)
In the 3rd person [cf. note Sut. 1 ] of the future we are to use after the
root ssd and ha ; and also hi (as we infer from the clia in the Sutra): as,
Hossami, hohami, hohimi, * I shall be ’; hossamo, hohamo, hohimo, ‘ we
shall be.’
MIHA SSAM YA. (14.)
In the 3rd person sing, of the future, ssam may optionally be used after
the root, superseding the personal affix mi: as,
Hossam, ‘ I shall be.’ This being optional, we may also use the forms of
the preceding Sutra.
[MOMTJMAIB HISSA HITTHA. 1 ] (15.)
In the 3rd person plural of the future, hissa and hittha may be optionally
added after the root, instead of any substitute for a plural-affix, superseding
mo, mu, or ma : as,
Hohissa, hohittha, 4 we shall be’; hasihissa, hasihittha, Ve shall laugh.’
As this is optional, we may also use the previous forms. 2
[KBl-HA-SEH-YACHI-GAMI-EIJHI-HEISI-YIDI-EHPAJSrAM HA-
HAM HAHAM SOCHCHHAM YOCHCHHAM GACHCHHAM EOCH-
CHHAM DACHCHHAM YECHCHHAM. 3 ] (16.)
In the 3rd person sing, of the future, instead of the roots Jcri, etc.,
Icdham, etc. are respectively substituted : as,
ICaham, ‘i will do’; daham, ‘l will give’; sochchham, ‘l will hear’;
vochchham, *1 will speak;’ gachchham, ‘l w r ill go’; rochchham, f I w r ill
weep ’; dachchham, f I will see ’; vechchham, 1 1 will know,’ etc.
1 Sutras 15—22 are only found in part of the MSS., but Hema-ch., and
the Prak. Sanj. give them; and as several of them are of some value, I add
Hema-chandra’s corresponding rules.
2 Hema-ch., 165, Momumdndm hissa hittha, and 166, meh ssam.
3 Hema-ch., 167, Krido ham, with ex. haham daham ; then 168, sru-gami-
rudi - vidi - dri'si - muchi - vachi - chhidi - bhidi - bhujdm sochham gachham rochham
vechham, etc. The Sanskrit Grammarians frequently add an i to a verbal
root, in order to decline it in their Sutras. See Sect. viii. passim.
SECT. VII.]
OP VARARUCHI.
161
[SRAYADIYAM TRISWAPYAHUSWARAVARJAH HILOPASCHA
YA. 1 ] (17.)
Sochchham , etc. (without the anuswara) are substituted for sru, etc. in
the future, even when the signs of the first, second, or third persons follow;
the elision or insertion of hi (Sut. 12) is optional: as,
Sochchhii, sochchhihii, ‘he will hear’; sochchhinti, sochchhihinti, ‘they
will hear’; sochchhisi, sochchhihisi, ‘ thou wilt hear’; sochchhittha, sochehhi-
hittha, ‘ ye will hear’; sochchhimi, sochchhihimi, ‘i will hear’; sochchhimo,
sochchhihimo, sochchhimu, sochchhihimu, sochchhima, sochchhihima, soch-
chhissamo [Sut. 13], sochchissamu, sochchhissama, ‘we will hear.’ And
similarly vochchha, etc.
[IT-SU-MU YIDHYADISHAYEKASMIH. 2 ] (18.)
U su mu are severally substituted for the proper singular affixes in the
sense of command, etc. [cf. Panini iii. 3, 161 and 162] : as,
Hasaii, ‘let him laugh’; hasasu, ‘ do thou laugh’; hasamu, ‘let me laugh.’
[HTU-HA-MO BAHUSHU. 3 ] (19.)
JVtu ha mo are severally substituted for the proper plural affixes in the
sense of command, etc.: as,
Hasantu, ‘let them laugh’; hasaha, ‘laugh ye’; liasamo, ‘let us laugh.’
[YARTAMAHABHAYISHYADAHADYATANAYOR JJA JJA YA. 4 ]
( 20 ).
Jja and jjd are optionally substituted for the proper affixes of the
present and the definite future, and also when command, etc. are implied;
1 Hema-ch. 169, sochhadaya ijddishu (explained in Comm, by lhavishyad-
ades eshu), hilukcha vti.
2 Hema-ch. 170, Dusumu vidytidishwehasminstraytintim, with the ex.,
hasamu aharn, etc.; the Comm, adds du, dahtirochchtiranam Ihtishtintartirtham.
S. 171, Sor hir vti is new, as is 172, Ata ijjaswijjahijjelulco vti ; with Comm.,
AJctirtitparasya sos sthtine ‘ ijjasu ’ ‘ iyjahi’ ‘ ijje ’ ityete lulccha tidesti vti bhavanti.
3 This is Hema-ch., 173.
4 Hema-ch., 174, Vartamtintibhavishyantyo'scha jja jjd vti. Por Comm.,
cf. notes pp. 64, 65; also cf. ibid for the other interpr. in the MSS., some
of which understand by vidhytidishu , ‘the imperative and other tenses’;
Hema-ch. notices the variation [cf. var. lect., p. 65] but gives as above,
which agrees with Pan., iii. 3, 161, 162.
Y
162
[sect. VI-1.
THE PRAKTIITAPRAKASA
there being- an option, the previous forms may he retained. Thus we have
in the present hojja, hojja, or hoi, ‘ he is’ \_cf. viii. 1]; hasejja, hasejjd, or
hasai, 1 he laughs (and the same form applies to the three persons in both
numbers;) in the future hojja, hojja, or hohii, etc., he will be’; and simi¬
larly in the sense of the imperative.
[MADHYE CHA. 1 2 ] (21.)
Jja and jja are also optionally inserted between the root and the affixes
in the present, the definite future and the imperative : as,
(Present) hojja'i, hojjiii; (future) hojjahii, hojjahii; (imperative) hojjaii,
hojjau.
[HAYEKACHAH.] (22.)
Jja and jja, however, are not thus inserted between the root and affix,
except when the root ends in a vowel (and is therefore monosyllabic [eMch],
since a root which ends in a consonant becomes dissyllabic by the addition of
the anuhandha) : as,
Hasai from hasa, ‘to smile’; tuvarai from twara, * to hasten.’ But this
does not preclude their being employed as finals (by S. 20); as, Hasejja, -jja;
tuvarejja, -jja, etc.
IA BHBTE. (23.)
*
la 3 is substituted for the affix after a root in a past tense : as,
Huvfa, hasia for abhavat, ‘ he was,’ ahasat, 4 he laughed.’
1 Hema-ch. 175, Madhye cha swarantdd vd. Swarantad dhdtoh prahriti-
pratyayayor madhye, chakarat pratyayandm cha sthane, jja jja vd bhavatah
vartamandbhavishyantyor vidhyddishu cha. The ex. of the future are hojjahii,
hojjahii, hojja, hojja, pakshe hohii , which I have supplied above, as all Vara-
ruchi’s MSS. omit them, except W, which erroneously reads hojja'i like the
present. Hema-ch. also applies the forms to all the persons.
2 For Sutras 23, 24, cf. Lass. Inst., p. 354. Some MSS. seem to have
ia for ia, but the Sanksh. Sara and Hema-ch. have ia. The latter’s Sutras
are as follow ; “ S'i hi hia bhutdrthasya. Instead of the affixes of the third and
other preterites ( adyatanyddis pratyayo bhutarthas) si hi and Ida are sub¬
stituted ; and as the ia of the next rule is restricted to a root ending in a
consonant, we infer that this rule applies to one ending in a vowel: as, Jcasi,
ledhi, hahid for akdrshit, aharot, chalcdra from leri.”— “ Vyanjanad ia. For the
affixes of the third and other preterites, after a root ending in a consonant,
SECT. VII.]
OF VARA HUGH I.
163
EKACHO HI A. (24.)
Ilia is substituted for the affix after a monosyllabic root in a past
tense : as,
Hohfa for abhut, ‘ he was.’
ASTER ASIH. (25.)
*
Asi is substituted for asti in the singular of a past tense : as,
Asi raa for asfd raja, there was a king.’
HICHA EDADERATA AT. (26.)
K is substituted for nidi, the causal affix, and an a in the first syllable
of the root becomes d : as,
Karei, hasei for karayati, 4 he causes to do,’ hasayati, *he causes to
laugh.’
AYE CHA. (27.)
Ave also is substituted for nidi, as well as e : as,
Karavei, karavei, hasavei for karayati, ‘ he causes to do,’ hasayati, * he
causes to laugh.’ 1
AYIH KTAKARMABHAYESHU YA. (28.)
*
Avi is optionally substituted for nidi,[if] when Ida (the affix of the past
participle) follows; and [ii.] when the object and the action are signified
( [i.e ., in the passive voice): as,
[i.] Karaviam, hasaviam ; or kariam, hasiam; for karita, 4 caused to do,’
hasita, ‘ caused to laugh.’
[ii.] Karavijjai, hasavijjai; or karijjai, hasijjai; for karyate, ( he is caused
to do,’ hasyate, ( he is caused to laugh.’
[NAIDAYE.] (29.)
JE and ave are not substituted for nidi when Ida follows, or in the
passive voice : thus we have only Kariam, hardviam, karijjai, karavijjai.
ATA A MIPI YA. (30.)
ia is substituted: as, kui'ia, for abhut, abJiavat, babhuva, etc.;” liuv being a
form for bhu, by viii. 1.
1 The Pr. Sanj. adds pur.vasutrdd yogabheda cideranddtdurtha, i.e., this
Sutra is separated from the preceding [cf. iii. 49] because the substitution
for the initial a is not enjoined here.” Bhamaha allows both forms.
164
THE FRAKRITAFRAKASA
VII.
A is optionally substituted for the final of a root ending in a, when mip
follows: as,
Hasami or hasami, ‘ I laugh.’
ICHCHA BAHUSHU. (31.)
I is substituted (as well as a) for the final a, in the 1st person plural: as,
Hasimo, hasamo, hasimu, hasamu, ‘ we laugh.’ 1 * 3
KTE. (32.)
I is substituted for the final a when Ida (the affix of the past participle)
follows: as,
Hasiam, padhiam for hasitam, ‘laughed,’ pathitam, ‘recited.’
ECHA KTWATUMITYTAYYABHAYISHYATSIJ. (33.)
When the affixes /diva, tumim, and tavya follow, and also in the future
tense, e is substituted for a ; and also i, as we infer from the clia of the
Sutra: as,
Haseuna, hasiuna, ‘having laughed’; haseum, hasium, ‘to laugh’; hase-
avvam, hasiavvam, ‘ (it is) to be laughed’; hasehii, hasihii, ‘he will laugh.’
LADESE YA. (34.)
E is optionally substituted for a final a , wdierever it is followed by a
substitute for P (or in other words, in any person of any tense): as,
Hasei or hasa'i, ‘ he laughs ’; hasenti or hasanti, ‘ they laugh.’
1 This a seems optional by Sut. 30; hence we have such forms as
hasamu ; cf. Sut. 4.
3 Cf Pan. iii. 4, 77.
SECT. VIII.]
OF VAltARUCHI.
165
SECTION THE EIGHTH.
EHUYO HOHUYAU. (1.)
For the verbal root bhu, to be/ ho and huva are substituted : as,
Hoi, huvai, ‘he is’; honti, buvanti, ‘they are.’
KTE HUH. (2.)
"When bhu is followed by Ha, the affix of the past participle, hu is
substituted: as,
Huam, 1 ‘ been.’
PRADER EH A YAH. (3.)
When bhu follows a preposition, as pra, etc., bhava is substituted: as,
Pabhavai' for prabhavati, ‘he prevails’: sambhava'i for sambbavati, ‘he
is born.’
TWAEAS TUYAEAH. (4.)
Eor the root twar (nit war a) ‘ to hasten/ tuvara is substituted : as,
Tuvarai, ‘ he hastens.’
KTE TURAH. (5.)
When twar is followed by the participial affix Ha, tura is substituted: as,
Turiam [for the i, cf vii. 32].
GHUNO GHOLAH. (6.)
Eor ghuna (wffiich in the Dhatupatha or ‘ glossary of roots/ is arranged
with ghurna in the sense of ‘ rolling ’) gliola is substituted: as,
Gbola’i, ‘ be rolls.’
KUDO NOLL AH. (7.)
Eor the root nud (nuda ), ‘ to send/ nolla is substituted : as,
• • « •
Nollai, ‘he sends’; panollai, ‘he drives.’ 2
1 Or perhaps huam; cf. Yar. Lect.
2 Others read Iona for nolla, and two MSS. insert both rules, but this only
proves that it is an old Yar. Lect. In Sect, iv., we have some instances of
a similar transposition of the nasal, as ctndla, etc.
166
[sect. VIII.
THE P RAK RITA PEAK ASA
DUJSfO DUMAH. (8.)
For the root du {dun), duma is substituted : as,
Duma'i, ‘he is pained/
FATEH PHALAH 1 (9.)
For the root pat (pata, given in the Dhatupatha with ata, in the sense
of ‘ going ’), phala is substituted : as,
Phaliam hiaam, ‘ my heart is gone’ (?).
PADEH PALAH. (10.)
For the root pad ( pada ), pdla is substituted: as,
Palei, ‘ he goes.’
YRISHAKRISHAMRISHAHRISHAM RITO 'RIH. (11.)
• • • • • ' '
Ari is substituted for the ri of the roots wish, etc.: as,
• •
Yarisa'i,‘it rains’; karisa'i, ‘he drags’; marisai, ‘he bears patiently’;
harisai, ‘ he is glad.’
RITO ’RAH. (12.)
Ara is substituted when a root ends in ri : as
Mri, ‘to die,’ mara’i; sri, ‘to go,’ sara’i; vri, ‘
y
to choose,’ vara'i.
KRIHAH KUm YA. (13.)
Kuna is optionally used for the root leri (dulcrin ): as,
Kuna'i or karai, ‘ he does.’
JRIBHO JAMBHAAH. (14.)
For jribli ( < jribhk ), ‘ to yawn ,’ jambhda is substituted : as,
Jambhaa'i, ‘ he yawns.’
GRAHER GEYHAH. (15.)
For grah (graha ), ‘ to seize,’ genha is substituted : as,
Genhai, ‘ he seizes.’
GHET KTWATUMUHTAYYESHU. (16.)
Ghet is substituted for grah, when followed by Jctwd, the affix of the in¬
declinable participle, tumun, that of the infinitive, and tavya, that of the
future participle : as,
Ghettuna, ‘having seized’; ghettum, ‘to seize’; ghettavvam, ‘to be
seized. 2
1 The Prak. Sanj. reads pateli phdlah, and restricts it to the causal.
2 If tt be the correct reading in the examples, we must read ghet or ghett
for ghe. Cf. Yar. Lect., and transl., notes, iv. 23, and viii., 55.
SECT. VIII.]
OF YARARUCHI.
167
KRIYAH KA BIIFTABHAYISHYATOSCHA. (17.)
Kd is substituted for the root kri, in the past and the future tenses,
and also (as we infer from the cha of the Sutra) when the affixes ktwd,
tumun , and tavya follow : as,
Kahi'a, ‘he did’ [for this, cf. vii. 24]; kahii, ‘he will do’; kauna,
‘having done’; kaum, ‘to do’; kaavvam, ‘to be done.’
SMARATER BHARASFMARAF. (18.)
For the root smri, to remember,’ bliara 1 2 and sumara are substituted : as,
Bharai or sumara'i, ‘ he remembers.’
BHIYO BHAYIIIAF. (19.)
For the root bJi’i ( nibhi ), ‘ to fear,’ bJid 2 and v'lha arc substituted : as,
Bhai or vihai', ‘ he fears.’
[JIGHRATEH PAPAAF.] (20.)
For the root ghra , ‘ to smell,’ pa and pda are substituted : as,
Pai or paa'i, ‘ he smells.’
MLAI YAYAAF. (21.)
For the root mlai, ‘ to wither,’ vd and vaa are substituted : as,
Yai or vaa'i, ‘ he withers.’
TRIPAS THIMPAH. (22.)
For the root trip ( tripa, given in the Dhatupatha with trimpa in the
sense of ‘being pleased ’) thimpa is substituted: as,
Thimpai, ‘ he is pleased.’
JNO JAYAMFYAF. (23.)
For the root jna, ‘ to know,’ jana and muna are substituted : as,
Jana’i and munai, ‘he knows.’
JALPER LO MAH. (24.)
M is substituted for the l of the root jalp ( jalpa ), to speak articulately ’: as,
Jam pai'.
SHTHADHYAGAYAM THAAJI4AAGAAH. (25.)
For the roots shthd, ‘ to stand,’ dhyai, ‘ to meditate,’ yai, ‘ to sing ’ (given
in the Dhatupatha in the list kai, gai, rai in the sense of ‘ sound ’), tlida ,
jhda and gda are respectively substituted : as,
1 Hema-ch. “ Smarer jara-jiira-bhara-lliala-ladlia-vimhara-mmara-payara-
pambuhah .”
2 Bhddhi and bhdissadi are found in Sak. (Williams’) pp. 176, 15 ; 254, 1.
168
TIIE P R A KRITAP H A Tv ASA
[sect. VIII.
Thiianti, ‘ they stand ’; jhaanti, 4 they meditate ’; gaanti, ‘ they sing.’
[THAJHAGASCHA YAETAMAYABIIAYISHYADYIDHYADYEKA-
YACHAKESHE. (26.)
Eor the roots shthd, dhyai , and gai, when followed by the singular affixes
of the imperative, the future, and the present, tlid , jhd, and gd are severally
substituted, as well as the substitutes mentioned in the preceding Sutra (as
we infer from the cha in the present one): as,
Thai or thaai', * he stands’; thahii or thaahii, ‘he wall stand’; thau or
tlniaii, ‘ let him stand’; and similarly jhai or jhaai, jhahii or jhaahii, jhau or
jhtiau, gai or gaa'i, gahii or gaahii, gau or gaaii.
• [KHADIDHAYYOH KHADHAE.] (27.)
Eor the roots lclidd ( khddri ), ‘ to eat,’ and dhdv ( dhavu ), 1 to run,’ kha
and dhd are substituted in the same tenses as in the preceding Sutra : as,
Khai, *he eats’; khahii, 4 he will eat’; khau, ‘ let him eat’; and simi¬
larly dhai, dhahii, dhau.
GEASEE YISAH. (28.)
Eor the root gras (given in the Dhatup. in the list grasu , glasu , in the
sense of * eating’) visa is substituted : as,
Yisai, ‘ he eats.’
CHIYAS CHIYAH. (29.)
Eor the root chi ( chin ), ‘ to gather,’ china is substituted: as,
China?, ‘ he gathers.’
KELYAir KIYAH. (30.)
Eor the root kri ( dukr'n), * to buy,’ kina is substituted : as,
Kinai’, ‘ he buys.’
YEH KKECHA. (31.)
Kke is the substitute for kri, when preceded by the preposition vi ; and
kina also, as we infer from the cha in the Sutra : as,
Yikkei or vikkinai’ [for the kk, cf. iii. 50], ‘ he sells.’
UD-DHMA EDDHEMA. (32.)
Eor the root dhma, ‘to blow,’ when preceded by the preposition ut,
uddhuma is substituted : as,
Eddhumai.
SEADO DHO DAHAH. (33.)
Eor the root dhd ( dudhan ), ‘to hold,’ when preceded by the particle
SECT. VIII.]
OF YAK A R ITCH I.
169
trad, dalm is substituted : as,
Saddahai, ‘ he believes’; saddahiam, ‘ believed.’
AYAD GAHER YAHAH. (34.)
Eor the root gdh (gahu), ‘ to churn,’ etc., when preceded by the pre¬
position ava, valid is substituted: as,
Ovaha'i or avavaha’i, ‘ he bathes ’ [cf. iv. 21].
KASER YASAH. (35.)
‘ Preceded by ava ’ is continued from the foregoing Sutra. Eor the
root has ( hasri), ‘ to cough,’ when preceded by ava, vasa is substituted : as,
Ovasa'i or avavasa'i, ‘he coughs.’
NIRO MANO MANAH. (36.)
Eor the root md ( man ), ‘ to measure,’ when preceded by the preposition
nir, mana is substituted : as,
Nimmana'i, * he makes.’
KSHIYO JHIJJAH. (37.)
Eor the root hshi, ‘to destroy,’ jhijja is substituted: as,
Jhijjai, ‘he destroys.’
BHIDICHHIDOR ANTYASYA NDAH. (38.)
Eor the final of the roots bhid (bhidir ), ‘to break,’ and chhid ( chhidir )
‘ to cut,’ nda is substituted : as,
Bhinda'i, ‘he breaks’; chhinda'i, ‘he cuts.’
KWATHER DHAH. (39.)
Eor the final of the root hwath (hwatha ), ‘to boil,’ dha is substituted: as,
Kadhai', ‘ he boils.’
YESHTESCHA. (40.)
Dha is also substituted for the final of the root vesht ( veshta ), ‘to
surround’: as,
Yeddha'i, ‘he surrounds.’ This and the preceding Sutra, which might
otherwise have been united, are separated on account of the latter of the two
[S. 40]; which enjoins a substitute for a final conjunct instead of a single
consonant, and therefore comes within the range of Sect. iii. 51. 1
1 None of the MSS. write the ex. with ddjh\ but that given above seems
the natural explanation of the yogavibhdga uttararthah. The Prak. Sanj. is
corrupt here, but seems to allow a second form vet that (by iii. 10); it giyes
no expl. of yogavibhdga, etc., and this would have rather required nitydrtha
[cf. iii. 49].
z
170
[sect. VIII.
THE PRAKRITAPHAKASA
UTSAMOR LAH. (41.)
For the final of the root vesht, la is substituted, when it is preceded by
the prepositions ut and sam : as,
XIvvellai, samvellai.
RUDER YAH. (42.)
For the final of the root rud ( rudir ), to weep/ va is substituted : as,
Ruvai, * he weeps.’
UDO VIJAXI. (43.)
For the final of the root vij , preceded by ut, va is substituted : as,
Uvvivai, 4 he trembles.’
YRXDHER DHAH. (44.)
For the final of the root vridh (■ vridhu ), ‘ to increase/ dha is substituted: as,
Yaddhai, * he increases.’
HARTER MM AH. (45.)
Mma is substituted for the final of the root han (hana ), to strike’: as,
Hammai, ‘he strikes.’
RUSHADIRAM DXRGHATA. (46.)
In the roots rush, etc., the vowel is lengthened : as,
Rusai, tusai, susa'i, for rushyati, ‘ he is angry tushyati, ‘ he is pleased ’;
sushyati, ‘he dries.’
CHCHO YRAJARRXT YOH. (47.)
Chclia is substituted for the final of the roots vraj ( vraja ), * to go/ and
nrit ( nriti ), ‘ to dance ’: as,
Yachchai, ‘he goes’; nachchai', ‘ he dances.’ 1
YUDHIBUDHYOR JHAH. (48.)
Jha is substituted for the final of the roots yudh, to fight/ and budh,
‘ to know as,
Jujjhai, * he fights ’; vujjhai, ‘he knows.’
RUDHER RDHAMBHAU. (49.)
Ndha and mlha are substituted for the final of rudh ( rudhir ), ‘to
hinder:’ as,
Rundha'i, rumbha'i, ‘ he hinders.’
MRIDO LAH. (50.)
La is substituted for the final of the root mrid ( mrida ), ‘to grind’: as,
Mala'i, ‘he grinds.’
*
1 Nachchanam — nartanam; Sak. (Williams’), p. 165, 1.
SECT. VIII.]
OF VARA11UCHI.
171
SADLEIPATYOE I)AH. (51.)
Da is substituted for the final of the roots sad ( sadlri ), ’ to decay/ and
pat ( patlri ), ‘to fall’: as,
Sada'i, ‘ he decays ’; padai, befalls.’
SAKADIYAM DWITWAM. (52.)
The final of the roots 'sale ( saklri ), etc., is doubled : as,
Sakkai, 1 laggai, for saknoti, * he is able,’ lagati, ‘ he adheres.
y
SPHUTICHALYOE YA. (53.)
The final of the roots sphut ( sphuta ), ‘ to blossom,’ and chal ( cliala ), ‘ to
tremble,’ is optionally doubled : as,
Phuttai or phuda'i (the t, when it is not doubled, becoming d by ii. 20);
challai or chala'i.
PEADEE MILAH. (54.)
The final of the root mil ( mila ), 1 to wink,’ is optionally doubled, when
it is preceded by the prepositions pra, etc. : as,
Pamillai, pamflai. 2
B HU J ADI YAM KTWATUMUYTAYYESHU LOPAH. (55.)
The finals of the roots bhuj, etc., are elided, when the affixes letwd , tumun ,
and tavya follow : thus from bimj we have
Bhottuna, bhottum, bhottavvam ; for bhuktwa, ^ having eaten,’ bhoktum,
( to eat,’ bhoktavyam, ( to be eaten.’—Similarly from vid, 4 to know,’ vettuna,
vettum, vettavvam; and from rud. *to weep,’ rottuna, rottum, rottayvam. 3
SEUHUJILTJDHUYAM YO ’YTYE HEASWAH. (56.)
At the end of the roots sru, ‘ to hear,’ hu, ‘ to offer,’ ji, ( to conquer,’ lu
( lun ), ( to cut,’ dhu ( dJiun ), * to shake,’ na is to be employed, and the pre¬
ceding long vowel is to be shortened : as,
Sunai, hunai', jina'i, lunai, dhuna'i.
BHAYAKAEMAYOE YYASCHA. (57.)
1 Cf. sahkanomi ----- saknomi; Sak. (Williams’), p. 108, 2.
2 Some of the MSS. seem to take prdder as equal to pra-purvasya , but cf.
viii. 3. The Prak. Sanj. agrees with the text, and also gives examples with
pra and ut, adding mila iti kim , milai.
3 If the above be the correct text (and it is also found in the Pr. Sanj.) tuna
as well as una will be the Prakrit equiv. for ktiva ; cf iv. 23, transl. note.
The Pr. Sanj. (which always has tuna =? ktwd) explains the tt by iii. 58.
TO
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
[sect. VIII.
At the end of these roots, when the passive 1 is signified, vva is to be
employed; but na may also be used, as we infer from the cha in the Sutra: as,
Suvva'i or sunijjai [vii. 8]; huvvai or hunijjai; jivva’i or jinijjai'; luvvai
or lunijja'i; dhuvva'i or dhunijjai.
Sruyate, ^it is heard’; huyate, ‘it is offered’; jfyate, ^it is conquered,’ etc.
GAMADIYAM DWITWAM YA. (58.)
In the case of the roots gama, etc., the final letter is optionally doubled
in the passive, ( cf,\ vii. 9.): as,
Gamma'i, garni) jai; rammai, ramijjai; hassai, hasijjai.
Gamyate, ^it is gone’; ramyate, ‘it is played’; hasyate, ‘ it is laughed.’
LIBER LIJJHAH. (59.)
Lijjha is substituted for the root lih ( liha ), ‘ to lick,’ in the sense of the
passive : as,
Lijjhai, * it is licked.’
HRIKROR HIRAKIRATL (60.)
For the roots hri and hri, Jura and Idra are severally substituted in the
sense of the passive : as,
Hirai, ‘ it is seized ’; kfrai, 1 it is done.’
GRAHER DIRGIIO YA. (61.)
A long vowel is optionally substituted for the short a in the root grah, in
the sense of the passive : as,
Gahijjai or gahijja'i, ‘ it is seized.’
KTEYA DIYYADAYAH. (62.)
Dinna , etc., are used as irregular forms for some participles with the
affix Ida : thus,
Da (dudan), 1 to give,’ dinna, 1 given’; rud (rudir), 1 to weep,’ runnam,
*wept’; tras (trasf) 4 to fear,’ hittham, 1 alarmed ’; dah (daha), ‘ to burn,’
daddham, ‘ burned’; ranj (ranji), *to be attached to,’ rattam (?), ‘attached to.’
KHIDER YISXJRAH. 3 (63.)
For the root /chid ( Ichida ), ‘ to be distressed,’ visura is substituted : as,
Yirahena visurai vala, ‘ the maiden is distressed by the absence (of her
beloved).’
KRUDHER JIJRAli. (64.)
1 Karman = our passive; Uiava is the impersonal passive of a neuter verb.
2 W continues to refer the remaining Sutras to the passive, but the
Adhikara of Sut. 57 ended, no doubt, at Sut. 62.
SECT. VIII.]
OF VARARUCHI.
173
For krudh ( Icrudha ), ‘to be angry,’ jura is substituted: as,
Jurat, ‘ he is angry.’
CHABCHES CHAMPAH. (65.)
For charch ( charcha ), ‘to study,’ champa is substituted: as,
Champa!', ‘ he studies.’
TBASEE YAJJAH. (66.)
For tras ( tras'i ), to fear,’ vajja is substituted : as,
Yajjai, ‘ he fears.’
MBIJEB LUBHASUPAIJ. (67.)
For mrij ( mriju ), to cleanse,’ lubha and supa are substituted: as,
Lubhai or supai, ‘ he cleanses.’
YXJTTAKHUPPAIT MASJEH. (68.)
For may ( tumasjo ) to be immerged,’ vutta (?) and khuppa are sub¬
stituted : as,
Yuttai, khuppai,‘ he is immerged.’
DBISEH PDLAAXIAKKAAYAKKHAH. 1 (69.)
For the root drib (drisir ), to see,’ pulaa, niakka, and avakkha are
substituted: as,
Pulaai, niakkai, avakkhai, ‘ he sees.’
SAXES TABAYAATIEAH. (70.)
For the root sale ( saklri ) ‘to be able,’ tar a , vaa, and tira are substituted: as,
Tarai, vaa'i, tirai, ‘he is able.’
SESHAXAM AD A.XTATA. (71.)
The Anubandhas of the remaining roots are elided, and the roots them¬
selves considered as ending in short a : thus,
Bhram (bhramu), ‘to wander,’ bhamai, ‘he wanders’; chub (chubi),
‘ to kiss,’ chumvai, ‘he kisses.’
1 The Prak. Sanj. reads this Siit., “ Driseh pulaa-niachchha-avakkha-sach-
chavdh the Sanksh. Sara has a Sutra, given by Delius (Ead. Prak.)
“ Driseh pulaa- [Cod. -naci\-niachchha-avaklzha\Q<d&. -jjha\-sachcliava-pehlchdh ; ’ ’
so that no doubt we should correct Yararuchi’s niahha to niachchha, which is
probably meant in the ex. of v. 2 \_cf. p. 142]. In the ‘ Mahavira-charita ’
(Trithen’s ed.) we twice find the form puloa [p. 99, 3, puloanto chitthadi; p.
100, 10, asoavanidsammuham puloedi ] which is the only form I have met
with like pulaa in the plays. Hema-ch. gives the forms niachchha, pechcliha ,
avayachchha, avayajjha, vajja, sachchava, dehkha, oakkha, avakkha, avaakkha,
puloa, pulaa, nia, avadsa, pasa.
174
THE PRAKIIITAPRAKASA
[sect. IX.
SECTION THE NINTH.
HIPATAH. 1 (1.)
This Section will treat of particles [ nipatali ], following the method of the
Sanskrit grammarians.
HUM DYNAPEICHCHHAHIEDHAEAYESHU. (2.)
Hum is a particle used in the sense of giving, asking, or speaking
emphatically : as,
Hum genha appano jiam, * Go, take your life Hum sahusu sabbhavam,
* Wish good to the good ’ (?); Hum huvasu tunhikko, 4 Come, be quiet.’
VIA YEA AYAUHAEAYE. (3.)
Via and vea are used in the sense of asseveration: as,
Evam via, evam vea, 4 So, certainly.’ 2
0 SITCHAHAPASCHATTAPAYIKALPESHU. (4.)
0 is used in the sense of indication, remorse and indecision; for examples
the Comment, refers us to the Gdthdh, or poems written in Prakrit. 3
IEAKIEAKILA AYISCHITAKHYAYE. (5.)
Ira , kira, and kila are used in doubtful assertion : as,
Pekkha ira tena hado, ‘ See, he was possibly killed by him.’
HUM KKHU HISCHAYAYITAEKASAMBHAYANESHU. (6.)
Hum and kkhu are used in the sense of resolution, doubt, or reflection: as,
1 As this Section treats only of interjections, etc., I have not translated
all the examples in full.
2 See Lass. App., p. 189.
3 The Prakrit of these first nine Sections [Lassen’s * Dialectus Prsecipua’]
is peculiarly the poetic dialect. It is called the Maharashtn in xii. 32.
*
The Saurasem is the form employed in prose.
SECT. IX.]
OF VARARUCHI.
175
Hum rakkhaso, ‘What! is it a Rakshasa ?’
NAYARAH KEYALE. (7.)
Navara is used in the sense of * only’: as,
Navara 1 annam, 1 Only boiled rice/
ANANTARYE NAYARI. (8.)
Navari is used in the sense of immediate sequence, * Then.’
KINO PRASNE. (9.)
Kino is used in the sense of a question: as,
Kino duvvasi, ‘ Why are you agitated ?’
AYYO DTJHKHASUCHANASAMBHAYANESHH. (10.)
Avvo is used in the sense of distress, indication, or reflection : as,
Avvo kajjalarasaranjiehim achchhihim, ‘ Alas ! (I am undone) by those
eyes tinged with collyrium,’ etc.
ALAHI NIYARANE. (11.)
Alahi is used in the sense of opposition : as,
Alahi kalahalesena, * Enough of this petty quarrelling.’
AI YALE SAMBHASHANE. (12.)
A'i and vale are used in the sense of addressing a person: as,
A’i ruulam pasusai, ‘ Is the root dried up ?’ Yale kim kalesi a vale, * Come
maiden, what are you thinking of ?’
NAYI YAIPARITYE. (13.)
Navi is used in the sense of contrariety : as,
Navi taha pahasa’i vala, ‘ Hot even the maiden smiles.’ 2
STJ KUTSAYAM. (14.)
Sit is used in the sense of censure: as,
Su sivino, ‘ Sleep ! for shame ! ’
RE ARE HIRE SAMBHASHANARATIKALAHAKSHEPESHIJ. (15.)
1 Perhaps this should be navaram ; cf. Ratnavali, p. 26, 12, ‘ Saranam
navaram ekam? Cf. Lenz, Urvasf, App. p. 15.
2 Navi — ndpi, ‘not even,’ [ ne&um? Lass. p. 370]; the MSS. explain it
by viparitam in the sense of perverse or contrary to one’s expectation.
176
[sect. IX.
THE P RAK RPf AP RAK AS A
Re, are, and hire are used in the sense of addressing a person, or of
delight, or quarrelling : as,
Be ma karehi, ‘ Oh ! do not do it! ’ etc.
MMIYAMIYAYIA IYAETHE. (16.)
Mmiva, miva, and via are used in the sense of iva, ‘like’: as,
Gaanam mmiva, (miva, or via,) kasanam, ‘Black like the sky.’
[AJJA AMANTBANE.] (17.)
Ajja is used in the sense of courteous address: as,
Ajja mahanuhava kim karesi, ‘ What art thou doing, oh illustrious one?’ 1
SESHAH SANSKBITAT. (18.)
The remainder [i.e., all that has not been treated of], whether rules for
letters, genders, taddhita derivatives, composition, or affixes, etc., must be
learned from the Sanskrit grammar (as Prakrit assumes this as its basis); they
are omitted here from fear of swelling the treatise beyond its proper size.
1 This Sut. is doubtful, being only found in four MSS. In the ex. given,
ajja might he for arya.
SECT. X.]
OF VARARUOHr.
177
SECTION THE TENTH.
PAIS AC HI. (1.)
The Paisacln is the dialect of the Pisachas, 1 or ‘ goblins/ which (like the
other dialects) is explained in this section by definitions and examples.
PRAKRITIH SAURASEYI. (2.)
The original of this dialect [i.e., that which forms the base on which its
peculiarities are engrafted] is the Sauraseni (or the Prakrit dialect peculiar
to prose; cf. xii. 1).
YARGAYAM TRITIYACH ATTJRTH AY OR AYIJJOR AYADYOR
AD YAH. (3.)
Instead of the third and fourth letters of each class, when single and
non-initial, we must use the first and second respectively [i.e., Ic for g, and
kh for gh ; ch for j, and chh for jh, etc.] : as,
Gakanam,’ mekho, racha, nichchharo, 2 etc.
Gaganam, ‘the sky’; meghah, ‘a cloud’; raja, ‘a king’; nirjharah, ‘a
cascade,’ etc.
IYASYA PI YAH. (4.)
Piva is used for iva, ‘ like :’ as,
Ivamalam piva mukham, ‘ A face like a lotus.’
YO YAH. (5.)
JSf is used for n : as,
Taluni for tarnni, ‘ a girl.’
1 I know of no instances of this dialect in any of the plays; the Rak-
shasas who are introduced in the Yemsamhara speak a kind of Arddlui-
m&gadhi [cf. Lass. p. 411], without the two peculiar features of the Paisachf,
the dental nasal,, and the substitution of hard for soft consonants.
2 This is not a good ex., as it should be a single letter. I omit the
remaining examples.
2 A
178
|SKCT. X.
THE PRAKR1T A JP RAK. ASA
SHTASYA SATAH. (6.)
Sata is used for shta : as,
Kasatam mama vatta'i, < It is my sorrow.
SEASYA SAEAH. (7.)
Sana is used for sna : as,
Sananam for snanam, * bathing/
BYASYA EIAH. (8.)
Ria is used for rya : as,
Bharia for bharya, ‘ a wife/
JEASYA EJAH. (9.)
Nj is used for jn : as,
Vinjato, for vijnata, 1 known/
KAEYAYAM EYASYA. (10.)
Nj is substituted for ny in the word hanyd, i a girl / as,
Kanja.
JJA CECHA. (11.)
Chch is used for the jj, which in the Saurasem dialect is substituted for
ry [of. iii. 17] : as,
Kachcham for karyam, ‘ to be done/
BAJEO BACEI TAEASIEASEISEB YA. (12.)
Radii is optionally used for raj an, a king,’ before the case-affixes of the
instr., abl., gen., and loc. singular : as, instr., rachina or ranjd ; abl. and gen.
rachino or ranjo; loc., rdchini or ranji. ‘ "Why do we specify these cases ?’
Because we have in nom. sing., rdchd, acc. sing., rachdnam, and acc. plur.
ranjo by Sutras 3, 9.
KTWAS TUN AM. (13.)
Tunam is used for Jctwa, the affix of the indecl. past participle : as,
Datunam for datwa, 1 having given,’ etc.
HRIDAYASYA HITAAKAM. (l4.)
Hitaalca is used for the word hridaya, the heart:’ as,
Hitaakam harasi me taluni, ‘ Maiden, thou ravishest my heart/
SECT. XI.]
OF VARAHUGHI
179
SECTION THE ELEVENTH.
MAGADHL (1.)
The Magadhf is the dialect of the Magadhas, and it is here explained by
definitions and examples.
PRAKRITIH SAURASEYL (2,)
*
The original of this dialect is the Saurasem.
SHASOH SAIL (3.)
*
S is substituted for sh and s : as,
Mase, vilase, for mashah, * a bean,’ and vilasah, * coquetry’ [for the final
e, cf. S. 10].
JO YAH. (4.)
Y is substituted for j : as,
Yayade for jayate, *he is born.’ [For the f cf. xii. 3.]
CHAYARGASYASPRISHTATA 1 TATHOCIICHARAYAH. (5.)
• • • ' '
The palatal letters are pronounced with but a very slight contact of the
tongue with the roof of the mouth ( asprishtata ).
1 This Sutra is very unintelligible as it stands in the MSS. with spashtata,
and Lassen’s conjecture of aspashtatd does not seem satisfactory; the above
is merely given as a conjectural emendation. The abhycmtara-prayatna , or
internal effort in the utterance of the palatals is properly sprishta, because
the organs of utterance are ‘ in contact ’; but in that of the semi-vowels (of
which y corresponds to the palatals) it is isJiat-spnshta , because here they
but slightly touch; which I suppose to be meant by the Sanksh. Sara’s
“ Yapachavargayuktd mandguchclidrydh .” Asprishta properly refers to the
vowels, but may here perhaps mean simply ’tshat-sprishta. In any case, the
rule seems to refer to niceties of pronunciation. If the palatals really had
this feeble sound, of course the aspirates chh and jh lose the additional letter
which is prefixed to them in the proper Prakrit \ cf Lass. p. 397.]
180
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
[sect. XI.
HEIDAYASYA HADAKKAH. (6.)
Hadakka is substituted for hridaya, ‘the heart:’ as,
Hadakke alale mama, ‘ respect in my heart ’ (?).
EYAEJAYOE YYAH. (7.)
Yy is substituted for ry and rj: as,
Kayye, duyyane for karyam, ‘ to be done,’ durjanah, ‘ wicked.’
KSHASYA SKAH. (8.)
S7c is substituted for hsh : as,
Laskase, daske for rakshasah, ‘a demon,’ dakshah, ‘clever.’
ASMAHAS SATJ HAKE HAGE AHAKE. (9.)
Eor asmad, ‘i,’ followed by the nom. affix su, hake, ha ye and ahake are
substituted : as,
Hake, hage, or ahake bhanami, ‘ I speak.’
ATA IDETAU LUKCHA. (10.)
Su is continued from Sut. 9. When su follows a noun ending in a, i and
e are substituted; elision of the affix is also optionally allowed: as,
Esi laa, ese pulise, esa pulisa for esha raja, ‘this king,’ esha purushah,
‘ this man.’
KTANTAD TJSCHA. (11.)
JJ is substituted when the affix su follows a w T ord ending with the affix
kta; and also (as we infer from the cha of the Sut.) we may optionally use
the i or e of the preceding Sut., or even elide the affix: as,
Hasidu or hasidi, haside, hasida, for hasitah, ‘ smiling.’
HASO HO YA DIEGHATWAMCHA. (12.)
Ha is optionally substituted for nas, the affix of the gen. sing., and
at the same time the preceding vowel is lengthened: as,
Pulisaha or pulisassa dhane for purushasya dhanam, ‘ the man’s wealth.’
ADIEGHAS SAMEUDDHATJ. (13.)
When the affix su follows a noun ending in a, in the sense of the voca¬
tive, the a is lengthened : as,
Pulisa agachchha, ‘Approach, oh man.’—‘ Why do w r e say in the sense of
the vocative?’ Compare Vamhanassa dhane, ‘ the brahman’s wealth.’
CHITTHASYA CHISHTHAH. (14.)
Chishiha is the Magadhf substitution for chittha, the Sauraseni form of
SECT. XI.]
OF VARARUCHI.
181
shthd, ‘ to stand : as,
Pulise chishthadi, ‘ the man stands.’
KKXNMBIjST GAM AM KTASYA DAH. (15.)
Da is substituted for the affix hta in the verbs kri (dukrin ), to do,’ mri
(mrih ), 1 to die,’ gam (gamlri ), * to go :’ as,
Kade, made, gade for kritah, ‘ done mritah, ‘ dead ’; gatah, ‘ gone.’
KTWO DAYIH. (16.)
Dani is substituted for the affix ktwa : as,
/ ( (
Sahidani gade, after having borne it, he went;’ karidani aade, after
having done it, he came.’
SBIGAL AS YA SIAL ASIALESIALAKAH. (17.)
Eor srigdla, * a jackal,’ we have these three substitutes :
Si ala, siale, sialake.
[As the Magadhi dialect is of considerable interest, I have added the
following abridgement of Hema-chandra’s corresponding Sutras: which
/
immediately follow those on the Saurasem: Cf. App. C.
287. Ata et sau punsi magadhyam [cf. Yar. xi. 10].
288. Rasor la'sau [cf. Yar. xi. 3].
289. Shasoh samyogc so ’grishme , with Comm., ‘ the dental s is substituted
for s and sh in a conjunct, except in the word grishma (thus revoking the rule
corresponding to Yararuchi, iii. 1): as, hasti, susJcam, Jcastam [ sic ]; but
gimha — grtslima.
290. Ttashthayoh stall. ‘ The cerebral t joined to the dental s, is used
for tt and shth : as, bhastd for bhatta , haste for haslitham. sustu for sushthud 1
•• • • • • ,
291. Stharthayoh stall; with ex. uvastide [ upasthita ~\, astavati [ artha -
vati}~\. [The writing of rtha in the MSS. is doubtful.]
292. Jadyaydm yah. 1 Y is substituted for j and dy } and an initial y
does not become j [cf. Yar. ii. 31] : as, yanadi , viyya , etc.
1 This remarkable Sutra is borne out by the MSS. of the Mrichchha-
katika [cf. Stenzler, preface], which however have the palatal sibilant; but
in Prinsep’s Girnar Inscription [Bengal As. Soc. Journal, vol. vii. p. 278]
we find the dental as above.
182
THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA
[sect. XI.
293. Nya-nya-jna-njdm njah.
294. Vrajer jah ; with ex. vanjadi — vrajati, ‘ he goes.’
295. Chhasya scho ’nddau; with ex., gascha [gachchha ], pmehadi
[ prichchhati ].
296. Kshasya shah. \_cf. Yar. xi. 8; the ska is here written with the
jihivamuliya .]
297. Shah prehshachahshoh [this ska is not written with the jihicd-
muliyaf ; with ex. peshadi = prehshate, and dchaskadi = dchahshate.
298. Tishthas chishthah ; 1 2 with ex. chishthadi [cf. Yar. xi. 14].
299. Avarndd vd naso ddhah 2 [<?/. Yar. xi. 12].
300. dmo ddlia vd; with ex. sayandha or sayananam.
301. Aham-vayamor hage [cf. Yar. xi. 9].
302. Sesham saurasenwat [cf. Yar. xi. 2].
1 One MS. has s'hta for shtlui .
2 This d is merely an ‘it* or grammatical technicality, and is added to
an affix, to imply that the word wffiich is to receive the affix must drop its
final vowel and any consonant which may follow it; cf. Panini, vi., 4, 143.
Yararuchi never uses this sign.
SECT. XII.]
OF VARARUCHI.
SECTION THE TWELFTH.
[The twelfth Section treats of the Saurasenf dialect, or that modification
of the Maharashtrf (or Prakrit properly so called), which is usually found in
the prose passages of the dramas. In consequence of the loss of Phamaha’s
commentary on this Section, many of Yararuchi’s Sutras are obscure and
corrupt; Hema-chandra’s corresponding rules are given in Appendix C, but
even these leave many difficulties unexplained. I have not attempted a
translation of this Section, but have contented myself with adding a few
explanatory notes; cf. Lass. App., pp. 49—58.]
(3.) This is clearly explained in Hema-ch. 260, 267.
(4.) Vavado — vydpritah.
(5.) Pudo or puddah = putrah.
(6.) Giddho = gridhrali.
(8.) The Maharashtrf forms, by iii. 5, are savvajjo, etc., while the prose
forms by this Sut. are savvanno, etc.
(9.) Ia is the proper prose form of the indecl. part.; cf. Hema-ch. 271.
(10.) Kadua, gadua = kritwa , gatwa\ cf. Hema-ch. 272.
(11.) This allows such a form as vanani for the neuter nom. or ace.
plural, as well as the Mahar. vanai [v. 26].
(12.) Cf. Hema-ch. 269.
(13.) Bhavissadi, havissadi, huvissadi are the common prose forms of the
future of bhu, not the contracted forms hossam , hohimi, etc.
(14.) Be is used for the root da, as dedi = dadati; but da'issam — fut.
dasydmi.
(15.) Kara is the prose substitute for hri\ kuna [viii. 13] is restricted
to verse.
184
THE P11AKEITAPEAKASA
[sect. XII.
(16.) Chittha = shthd, as chitthadi [cf\ vi. 63, xi. 14].
(17.) Siimara is the prose form for smri ; the other form in viii. 18 is
poetical.
(18.) Cf. v. 14, Yar. Lect.
(19, 20.) These are conjectural. “ Achchha is used in prose for the
root as, ‘ to be as, achchhdmi = asmiA Lassen (p. 346) quotes from the
Sanksh. Sara achchhai, achclihanti, achchhattha or achchhaha. “ AttJii is used
in prose for the root as, ‘ to be,’ with the personal affix tip, i.e., astiA
(21.) This is conjectural; cf. Lass. App., p. 56, and Sanksh. Sara, 15.
If correct, it would imply that ssam is optionally substituted for the affix of
the first \_third~\ person sing, of the future, and also that the previous vowel
may be lengthened: as, Karissam or Icarisam, for Jcarishydmi.
(22.) Itthi is the prose form for stri, *a woman.’
(25.) This allows the form vaam, 1 we,’ as well as the amlie of vi. 43.
(26.) If we adopt Lassen’s first conjecture neh ssitthau, this will refer to
vi. 2, and prohibit the locative form in mmi from being used in prose. As
the form in him (as, tahim, etc.) is also found in prose, Lassen proposes a
second conject., neh ssihitthah; but as this rule only refers to vi. 2, and him
would still remain by virtue of vi. 7, neh ssitthau is no doubt the true reading.
(27.) The dtmanepada affixes are not used in prose ; cf. Lass. p. 380.
(28.) This Sut. is corrupt, but seems to imply that e may be used before
any personal affix, as in the Mahar. by vii. 34.
(29.) This seems to imply that e may he used for the first person of the
imperative or potential [cf. Lass. App.] as hhave for bhaveyam, but this is
very doubtful. The cha would imply that the common form [vii. 18 ?] may
be also used.
(30.) Cf. iii. 18.
(31.) If Lassen’s conjecture is correct, the forms of ii. 35 are not used
in prose.
(32.) This Sut. is important, as fixing the name of the principal Prakrit
dialect, with which the Saurasem so nearly agrees. All the rules, therefore,
of Sections i.—ix. equally apply to the prose or the poetical Prakrit, with
the exception of the points mentioned in this Section.
APPENDIX D.
185
APPENDIX D.
ON PAGE 132 (III. 58).
It has been stated in the little Introduction to Prakrit Grammar prefixed
to this work, that Prof. Lassen has established the principle that a long
vowel is shortened before two consonants; with the two subsidiary rules, (a)
if the long vowel be retained, one of the consonants is elided, and (5) a
short vowel before two consonants is occasionally lengthened by eliding one
of them (cf. Inst. pp. 139-144). There can be no doubt that these are
continually confirmed by the later Prakrit; but how are we to account for
the fact, that Yararuchi nowhere states them in his Sutras ? The MS.
W has indeed a spurious Sutra, Samyoga-purvo hrasivah, (see App. A. 3),
which, though certainly not Yararuchi’s, seems to affirm the first; yet the
Prakrita Sanjivam, an elaborate commentary on Yararuchi (for an account of
which, see preface), never recognises it, even in explaining such a change as
that of ‘ dscharya’ to Achchhera ’ (see note, p. 109). Bhamaha resorts to an
artifice to include a partial application of (b) in i. 17; and the Sanksh.
Sara allows (b) in its 190th rule, ‘ (dirghah) ad id ul lupta-vyanjaned
(Lass. App. p. 47). But it is only Hema-chandra who states them clearly in
the two following rules: (Pada i. Sut. 42) Lupta-ya-ra-va-sa-sha-sam sa-sha-
sdm diryhah ;—‘ wherever a y, r, v, s, sh or s is elided, which precedes or
follows an 's, sh, or s, the preceding vowel is lengthened: as, Pasai, siso, dso,
puso, etc., for Pa'syati, sishya, a'swa , pushya, etc.’—(Pada ii. Sut. 90) Na
dirghanusivardt (which follows a Sut. corresponding to Yar. iii. 50, q.v .);
‘ the doubling previously enjoined [of. Yar. iii. 50] is forbidden after a long
vowel or an anuswara [for the latter, cf. Yar. iii. 56], whether these have
been introduced by previous rules [ Idhshanika ] or are the original letters of
the word [ aldkshaniha ] ; as nisdso for niswasa (where the i is lengthened by
Hema-chandra’s rule quoted above); isaro for iswara (where the z is originally
186 THE PRAKRITAPRAKASA :
long), and similarly phdso, pdsam for spar'sa and pdr'swa ,’ etc. Bhamaha by
the examples given in his commentary on Yararuchi iii. 58, would seem to
include such words under it: but surely if Yararuchi had intended this rule
to exercise such a wide influence, he would have expressed himself more
clearly, and would have specified the class by a better denomination than
sevddi, as he had before done in a similar case in i. 20 by tundu-rupeshu,
which at once defines the class of words to which it applies; see Comment.,
ad locum. Yor is there any reason, if such a principle had been recognised
by him, for his inserting such a Sutra as viii. 46, as the words therein
specified would have at once come within its influence, without needing any
further remark. Are we therefore to interpret the silence of Yararuchi as
evidence that the principle in question grew up gradually in Prakrit, and
only became fulfy recognised in later times ?
APPENDIX E.
APPENDIX E.
HEMACHAKDRA’S SUTRAS OK VOWELS IK SAKDHI.
(Cf. Var. iv. 1),
(Pada i. Sutras 3—9).
[As Vararuchi is defective in this part of Prakrit Grammar, the following
Sutras from Hema-chandra are added to supply the deficiency. I have
omitted many of the examples, as these are often obscure and corrupt from
the general absence of Sanskrit explanations. Prof. Lassen has discovered many
of these rules by induction from the instances in the plays; cf. Inst., pp. 167-9.]
3. Dirgha-hrasivau mitho vrittau .—Vrittau samase swaranam dfrgha-
hraswau bahulam bhavatah, mithah parasparam; hraswasya dfrghah;
( antarvedih ) antavei ; kwachin na bhavati, ‘ juvaiano ;’ kwachid vikalpah,
(pati-griliam) paiharam paiharam, etc.: dirghasya hraswah [examples obscure
in MSS.]—kwachid vikalpah, jaunaa&am jaiindadam, naisottam nauottam ,
vahumuham vahumuham [ cf note, p. 135].
4. Padagoh sandhir vd .—Sanskritoktah sandhih sarvah prakrite padayor
vyavasthitavibhashaya bhavati; vdsesi vasa is'i [ = vydsa rishih ?]; visamaavo
visamaaavo [explained in marg. by visharndtapaK], etc.—Padayor iti kim ?
pdu , pa'i, etc.—Bahuladhikarat 1 kwachid ekapade ’pi; Icdhii, Icdhi.
5. Na yuvarnasydswe. Tvarnasya wvarnasya cha, aswe varne pare [«.<?.,
followed by a different vowel], sandhir na bhavati. Aswa iti kim ?
Puhaviso [= prithivi + fsa].
6. Edotoh «^»r^.—Ekara-okarayoh, sware pare, sandhir na bhavati.
7. Swarasyodvritte. —Vyanjana-sampriktah swaro, vvanjane lupte, yo
’vasishyate, sa * udvritta ’ iha uchyate a vowel, which has lost its
original consonant by elision, is called udvritta ] ; swarasya, udvritte sware
pare, sandhir na bhavati. [_Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 170].
8. Tyddeh. —Tip-admam swarasya, sware pare, sandhir na bhavati; hoi
iha = bhavati iha.
9. Lulc. —Swarasya, sware pare, bahulam lug bhavati; nfsasusasa —
nisw r asochchhwasau (niswasa -f uchchhwasa). [ Cf note transl. p. 136.]
1 Eor this, see Preface.
188 PKAKRITAPRAKASA :
INDEX OF PRAKRIT WORDS
OCCURRING IN THE FOREGOING PAGES . 1
A. f^j)
Ai = ayi, ix. 12 (not api).
Ansu = asru, iv. 15 (for gender, cf.
note p. 137).
Anso = ansah,iv.l4 — aswah, iv.15.
Akko == arkah, ii. 1. iii. 3.
Aggi == agnih (v. 14-18. vi. 60, 61.
Aggho = argil all, ii. 1.
Ankuso — ankusah, ii. 43.
Anko — ankah, iv. 17.
Ankollo = ankotliah, ii. 25 (Sans.
* ankolah ’ ?)
Anguli = anguri, ii. 30.
*
Achcliha = as {root), xii. 19 (Saur.) ?
Achchham = akshi, iv. 12, 20.
Achchhi == akshi, iii. 30. iv. 20.
Achchhariam = ascharyam, xii. 30.
*
{Saur.)
Achchheram — ascharyam, i. 5. iii.
18, 40.
Ajaso = ayasas, ii. 2.
Ajja = aho, ix. 17 (arya or adya?).
Ajjhao = adhyayah, iii. 28.
Atthf = asthi {neut.), iii. 11, 51.
Annttanta, *)
> — annvartamana,iv.5.
Anuvattanta ,)
Annahavaanam = anyathavachanam,
i. 14.
Atulam = atulam, ii. 2.
Atta, attano = atman,v. 46 (var.lect.)
Atto = artah, iii. 24.
*
Atthi = asti, xii. 20 {Saur.)}
Addha, addhano = adhwa, v, 47.
Adhiro = adhirah, ii. 27.
Aparo = aparah, ii. 2.
Appa, appano = atma, iii.48. v.45,46.
Appullam = atmiyam, iv. 25.
Amu = asau {declined), vi. 23.
Ambam = amram, iii. 53 {cf. note
transl.).
Amso = ansah, iv. 14.
1 As this Index is intended to comprise chiefly the useful Prakrit words,
I have not always inserted those Prakrit examples which only reproduce the
Sanskrit forms unaltered; and also in cases of nominal and pronominal
inflexions, I have often contented myself with a single general reference.
Wherever the Prakrit form differs in gender from the Sanskrit, I have
noticed the discrepancy.
INDEX.
189
Amha, -v
Amhanam, ?■ = asmakain, vi. 51.
Amhe, J
Amhe — vayam, asman, vi. 43.
Amhehim, etc. = asmabhih, etc, vi.
47, 49, 53.
Ariho = arhah, iii. 62.
Are, particle, ix. 15.
Alahi = alam, ix. 11.
Aliam = alfkam, i. 18.
Alhado = ahladah, iii. 8.
Avakkhai = pasyati, viii. 69.
Avajalam = apajalam, ii. 2.
Avaranho == aparahnah, iii. 8.
Avari = upari, i. 22.
Avavasai = avakasate, viii. 35.
Avavahai — avagahate, viii. 34.
Avahara'i — avaharati, iv. 13.
Avahaso = avahasah, iv. 21.
Avahovasam = ubhayaparswam, iv.
33.
Avasariam — apasritam, iv. 21 (v.l.)
Avvo = aho, ix. 10 {cf. Lass. p. 369).
Asivam, asivvam = asivam, iii. 58.
Asu, asum iv. 16 ; see asu, infra.
Aso (or rather ‘aso,’ cf. i. 2) — aswah,
iii. 58.
Assa, assim = asya, asmin, vi. 15-17.
Asso = aswah, i. 2. iii. 58.
Aha = asau, adas, vi. 24.
Ahaam = aham, vi. 40.
Ahake == aham ( Mag .), xi. 9.
Aham = aham, vi. 40.
Ahammi = aham, mam, vi. 41.
Ahijaf — abhijatih, i. 2.
Ahimajju — abhimanyuh, iii. 17.
Ahimunko = abhimuktah, iv. 15.
A ' (^TT)
A
Aado — agatah, ii. 7.
Aidi = akritih, ii. 7.
Audi = avritih, ii. 7.
*
Anatti = ajnaptih, iii. 55.
/
1 / / • / ••• r r
Ana = ajna, m . do.
Analakkhambho,') = ahinastambhah,
Analakhambho, ) iii. 57. iv. 29.
/ *
Adaro = adarah, ii. 2.
*
Apelo = apidah, i. 19.
*
Amelo = apidah, ii. 16.
a
Avatto = avartah, iii. 24.
Asi = asit, vii. 25.
*
Aso = aswah, i. 2. (iii. 58?).
Asu, asum = asu (conject.) iv. 16.
Ahijai = abhijatih, i. 2.
L ( t )
la = iti, i. 14.
Iarassim, etc. = itarasmin, vi. 2.
Ingalo = angarah, i. 3. ii. 30.
Ingiajjo = ingitajnah, iii. 5.
A
Ingianno = ingitajnah, xii. 8. (Saur.)
Inam v
Inam / = idam, vi. 18.
Idam ^
Itthi = stri, xii. 22. ( Saw .)
Ima = idam (crude form), vi. 14,
15, 16.
Iraina, imena = anena, vi. 3, 14.
Imesim = esham, asam, vi. 4.
Isi (isi ?) = ishat, i. 3.
Isf = rishih, i. 28.
Issaro = fswarah, iii. 58.
Iha = idam (loc. sing.), vi. 16, 17.
190
PRAKRITAPRAKASA :
I- (t)
Isalu = irshavan, iv. 25.
*
Isaro = fswarah, iii. 58.
U. (s3)
TTa, uaha = pasya, pasyata, i. 14
{cf. transl. note).
Ukka = ulka, iii. 3.
TJkkero = utkarah, i. 5.
Ukkhaam, ukkha- = utkhatam, i. 10.
Uchchha = uksha, iii. 30.
Uchchhitto = utkshiptah, iii. 30.
Uchchhu = ikshuh, i. 15. iii. 30.
Ujjuo = rijuh (rijukah), iii. 52.
Uttarijjam,
Uttarfam,
TJdu = rituh, i. 29. ii. 7.
uttariyam, ii. 17.
Uddhumaf = uddhamati, viii. 32.
Uppalam = utpalam, iii. 1.
Uppao = utpatah, iii. 1.
Ubbhavai = udbhavati, yiii. 3.
Umbaram = udumbaram, iv. 2.
Umha = ushma, iii. 32.
Ulavo = ulapah, ii. 15.
Uluhalam = ulukhalam, i. 21.
Uvviva'i = udvijate, viii. 43.
XJvvella'i = udveshtate, viii. 41.
Uvasaggo = upasargah, ii. 15.
Ussavo = utsavah, iii. 42. {cf. v.l.)
Ussuo = utsukah, iii. 42.
E. (tj)
Ea = eva, iv. 5.
Earn — ekam, iii. 58 = evam, iv. 5.
Earaha = ekadasa, ii. 14, 44.
Ekkam = ekam, iii. 58.
Enhim = idamm, iv. 33.
Ettiam, = etavat, iv. 25, Comm.
Eddaham,) ( cf. App. B.)
Etto = etasmat, vi. 20, 21.
Ettha = etasmin, vi. 21 (or rather
‘atra’; cf. Lass. p. 129).
Edam = etad, enam, vi. 22.
Edina, edena = etena, vi. 3.
Edesim,
Edana, > = etesham, etasam, vi. 4.
Edanam, '
Eravano = airavatah, i. 35. ii. 11.
Eriso = l'drisah, i. 19, 31.
Evva = eva, iv. 5.
Esa, esi, ese = eshah, xi. 10. (Mag.*)
Esa, eso = eshah, vi. 19, 22.
o. c^rr)
Okkhalam = uldkhalam, i. 21.
Ovahai = avagahate, viii. 34.
Ovasai' = avakasate, viii. 35.
Osariam = apasaritam, iv. 21.
Ohaso =s avahasah, iv. 21.
K. (qr)
Kaam = kritam, i. 27. v. 23 {cf. note)
Ka'iavo = kaitavah (?), i. 36.
Kai'a = kada, vi. 8.
Kai = kapih, ii. 2.
Kaiirao = kauravah, i. 42.
Kaiisalo = kausalam (?). i. 42.
Kachcham == karyam, x. 11. ( Pais .)
Kanja = kanya, x. 10. {Pais.)
Kanjaa = kanyaka, xii. 7. (Saur.)
INDEX.
191
Kade = kritah, xi. 15. [Mag.)
Kadha'i = kwathati, viii. 39.
Kadhoram = kathoram, ii. 24.
Kanaam = kanakam, ii. 42.
Kaniaro, kanni- = karnikarah.iii. 58.
Kannauram,) /
* * > — karnapuram, iv. 1.
Kannaiiram, J
Kaneru — karenuh [fern, only) iy. 28.
Kanho = krishnah, iii. 33, 61.
Kattari = kartarf, iii. 24.
Katto, kado — kasmat, vi. 9.
Kattha, kammi, etc. = kasmin, vi. 7.
Kadua = kritwa, xii. 10 [Sour .); cf.
Hema-ch. App. C.
Kandotto = ntpalam [$Q.ns.Jcandotah ?)
iv. 33.
Kamandho = kabandhah (Sans. Jca-
mandhah}), ii. 19.
Kammo = karman, iv. 6, 18.
Kamso = kansah, iv. 14. (note tr.)
Kayye = karyam, xi. 7. [Mag.)
Kara = kri [duJcrin ) viii. 13. xii. 15,
Karidani = kritwa, xi. 16 [Mag.)
Karisa = krish [root), viii. 11.
Kariso = kanshah, i. 18.
Kalambo = kadambah, ii. 12.
Kalunam = karunam, ii. 30.
Kalbaram = kahlaram, iii. 8.
Kasatam = kashtam, x. 6. [Pais.)
Kasano = krishnah, iii. 61.
• • •
Kasaam = kashayam, ii. 43.
Kaha, kaham = katham, iv. 16.
Kahim, etc. = kasmin, vi. 7, 8.
Ka = kri ( dukrin ), viii. 17.
Kauna — kritwa, iv. 23. viii. 17.
Katunam = kritwa, x. 13. [Pais.)
Kalasam, Kalaa- = kalayasam, iv. 3.
Kasa = kasya, vi. 5.
Kaham = karishyami, vii. 16.
Kahavano = karshapanah, iii. 39.
Kahia = chakara, viii. 17; cf. vii. 24.
Kahe = kada, vi. 8.
Kii= kritih, i. 28.
Kichcha = kritya, i. 28.
Kina = kena, vi. 3.
Kina'i = krinati, viii. 30.
Kino = kinnu, ix. 9.
Kitti = kirtih, iii. 24.
Kira, kila = kila, ix. 5.
Kiria = kriya, iii. 60.
Kirito = kritah, iii. 62.
Kilanto = klantah, iii. 62.
Kilittham = klishtam, iii. 60.
Kileso — klesah, iii. 62.
Kilittam == klriptam, i. 33.
Kiva = kripa, i. 28.
Kisaro = krisarah, i. 28.
Kisi = krishih, i. 28.
Kissa = kasyah, vi. 6.
Kfa, kia, kii, kie, = kasyah, vi. 6
( cf. v. 24, transl. note).
Kira'i — kriyate, viii. 60.
Kise =j kasyah, vi. 6.
Kualaam, kuva- = kuvalayam, iv. 5.
Kukkheao = kauksheyakah, i. 44.
Kuchchhi = kukshih, iii. 30.
Kuna = kri [dukrin), viii. 13.
Kumbhaaro, *) = kumbhakarah,
Kumbharo, j iv. 1.
Kusumappaaro, 4 — kusumaprakarah,
Kusumapaaro, ) iii. 57.
Kedhavo = kaitabhah, ii. 21, 29.
Kettiam, 1 = kiyat, iv. 25, Comm.
Keddaham, j cf. App. B.
192
PRAKRITAPRAKASA !
Keriso = ki'drisah, i. 19; cf. i. 31.
Kelaso = kailasah, i. 35.
Kevattao = kaivartakah, iii. 22.
Kesim = kesham, kasam, yi. 4.
Kottimam = kuttimam, i. 20.
• • • •
Kotthuho = kaustubhah, i. 41. iii. 12.
Komuf = kaumudf, i. 41.
Kosambf = kausambf, i. 41.
Kosalo = kausalam (?), i. 42.
Kkhu = khalu, ix. 6.
Kh. (^r)
Khaiam = khaditam, i. 10.
Khaggo — khadgah, iii. 1.
Khanam — kshanam, iii. 31.
• •
Khado = kbsatab, iii. 29.
Kbando = skandah, iii. 29.
Kbandbo = skandbah, iii. 29.
Kbama = kshama, iii. 31 = ksbma,
iii. 63.
Khambho = stambbah, iii. 14, 50.
Khaliam = skbalitam, iii. 1, 50.
Kha = kbad {root), viii. 27.
Kbaiam = khaditam, i. 10.
Khanu = stbanub, iii. 15.
Kbujjo = kubjab, ii. 34.
Khuppa = masj {root), viii. 68.
Khodao = spbotakab, iii. 16.
G. (71)
Gaa = gada, ii. 2.
Gaiiravam = gauravam, i. 43.
Gao = gajah, ii. 2.
Gaggaro = gadgadah, ii. 13.
Gacbchham = gamisbyami, vii. 16.
Gade = gatab, xi. 15. {Mag.)
Gaddo = gartah, iii. 25.
Gaddabo = gardabbab, iii. 26.
* * f
Gadua = gatwa, xii. 10. {Saw.)
Gabbbinam — garbhitam, ii. 10.
Gamma!',
Gamijja'i, > = gamyate, vii. 9. viii. 58.
Gamia’i, '
Gariho = garbah, iii. 62.
Garuam,| == guru, gurvf, i. 22 {cf.
Garui, ) iii. 65).
Gahavaf = grihapatih, iv. 32.
Gahijjai, gabi- = gribyate, viii. 61.
Gabiram — gabbiram, i. 18.
Ga, gaa — gai {root), viii. 25. 26.
Garavam — gauravam, i. 43.
Gaha = gatba, ii. 27.
Gittbi = grishtih, i. 28.
Giddbo = gridhrah, xii. 6 ( Saur .) ?
Gimbo = grisbmah, iii. 32.
Gira = gir, iv. 8.
Gunthi — grishtib, iv. 15.
Gujjbao = guhyakah, iii. 28.
Genba = grab {root), viii. 15 = gri-
hana, ix. 2.
Gotthi = gosbthf, iii. 1.
Gola = godavarf, iv. 33.
Gh. ( -EJ )
Ghana = gbrina, i. 27.
Gharam = griham, iv. 32, 33.
Ghe, = grah {root), viii. 16 {cf.
Ghet,) transl.).
Gheuna = grihitwa, iv. 23.
Gbettavvam == grabitavyam, viii. 16.
Ghettuna = grihitwa, viii. 16 {cf.
note, transl.).
INDEX.
Ghettunam — grihftwa, x. 13. [Pais.)
Ghola = ghuna [root), viii. 6.
Ch. (^)
Chaitto = chaitrah, i. 36.
Chaiitthi == chaturthi, i. 9.
Chaiiddaha == chaturdasa, ii. 14.
Chaiiddahf = chaturdasi, i. 9.
Chadu, chadu = chatu, i. 10.
Chatunham (chaiinham ?) = ehatur-
nam, vi. 59.
Chattari, 9 = chatwarah, chaturah,
Chattaro, 3 vi. 58.
Chandima = chandrika, ii. 6.
Chando, chandro = chandrah, iii. 4.
Chamaram, cha- = chamaram, i. 10.
Champa! = charchayati, viii. 65.
Chala'i, challa'i == chalati, viii. 53.
Chalano = charanah, ii. 30.
Chatuliam = chaturyam, iv. 33.
Chittha = shtha, xii. 16 (Saw.); cf.
vi. 63. xi. 14.
China!' = chinoti, viii. 29.
Chindham, 'f = chihnam, i. 12. iii.
Chendham, S 34.
Chilado = kiratah, ii. 30, 33.
Chishtha = shtha, xi. 14. (Mag.)
Chihuro = chikurah, ii. 4.
Chnmvai* (-ba!) = chumbati, viii. 71.
Chotthi, | = chaturthi, chaturdasi,
Choddahi, 5 i. 9 ; cf ii. 44.
Choriam = chauryam, iii. 20.
Chh. (^)
Chhatthi = shashthi, ii. 41.
Chhanam = kshanam (kshanah?),
iii. 31.
2 c
Chhattavanno = saptaparnah, ii. 41.
Chhama — kshama, iii. 31.
Chhammuho = shanmukhah, ii. 41.
Chharam = ksharam, iii. 30.
Chhavao = savakah, ii. 41.
Chhaha, -i == chhaya, ii. 18. v. 24.
Chhinda! == chhinatti, viii. 38.
Chhiram = kshiram, iii. 30.
Chhuam = kshutam, iii. 30.
Chhunno = kshunnah, iii. 30.
Chhuddho — kshuhdhah, iii. 30.
Chhuram — kshurah (masc.) iii. 30.
Chhettam — kshetram, iii. 30.
J- («r)
Jaa, jai = yada, i. 11.
Jala, etc. — yada, vi. 8.
Jain madam,") ,
■ / ‘ v — yamunatatam, iv. 1.
Jaiinaadam,)
Jaiina = yamuna, ii. 3.
Jakkho = yakshah, ii. 31. iii. 29, 51.
Janjo = yajnah, xii. 7. (Saur.)
Jattln = yashtih, ii. 31. (cf. note, tr.)
Jadharam = jatharara, ii. 24.
Jannao = janakah, iii. 52.
Janno = yajnah, iii. 44.
Janhu = jahnuh, iii. 33.
Jatto, jado = yasmat, vi. 9.
Jampal — jalpati, viii. 24.
Jambhaa! = jrimbhate, viii. 14.
Jamrao = janma, iii. 43. iv. 18.
Jaso = yasas, ii. 31. iv. 6, 18.
Jalia, jaha = yatha, i. 10.
Jahano (-nam?) = jaghanam (neut.),
ii. 27.
Jahitthilo = yudhishthirah, i. 22.
ii. 30.
194
] ’ K A K K1T A P R A K A S A :
Ja — yavat, iv. 5.
Jana = jna (root), viii. 23.
Jamauo = jamatrikah, i. 29.
Jamaa, -aro = jamata, v. 35.
Java = yavat, iv. 5.
Jasa — yasya, vi. 5.
Jahe = yada, vi. 8.
Jina = ji (root), viii. 56, 57.
Jina = yena, vi. 3.
Jivva'i = jfyate, viii. 57 (cf. vii. 9).
Jissa, etc. — yasyah, vi. 6.
Jfam = jfvitam, ii. 2. iv. 5.
Jfi, jfe, etc. — yasyah, vi. 6 (cf. v. 22).
Jfa = jya, iii. 66.
Jfviam = jfvitam, iv. 5.
Jfha = jihwa, i. 17. iii. 54.
Jujjhai = yudhyate, viii. 48.
Juguchchha = jugupsa, iii. 40.
Juggam = yugmam, iii. 2.
Juva, juvano = yuva, v. 47.
Jura = krudh (root), viii. 64.
Jettiam, 4 = yavat, iv. 25 (cf. App.
Jeddaham,J B.)
Jevva = eva, xii. 23. (Saw.)
Joggo = yogyah, iii. 2.
Jovanavanto = yauvanavan, iv. 25.
Jovvanam = yauvanam, i. 41. iii. 52.
Jh - (S3)
Jha, jhaa = dhyai (root), viii. 25, 26.
Jhijja = kshi (root), viii. 37.
Th. (?)
Tha, thaa = shtha (root), viii. 25, 26.
Thiam = sthitam, v. 13, 22.
?. ()
llando — dandah, ii. 35 (cf. xii. 31).
Dasano — dasanah, ii. 35.
Dola = dola, ii. 35 (cf. xii. 31).
N. (nr)
Naanam — nayanam, ii. 2.
Naaram = nagaram, ii. 2.
Naiggamo = nadfgramah, iii. 57.
Naisotto = nadfsrotas, iv. 1 (cf. iii. 52)
Naf = nadf, ii. 42. v. 19-22,29. vi. 60.
Nafgamo = nadfgramah, iii. 57.
Nafsotto = nadfsrotas, iv. 1.
Naiilam == nakulam, ii. 2.
• *
Nakkho = nakhah, iii. 58.
Naggo = nagnah, iii. 2.
Nachchai = nrityati, viii. 47.
Nattao, -f — nartakah, -kf, iii. 22.
Nado = natah, ii. 20.
• • •
Navara = kevala, ix. 7.
Navari, particle, ix. 8.
Navi = na -j- api, ix. 16.
JSTaham — nabhas, iv. 6, 19.
Naho — nakhah, iii. 58.
Nahalo = lahalah (?), ii. 40; cf.
var. lect. and note, transl.
Niachchha (?) = dris, viii. 69 ; cf.
note, transl. and v. 2.
Jfichcham = nityam, iii. 27.
Nijjharo = nirjharah, iii. 51.
Nitthuro = nishthurah, iii. 1.
* • • • '
Nidalam = lalatam (Sans, nitalam),
iv. 33.
Nidda = nidra, i. 12.
N id d alii = nidra van, iv. 25.
INDEX.
195
Nipphiio = nishpayah, iii. 35.
Nimmanai — nirmati, viii. 36.
Nivattao = nivartakah, iii. 24.
Mvido = nividah, ii. 23.
• • »
jSTivvudam = nirvritam, i. 29.
Nivvudi = nirvritih, ii. 7.
Msadho = nishadhah, ii. 28.
Nisa = nisa, ii. 43.
Kissaso = niswasah, iii. 58.
•
Nihaso = nikashah, ii. 4.
Nihio, 4 = nihitah, iii. 58 (cf iv.
Mhitto,) 33.
Nisaso = niswasah, iii. 58.
Nnnam, nuna = ndnam, iv. 16.
ISTeuram = nupuram, i. 26.
jNeddam = nidam, i. 19. iii. 52.
Nedda = nidra, i. 12.
jSTeho = sneliah, iii. 1, 64.
jSTo ine var. lect.) == nah, vi. 44, 51.
jNTomallia = navamallika, i. 7.
dvolla = nud (root), viii. 7.
Nhanam = snanam, iii. 33.
T - C rf )
Taa, tai = tada, i. 11.
Taanim = tadamm, i. 18.
Taiani = tritiyam, i. 18.
Tai, tae, etc. = twaya, twayi, vi. 30.
Tala = tada, vi. 8.
Taitto, etc. = twat, vi. 35.
Tam = tad, tam, vi. 22.
Tam = twam, vi. 26. twain ( ?), vi.27.
Tansam = tryasram, iv. 15.
Tanam = trinam, i. 27.
Tamil = tanvi, iii. 65.
Tambam (?) = tarnram, iii. 53 (cf.
note, transL)
Tambo = stambah, iii. 13.
Tarai, tiTai = saknoti, viii. 70.
Talaam = tadagah (masc.), ii. 23.
Talaventaam = talavrintakam, i. 10.
Taluni = tar uni, x. 5 (Pais.)
Taha, taha = tatha, i. 10.
Tahi, -m = tasmin, tarhi, iv. 16. vi. 7.
Ta = tavat, iv. 5.
Tariso = tadrisah, i. 31.
Talaventaam = talavrintakam, i. 10.
Tava = tavat, iv. 5, 6.
Tasa = tasya, vi. 5, 11.
Tahe = tada, vi. 8.
Tina = tena, vi. 3.
Tinni = trayah, trin, vi. 56.
Tinham = tikshnam, iii. 33. = tra-
yanam, vi. 59.
Tissa, tise, tie, -a, etc. = tasyah, vi. 6.
Tihim, tisu = tribhih, -shn, vi. 55,60.
Tujjha, tumha, etc. = tava, vi. 31.
Tujjhe — yuyam, yushman, vi. 28,
29. ( Yushmad declined, vi. 26—39)
Tunhio, -hikko = tushmkah, iii. 58.
Turn, ) ,
r = twam, twam, vi. 26, 27.
Tumam, J
Tumai = twaya, vi. 33.
Tumo, tuha = tava, vi. 31.
Turiam = twaritam, viii. 5.
Tnvara = twar (root), viii. 4.
Tnhaaddham, 4
> = tavarddham, iv. 1.
Tuhaddham, )
Turam = turyam, iii. 18, 54.
Tusa'i = tushyati, viii. 46.
Te = te, vi. 22. == tava, twaya,vi. 32.
Tettiam, 4 = tavat, iv. 25 (cf.
Teddaham, S App. B.)
Teraha = trayodasa, ii. 14, 44.
196
PRAKRITAPRAKASA :
Teraho === trayodasah, i. 5.
Teloam, 0 = trailokyam, i. 85.
Tellokkam,) iii. 58.
Tesim = tesham, tasam, vi. 4.
To, tatto — tasmat, vi. 10.
Tondam — tundah (masc.), i. 20.
• • • • ' *
Tti — iti, i. 14 {cf. App. A, 27.)
Th. ( ^ )
Thavao = stavakah, iii. 12, 50.
Thanu = sthanuh [Siva), iii. 15.
Thirapa — trip {root), viii. 22.
Thuf = stutih, iii. 12.
D - (^)
Daichcho — daityah, i. 36.
Daivam — daivam, i. 37. iii, 58.
Dai'ssam = dasyami, xii. 14. ( Saur.)
Dansanam = darsanam, iv. 15.
Dachchham = drakshyami, vii. 16.
Dachchho = dakshah, iii. 30.
Dattham = dashtam or drishtam,
iv. 12.
Davaggf = davagnih, i. 10.
Dasamuho = dasamukhah, ii. 45.
Dasaraho = dasarathah, ii. 45.
Dasavalo = dasabalah, ii. 45.
Dalia = dasa, ii. 44.
Dahamulio = dasamukhah, ii. 45.
Daharaho = dasarathah, ii. 45.
Dahavalo = dasabalah, ii. 45.
Dahim = dadhi, v. 25, 30.
Daske = dakshah, xi. 8 {Mag.)
Daiina = datwa, iv. 23.
Dadimam == dadimam, ii. 23.
Dadha = danshtra, iv. 33.
Da tun am == datwa, x. 13 {Pais.).
Dalimam = dadimam, ii. 23.
Davaggi = davagnih, i. 10.
Daham = dasyami, vii. 16.
Diaro = devarah, i. 34.
Diaho == divasah, ii. 2, 46.
Diggham — dfrgham, iii. 58.
Ditthf = drishtih, i. 28. iii. 10,
50, 51.
Dinnam = dattam, viii. 62.
Disa = dis, iv. 11.
Diham = dirgham, iii. 58.
Duallam, duulam = dukulam, i. 25.
Duiam — dwitiyam, i. 18.
Dukkhio = duhkhitah, iii. 58.
Duyyane = durjanah, xi. 7 {Mag.)
Duve == dwau, vi. 57.
Duvvario = dauvarikah, i. 44.
Duhaiam, duhaijjai = dwidhakri-
tam, dwidhakriyate, i. 16.
Duhio = duhkhitah, iii. 58.
Duma! — dunoti, viii. 8.
De = te (tava), twaya vi. 32. =
/
da, xii. 14 {Saur.)
Dearo = devarah, i. 34.
Devatthui, devathui, = devastutih,
iii. 57.
Devvam = daivam, i. 37. iii. 58.
Dehi = dehi, vi. 64.
Do, doni = dwau, vi. 57.
Donham == dwayoh, vi. 59.
Dohaiam, dohaijjai = dwidhakritam,
dwidhakri} T ate, i. 16.
Dohim, etc. = dwabhyam, etc., vi. 54.
Dohalo == dohadam {neut.), ii. 12 {cf.
transl., note).
Doho, droho = drohah, iii. 4.
INDEX.
197
Dh. (*j)
Dh an am = dhanam, iv. 12.
Dhanavanto,) ,
1 = dhanavan, iv. 25.
Dhanalo, )
Dhammillam 7 = dhammillah(7?2a<sc.)
Dhammellam ) i. 12.
Dha = dhav ( dhdvu ), viii., 27.
Dhfa = duhita (Sans. ‘ dhida ’), iv.
33.
Dhiram = dhairyam, i. 39. iii. 18, 54.
Dhuna'i = dhunoti, viii. 56.
Dhutto — dhurtah, iii. 24.
Dhura = dtiur, iv. 8.
Dhuvvai, ')
£ = dhuyate, viii. 57.
Dhunijjai ',)
Dhuda = duhita, iv. 33.
p. (q)
Paadam, paadam = prakatam, i. 2.
Pakhalo, = prakhalah, ii, 27.
Paiiam, pauam = prakritam, i. 10.
Paiitti = pravrittih, i. 29.
Paiimam = padmam, iii. 65.
Paiiro = paurah, i. 42.
Paiiriso = paurushah, i. 42.
Paottho = prakoshthah, i. 40.
Pachdiakkham (sic. leg.) = pratyak-
sham, iii. 27.
Pachchham = pathyam, iii. 27.
Pachchhimam = paschimam, iii. 40.
Pajjatto = paryaptah, iii. 1.
Pajjunno = pradyumnah, iii. 44.
Pattanam = pattanam, iii. 23.
Padcia = pataka, ii. 8.
Pada = pat (root), viii. 51.
Padi = prati, cf. ii. 8, note, transl.
Padinsudam — pratisrutam, iv. 15.
Padivaa, padi- == pratipad, i. 2. iv. 7.
Padivaddf = pratipattih, ii. 7 (cf.
transl. note).
Padisaro = pratisarah, ii. 8.
Padisiddhf, padi- = pratisparddhin,
i. 2. iii. 3,7; cf. note, p. 108.
Padliamo = prathamah, ii. 28.
Pannaralio = panchadasah, iii. 44.
Pannasa = pinchasat, iii. 44.
Panha, -ho m prasnah, iii. 33. iv. 20.
Panhudam = prasnutam, iii. 33.
Pattharo, -tharo = prastarah, i. 10.
Pabhavai = prabhavati, viii. 3.
Pamilla'i, -lla'i = pramflati, viii. 54.
Pambo — paksbman, iii. 32.
Parahuo = parabhritah, i. 29.
Paribbava'i = paribhavati, viii. 3.
Palanghano = pralanghanah, ii. 27.
Palittam == pradiptam, ii. 12.
Pallattham = paryastam, iii. 21.
Pallanam = paryanam, iii. 21.
Pavattho = prakosbtbah, i. 40.
Pavanuddbaam, *) = pavanoddhatam,
Pavanoddhaam, ) iv. 1, cf. note transl.
Pasuttam, pa- = prasuptam, i. 2.
Pasiddhf, pa- = prasiddhih, i. 2.
Paharo, paharo = praharab, i. 10.
Paho = patbin, i. 13.
Pa, paa = gbra (root), viii. 20.
Paavadanam = padapatanam, iv. 1
(cf. note transl.)
Pauam = prakritam, i. 10.
Pauso = pravrish, iv. 11, 18.
Paclisiddbi = pratisparddhin, i. 2.
iii. 37.
198
PRAKR1TAPKAKASA :
Panainto = prana vat, iv. 25.
Paniam = paniyam, i. 18.
Parao, paravao = paravatah, iv. 5.
Palei = padyate, viii. 10.
Pavadanam = padapatanam, iv. 1.
(cf. note transl.)
Pia, piaro = pita, v. 35.
Piapiam, pfa- = pftapitam, iv. 1 (?)
Pikkam = pakwam, i. 3. iii. 3.
Pittham = pishtam, i. 12.
Piva = iva, x. 4. (Pais.)
Piam, pialam = pftam, -alam, iv. 26.
Pinattanam, 1
' ' [ = pinata, iv. 22.
Pmada, )
Puttham ,)
-n , r = prishtham, iv. 20.
Putthi, ) *
Pudo, puddo = putrah, xii. 5 (Saur.)
Puppham — pushpam, iii. 35, 51.
Purillam = paurastyam, iv. 25, com¬
ment. ; cf. App. P, and transl.
Puriso = pumshah, i. 23.
Pulaa'i — pasyati, viii. 69; cf. p. 173.
Pulisaha = purushasya, xi. 12 (Mag.)
Puvvanho = purvahnah, iii. 8.
Puso, pusso = pushyah, iii. 58.
[Query puso ; cf. App. D.]
Puhavi = prithavf, i. 13, 29.
Pekkha'i, pechchhai' = prekshate, v.
14, var. lect., cf. xii. 18, and p. 173.
Pettham = pishtam, i. 12.
Pendam, pin- = pindam, i. 12.
Peramam = preman, iii. 52. \_Qy.
^pemmo’ ? cf. iv. 18, but in Ratn.,
p. 26, 12, pemmam.~]
Perantam = paryantam, i. 5. iii. 18.
Pokkharo == pushkarah, i. 20. iii. 29.
Potthao = pustakam ( neut .), i. 20.
Ph. ( Tfi )
Phanso = sparsah, iii. 36. iv. 15.
Phanaso = panasah, ii. 37.
Phandanam = spandanam, iii. 36.
Phariso = sparsah, iii. 62.
Pharuso = parushah, ii. 36.
Phaliam == patitam (?), viii. 9.
Phaliha = parikha, ii. 30, 36.
Phaliho = parighah, ii. 30, 36.
Phaliho = sphatikah, ii. 4, 22.
Phutta'i,
Phudai
= sphutati, viii. 53.
Bh. (v)
Bhaapphai — vrihaspatih, iv. 30.
Bha'iravo = hhairavah, i. 36.
Bhattam = bhaktam, iii. 1.
Bhattaro = bharta, v. 31, 33.
Bhaddam = bhadram, iv. 12.
Bhamai = bhramati, viii. 71.
Bhamiro = bhramanasflah, iv. 24.
Bhara = smri (root), viii. 18 ; cf. p.
167.
Bharanijjam, , .
L = bharamyam, n. 17.
Bharaniam, )
Bharaho = bharatah, ii. 9.
Bha = bhi (root), viii. 19.
Bhaanam = bhajanam, iv. 4.
Bhaa, bhaaro = bhrata, v. 35.
Bhanam = bhajanam, iv. 4.
Bharia = bharya, x. 8 (Pais.)
1 Por words beginning with b, sec under v.
INDEX.
199
Bhingaro = bhringarah, i. 28.
Bhingo = bhringah, i. 28.
Bhindivalo = bhindipalah, iii, 46.
Bhindai == bhinatti, viii. 38.
Bhisim = visini, ii. 38.
Bhuttam = bhuktam, iii. 50.
Bhumaa (?) = bhuh, iv. 33.
Bhe — vah ( yushmakam), vi. 37.
Bhottuna = bhuktwa, viii. 55.
M - (to
i
Maam = mritam, i. 27.
Mai, mae = maya, mayi, vi. 46, 52.
Ma'itto, etc. = mat, vi. 48.
Mai'lam = malinam, iv. 31.
Maiidam = mukutam, i. 22. ii. 1.
Maiilam, -lo = mukulam, i. 22. ii. 2.
Mauro = mayurah, i. 8.
Mauho = mayukhah, i. 8.
Mao == madah, ii. 2.
Mansam = mansam, iv. 16.
Mansu == smasru ( neut .), iv. 15.
Maggo = margah, ii. 2. iii. 50.
Macbchbia = makshika, iii. 30.
Majjha = asmad (base) [asmad de¬
clined vi. 40—53.J
Majjhanno = madhyahnah, iii. 7.
Majjham = madhyam, iii. 28.
Made = mritah, xi. 15. (Mag.)
Madham = mathah (masc.), ii. 24.
Manansim = manaswini, i. 2. iv. 15.
Manduro = mandukah, iv. 33.
Mantham = mastam, iv. 15.
Mam, mamam = mam, vi. 42.
Mara = mri (root), viii. 12.
Marisa = mrish (root), viii. 11.
Mala — mrid (root), viii. 50.
Malinam = malinam, iv. 31.
Masanam = smasanam, iii. 6.
Massu = smasru (neut.) iii. 6; cf.
iv. 15.
Maba, majjha, etc. = mama, vi. 50.
Mahaaddham,^ = mamarddham, iv.
Mahaddham, ) 1 ; cf. note transl.
Mahuam = madhukam, i. 24.
Mahum = madhu, v. 25 — 27, 30.
Maando = makandah, iv. 33.
Maa = mata, v. 32.
Mauo = matrikah, i. 29.
Maindo = chutah (makandah), iv. 33.
Manansim = manaswini, i. 2. iv. 15.
Manuso = manushah, ii. 42.
Mala = mala, v. 19—24. vi. 60.
Malaillo = malavan, iv. 25.
Masam = mansam, iv. 16.
Mianko — mrigankah, i. 28.
Mio = mitrah, iii, 58.
Michchha == mithya, iii. 27.
Mitto = mitrah, iii. 58.
Milanam = mlanam, iii. 62.
Miva = iva, ix. 16.
Muingo = mridangah, i. 3.
Mukkham = mushkah (masc.) iii. 29.
Muggaro = mudgarah, iii. 1.
Muggo = mudgah, iii. 1.
Muchchha = murchha, iii. 51.
Munjaano = maunjayanah, i. 44.
Muna = jna (root), viii. 23.
Munalo = mrinalah, i. 29.
Mutti = murttih, iii. 24.
Muddho = mugdhah, iii. 1.
Muham = mukham, ii. 27.
Muhalo = mukharah, ii. 30.
.200
P RAKR ITAP RAKA S A I
Mudhattanam = mudhatwam, iv. 22.
Mudhada — mudhata, iv. 22.
Meliala = mekhala, ii. 27.
Melio = megho, ii. 27.
Mekho = megho, x. 3. (Paw.)
Motta = niukta, i. 20.
Moro = mayurah, i. 8.
Moho = mayukhah, i. 8.
Mmiva = iva, ix. 16.
Mhi, mho, mhu, rnlia = asmi, small,
vii. 7.
R. ( x)
Raanam = ratnam, iii. 60,
Raadam = rajatam, ii. 2, 7.
Rachchha = rathya, iii. 27.
Rannam 1 == aranyam, i. 4.
Ranno, -nna = rajnah, -na, v. 38, 42.
Rattam (?) = raktam, viii. 62.
Rattf = ratrih, iii. 58.
Ramanijjam,
Ramanfam,
Ramijja'i,
Rammai,
Rasf, rassf = rasmih, iii. 2, 58.
Raaiilam, raulam = rajakulam, iv. 1.
Raa == raja, v. 36 (declined v. 36—
44).
Raino, -na = rajnah, -na, v. 38, 43.
Rai = ratrih, iii. 58.
Rachi = rajan, x. 12 {Paw.).
Rasaho = rasabhah, ii. 27.
Raha = radha, ii. 27.
== ramamyam, ii. 17.
ramyate, viii. 58.
Richchho = rikshah, i. 30. iii. 30.
Rinam = rinam, i. 30.
Riddho = riddhah, i. 30.
Rukkho = vrikshah, i 32. iii. 31.
Runnam = ruditam, viii. 62.
Ruddo, rudro, = rudrah, iii. 4.
Rundha = rudli (root), viii. 49.
Ruppam = rukmam, iii. 49.
Ruppini = mkmini, iii. 49.
Rumbha = rudh (root), viii. 49.
Ruva = rud (root), viii. 42.
Rusai = rushyati, viii. 46.
Re, particle, ix. 15.
Rochchham = rodishyami, vii. 16.
Rottuna = ruditwa, viii. 55.
Rosainto = roshavan, iv. 25.
l. (^r)
Lagga'i = lagati, viii 52.
Lachchln = lakshmf, iii. 30.
Latthi = yashtih, ii. 32 (cf. note
transl., ii. 31).
Laskase = rakshasah, xi. 8. (Mag.)
Lahui = laghwi, iii. 65.
Laa — raja, xi. 10. (Mag.)
Lichchha = lipsa, iii. 40.
Lijjha'i = lihyate, viii. 59.
Luna = lu (root), viii. 56.
Luvva'i, lunijjai' = luyate, viii. 57.
Lubha'i = marshti ( mrij ), viii. 67.
Lonam == lavanam, i. 7.
Loddhao = lubdhakah, i. 20. iii. 3.
1 This form continually occurs in the Prakrit songs in the 4th Act of
the Yikramorvasi.
INDEX.
201
v. (1)
Vaa'i = saknoti, viii. 70.
Yaanam = vacbanam, ii. 2, 42.
*
Vaam = vayam, xii. 25. (Saur.)
Va'ideso = vaidesali, i. 36.
Va'ideho = vaidebah, i. 36.
Yai'ram — vairam, i. 36.
Vaisampaano — vaisampayanab, i.36.
Ta'isaho = vaisakhah, i. 36.
Va'isio = vaisikah, i. 36.
Yakkalam = valkalam, iii. 3.
Yaggi = vagmi, iii. 2.
Vankam = vakram, iv. 15.
Yacbchai = vrajati, yiii. 47.
Yacbcbbaro = vatsarah, iii. 40.
Yacbchho = vriksbab, i. 32. iii. 31.
(declined v. 1 — 13, 27. vi. 63).
„ , ,, (vatsab, iii. 40.
Yachcbho = «
(vakshas, iii. 30. iv. 18.
Yajjai = trasati, viii. 66.
Yajjhao = vahyakab, iii. 28.
Yancbamam = vanchaniyam, iv. 14.
Yadisam = vadisam, ii. 23.
• •
Yaddhai — vardhate, viii. 44.
Yanam = vanam, iv. 12.
Yanno = vamah, iv. 15.
• • •
Yanhi = vahnih, iii. 33.
Yattamanam = vartamanam, iii. 24.
Yatta = vartta, iii. 24.
Yattia = vartika, iii. 24.
Yaddho = vriddhah, i. 27.
Yandam = vrindam, iv. 27.
Yappho = vashpah (ushman) iii. 38.
Yamchamam = vanchaniyam (?),iv.l4.
Yammaho — manmathah, ii.39. iii.43
Yammo = varma, iv. 18.
/
Yamh anj a = brahmany ah, xii. 7 ( Saur ).
Yamhabo=brahmanah, iii. 8 (<?/.vi.64)
Yamha, vamhano = brahma, v. 47.
Yarai' — vrinoti, viii. 12.
Yalahf = vadabhih, ii. 23.
Yaliam = vyalikam, i. 18.
Yal q, particle, ix. 12.
Yasahi = vasatih, ii. 9.
Yasaho = vrisbabhah, i. 27. ii. 43.
Yahiro = badhirah, ii. 27.
Yahumuham,') == vadhumukham,
Yahumuham,) iv. 1.
Yahu = vadhuh, v. 19,21, 29. vi. 60.
Ya, vaa = mlai (root) viii. 21.
Yaa == vacb, iv. 7.
Yaavadanam, see paa-
Yau = vayub (declined v. 14—18,
27. vi. 60, 61).
Yaraha = dwadasa, ii. 14, 44.
Yavado(r) = vyapritab, xii. 4 ( Saur.)
Yahittam = vyahritam, iii. 52.
Yaho = vashpah, iii. 38, 54.
Yia = iva, ix. 3, 16. xii. 24.
Yiaddi = vitardib, iii. 26.
• •
Yiana — vedana, i. 34.
Yiano = vyajanam (neut.), i. 3.
Yianam = vitanam, ii. 2.
Yiarillo, viarullo == vikaravat, iv. 25.
Yiinho = vitrisbnah, i. 28.
• • •
Yiudam = vivritam, i. 29. ii. 7.
Yiulam = vipulam, ii. 2.
Yinhiam — vrinhitam, i. 28.
Yikkavo = viklavab, iii. 3.
Yikkinai,*) ., , ,, ...
y = vikrmite, vm. 31.
Yikkei, j
Yicbcbhaddi = vichcbbardih, iii. 26.
Yijja = vidya, iii. 27.
Yijjulf, vijju — vidyut, iv. 26. iv. 9.
202
PRAKULTArilAKASA :
Yinchhuo = vriechikah, i. 15,28. iii.41.
* /
Yinjo = vijnah, xii. 7 (Saur.)
Yinjato = vijnatah, x. 9 ( Pais.)
Yinjlio = vindhyah, iv. 14.
Yidavo = vitapah, ii. 20.
Yinnanam = vijnanam, iii. 44.
Yinhu = vishnuh, i. 12. iii. 33.
Yipphariso = visparsah, iii. 51, 62.
Yiwjho = vindhyah, iv. 14.
Yimhao = vismayah, iii. 32.
Yisa'i (?) = grasate, viii. 28.
Yelli = vallih, i. 5.
Yo = vah, vi. 29, 37.
Yochehham = vakshyami, vii. 16.
Yoram = badaram, i. 6.
Yrandam = vrindam, iv. 27; cf. iii. 4.
S. (it)
A
A
Siala, etc.
= sodhwa, xi. 16 {Mag.).
= srigalah, xi. 17 (Mag.
)
s. (^ )•
Yisam — visam, ii. 38.
Yisf = vrishi, i. 28.
Yisura = khid (root), viii. 63.
Yissaso = viswasah, iii. 58.
Yihalo = vihwalah, iii. 47.
Yfriara = vfryam, iii. 20. „
Yfsattho — viswastah, i. 17.
Yisambho = visramhhah, i. 17
Yfsaso = viswasah, iii. 58.
Yiha — nibhi (root), viii. 19.
Yujjha'i = budhyate, viii. 48.
Yutta’i (?) = majjati, viii. 68.
Yuttanto = vrittantah, i. 29.
Yundavanam = vrindavanam, i. 29.
Yea = eva, ix. 3.
Yeana = vedana, i. 34; cf. iv. 1.
Yechchham = vetsyami, vii. 16.
Yejjam == vaidyam, iii. 27.
Yediso = vetasah, i. 3. ii. 8.
Yeddha'i = veshtate, viii. 40.
Yenhu = vishnuh, i. 12.
Yettuna — viditwa, viii. 55.
Yebbhalo = vihwalah, iii. 47.
Yeluriam = vaiduryam, iv. 33.
Saadho = sakatah, ii. 21.
Saahuttam = satakritwas, iv. 25 (cf.
App. B.)
Saa, sa'i = sada, i. 11.
Sai'ram — swairam, i. 36.
Samvattao = samvartakah, iii. 24.
Samvudara = samvritam, i. 29.
Samvudi = samvritih, ii. 7.
Samvellai = samveshtate, viii. 41.
Sankanto = sankrantah, iii. 56.
Sanka — sanka, iv. 17.
Sakka = sak (root), viii. 52.
Sakko = sakrah, iii. 3.
Sachavam = sachapam, ii. 2.
Sajjo = shadjah, iii. 1.
Sanjado = samyatah, ii. 7.
Sanjado = samyatah, ii. 7.
Sadha = sata, ii. 21.
Sada = sad (root) viii. 51.
Saneho = snehah, iii. 64.
Santhaviam,") ,
• > = sansthapitam, i. 10.
Santhaviam,)
Sandho = shandhah, ii, 43.
Sanna 1 = sanjna, iii. 55.
Vinnatti = vijnaptih would he a better example; cf. note, transl.
i
INDEX.
m
Sannam = slakshnam, iii. 33.
Saddaha = srat + dha (root), yiii. 33.
Saddalo = sabdavan, iv. 25.
Sananam = snanam, x. 7. ( Pais .)
Sappharn — sashpam, iii. 35.
Sabhari = sapharf, ii. 26.
Sabhalam = saphalam, ii. 26.
Samattho = samastah, iii. 12.
Samiddhf = samriddhih, i. 2.
Sampattf = sampattih, iv. 17.
Sampadi = samprati, ii. 7.
Sambhava = sam + bhu(roo^), viii. 3
Sammaddo = sammardab, iii. 26.
• • '
Sara = sri {root), viii. 12.
Sarado = sarad, iv. 10, 18.
Sararuham,')
> = saroruhara, iv. i.
Saroruham,)
Sana = sarit, iv. 7.
Sarichchham = sadriksham, i. 2.
iii. 30. {cf i. 31).
Sariso = sadrisab, i. 31.
Saro = saras, iv. 6, 18.
Salaha = slagha, iii. 63.
Savabo = sapathab, ii. 15, 27.
Savomuo, -muo = (?), iv. 1 [cf. note
transl.)
Savvajjo = sarvajnah, iii. 5.
Savvanjo = sarvajnab, x. 9. {Pais.)
A
Savvanno = sarvajnab, xii. 8 {Saur.)
Savvattha, etc. = sarvasmin, vi. 2.
Sahamana, -m = sahamana, v. 24
(for this Sut., cf. note transl.)
Sahassahuttam = sahasrakritwas, iv.
25 {cf. App. B.)
Saba = sabba, ii. 27.
Saaro = sagarah, ii. 2.
Samiddhf = samriddhih, i. 2.
Sarango = sarngah, iii. 60.
Sarichchham = sadriksham, i. 2.
Savo = sapah, ii. 15.
Si = asi, vii. 6.
Sialo = srigalah, i. 28.
Siasiam — sitasitam, iv. 1.
Singaro = sringarah, i. 28.
Sitthf = srishtih, i. 28.
Sidhilo = sithilah, ii. 28.
Siniddho = snigdhah, iii. 1.
Sinho == sisnah, iii. 33.
Sitthao = sikthakam {neut.), iii. 1.
Sinduram = sinduram, i. 12.
Sindhavam = saindhavam, i. 38.
Sibha = sipha, ii. 26.
Sim = tesham, tasam, vi. 12.
Siram = siras, iv, 19.
Siraveana, siro- = sirovedana, iv. 1
Sin = srf, iii. 62.
Silittham = slishtam, iii. 60.
Sivino = swapnah, i. 3. iii. 62.
Sfasfam = sitasitam, iv. 1.
Sfbharo = sfkarah, ii. 5.
Sfho = sinho, i. 17.
Snidf = sukritih, ii. 7.
Suuriso = supurushah, ii. 2.
Sujjo = suryah, iii. 19.
Suna = sru {root), viii. 56.
Sundo = saundah, i. 44.
Sunderam = saundaryam,i. 5,44. iii. 18 .
Sutto = suptah, iii. 1. vii. 6.
Supa (?) = mrij {root), viii. 67.
Suppanaha, -f = surpanakha, v. 24.
Sumara = smri(rooQ, viii. 18. xii. 17
Suvvai = sruyate, viii. 57; cf. vii. 9.
Su , particle, ix. 14.
Suf — suchf, ii. 2.
204 PRAKRITAPRAK ASA.
Suro = suryah, iii. 19.
Susai = sushyati, viii. 46.
Se = tasya, tasyah, vi. 11.
Sechcham = saityam, i. 35.
Sejja = sayya, i. 5. iii. 17.
Senduram = sinduram, i. 12.
Sebhalia == sephalika, ii. 26.
Seva, sevva = seva, iii. 58.
Selo = sailah, i. 35.
So = sah, yi. 22.
Soamallam = saukumaryam, i. 22.
iii. 21.
Souna = srutwa, iy. 23.
Sochchham = sroshyami, yii. 16.
Sonha = snusha, ii. 47.
Sottam — srotam, iii. 52.
Somalo = sukumarah, ii. 30 {ef note
transl., and Errata p. xxxii.)
Sommo — saumyah, iii. 2.
Soriam = sauryam, iii. 20.
Sossam = sushma, iii. 2. (of. iii. 32 r)
H. (^)
Hanso = hraswah, iy. 15.
Hake, hage = aliam, xi. 9 {Mag).
Hadakke = hridayam, xi. 6 {Mag.)
Hanumanto,') /
/ V — hanuman, iv. 25.
Hanuma, ) '
Hattho = hastali, iii. 12, 50.
Hado = hatah, ii. 7.
Ham. = aham {asmad decl. yi. 40 — 53.
Hammai = hanti, yiii. 45.
Harisa = hrish {root), yiii. 11.
Hariso = harshah, iii. 62.
Haladda,') = haridra, i. 13. y. 24.
Haladdf, j (on the latter Sut. ef. note
transl.)
Halio == halikah, i. 10.
Havim == havis, y. 25 {ef. iy. 6).
Hasidu, -di, -de, -da — hasitah, xi.
11 {Mag.).
Hasai, hasanti = hasanti, vii. 11.
Hasanto = hasan, vii. 10.
Hasiro = hasanasilah, iy. 24.
Hassai,
... [■ = hasyate, yii. 9. yiii. 58.
Hasrjjai, )
Halio = halikah, i. 10.
Hiaam = hridayam, i. 28.
Hitaakam = hridayam, x. 14 {Pais.)
Hittham = trastam, yiii. 62 {ef. App.
A, 37). 1
Hiri = hrih, iii. 62.
Hire, particle, ix. 15.
Hirai = hriyate, yiii. 60.
Huam (huam ?) — bhutam, yiii. 2.
Huna = hu {root), yiii. 56, 57.
Huya = bhii {root), yiii. 1.
Huvva'i, hunijjai = huyate, yiii. 57.
Hnvia == abhavat, yii. 23; ef. note
transl.
Hnvasu — bhava, ix. 2; ef yii. 18.
Ho = bhu {root), viii. 1.
Hojja, hojja = bhavati, bhavishyati,
etc., vii. 20 (of. note, transl.)
Ilossam, etc. = bhavishyami, yii. 14.
bhavishyamah, vii. 15.
Hohia = abhut, vii. 24 (r/.note trans.)
Hohittha')
Ilohissa )
1 Hemachandra gives three forms, hittham, taddham, and tattham.
STEMEN AUSTIN, FBINTER, HERTFORD.
